Electrical System

EXIT
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
EL
GI
SECTION MA
EM
When you read wiring diagrams:
I Read GI section, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”.
When you perform trouble diagnoses, read GI section, “HOW TO FOLLOW FLOW CHART IN LC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES” and “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL
INCIDENT”.
I Check for any service bulletins before servicing the vehicle. EC
FE
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................5 Service Data and Specifications (SDS).....................41
AT
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR COMBINATION SWITCH...............................................42
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...............5 Check.........................................................................42 PD
HARNESS CONNECTOR................................................6 Replacement..............................................................43
Description ...................................................................6 STEERING SWITCH......................................................44
STANDARDIZED RELAY ................................................8 Check.........................................................................44 FA
Description ...................................................................8 HEADLAMP (FOR U.S.A.) - XENON TYPE -...............46
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING .........................................10 Component Parts and Harness Connector
RA
Schematic ..................................................................10 Location .....................................................................46
Wiring Diagram - POWER - ......................................11 System Description....................................................46
Fuse ...........................................................................20 Schematic ..................................................................49 BR
Fusible Link................................................................20 Wiring Diagram - H/LAMP -.......................................50
Circuit Breaker Inspection .........................................20 CONSULT-II (For auto light operation)......................53
GROUND DISTRIBUTION.............................................21 Trouble Diagnoses/Auto Light Operation ..................54
ST
Engine Room Harness ..............................................21 Trouble Diagnoses/Headlamp (Xenon Type) ............60
Main Harness.............................................................23 Bulb Replacement/Xenon Type .................................62 RS
Engine Control Harness ............................................25 Aiming Adjustment/Xenon Type.................................63
Engine Harness .........................................................27 HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - XENON TYPE -..........65
Body Harness ............................................................28 Component Parts and Harness Connector BT
Body No. 2 Harness ..................................................30 Location .....................................................................65
BATTERY .......................................................................31 Daytime Light System/System Description ...............65
HA
How to Handle Battery ..............................................31 Operation (Daytime light system with xenon
Service Data and Specifications (SDS).....................33 headlamp) ..................................................................67
STARTING SYSTEM .....................................................34 Schematic ..................................................................68
System Description....................................................34 Wiring Diagram - DTRL -...........................................69
Wiring Diagram - START -.........................................35 Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................73
Construction...............................................................36 Bulb Replacement/Xenon Type .................................74 IDX
Removal and Installation ...........................................36 Aiming Adjustment/Xenon Type.................................74
Pinion/Clutch Check ..................................................37 HEADLAMP - Headlamp Aiming Control -.................75
Service Data and Specifications (SDS).....................37 Wiring Diagram - H/AIM - ..........................................75
CHARGING SYSTEM ....................................................38 PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS......................76
System Description....................................................38 System Description....................................................76
Wiring Diagram - CHARGE -.....................................39 Wiring Diagram - TAIL/L -..........................................77
Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................40 Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................79
Removal and Installation ...........................................40 STOP LAMP ..................................................................80
Construction...............................................................41 Wiring Diagram - STOP/L - .......................................80
EXIT
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
BACK-UP LAMP............................................................81 System Description..................................................142
Wiring Diagram - BACK/L - .......................................81 Schematic ................................................................144
FRONT FOG LAMP.......................................................82 Wiring Diagram - WIPER - ......................................145
System Description....................................................82 CONSULT-II .............................................................148
Wiring Diagram - F/FOG - .........................................83 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................151
Aiming Adjustment .....................................................85 Removal and Installation .........................................157
Bulb Specifications ....................................................85 Washer Nozzle Adjustment .....................................158
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS .....86 Washer Tube Layout ...............................................159
System Description....................................................86 HORN ...........................................................................160
Schematic ..................................................................88 Wiring Diagram - HORN - .......................................160
Wiring Diagram - TURN - ..........................................89 CIGARETTE LIGHTER................................................161
Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................92 Wiring Diagram - CIGAR -.......................................161
Electrical Components Inspection .............................92 CLOCK.........................................................................162
ILLUMINATION ..............................................................93 Wiring Diagram - CLOCK -......................................162
System Description....................................................93 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER.....................................163
Schematic ..................................................................94 Component Parts and Harness Connector
Wiring Diagram - ILL - ...............................................95 Location ...................................................................163
TRUNK ROOM AND VANITY MIRROR LAMP ..........100 System Description..................................................163
Wiring Diagram - INT/L - .........................................100 Wiring Diagram - DEF -...........................................164
METER AND GAUGES ...............................................101 CONSULT-II .............................................................166
Component Parts and Harness Connector Trouble Diagnoses...................................................167
Location ...................................................................101 Filament Check........................................................170
System Description..................................................101 Filament Repair .......................................................171
Combination Meter ..................................................103 AUDIO ..........................................................................172
Wiring Diagram - METER - .....................................104 System Description..................................................172
Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Schematic ................................................................173
Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode ........................106 Wiring Diagram - AUDIO -.......................................174
Flexible Print Circuit (FPC)......................................107 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................181
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................108 Wiring Diagram - REMOTE -...................................183
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................112 AUDIO ANTENNA .......................................................184
WARNING LAMPS ......................................................115 System Description..................................................184
System Description..................................................115 Wiring Diagram - P/ANT - .......................................185
Schematic ................................................................118 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................186
Wiring Diagram - WARN - .......................................119 Location of Antenna.................................................186
CONSULT-II (For door warning lamp).....................123 Antenna Rod Replacement .....................................186
Trouble Diagnoses/Door Warning Lamp .................124 Window Antenna Repair ..........................................187
Trouble Diagnoses/Stop and Tail Lamp Sensor......126 TELEPHONE (Pre wire)..............................................188
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................127 Wiring Diagram - PHONE - .....................................188
A/T INDICATOR...........................................................128 TRUNK LID AND FUEL FILLER LID OPENER .........190
Schematic ................................................................128 Wiring Diagram - T&FLID -......................................190
Wiring Diagram - AT/IND -.......................................129 TRUNK CLOSURE ......................................................192
WARNING CHIME .......................................................132 Component Parts and Harness Connector
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...................................................................192
Location ...................................................................132 System Description..................................................192
System Description..................................................132 Wiring Diagram - T/CLOS - .....................................193
Wiring Diagram - CHIME - ......................................134 Trouble Diagnosis ....................................................195
CONSULT-II .............................................................136 ELECTRIC SUNROOF ................................................198
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................137 Component Parts and Harness Connector
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................141 Location ...................................................................198
WIPER AND WASHER................................................142 System Description..................................................198
Component Parts and Harness Connector Wiring Diagram - SROOF - .....................................199
Location ...................................................................142 CONSULT-II .............................................................201
EXIT
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................202 CONSULT-II .............................................................279
DOOR MIRROR ...........................................................203 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................280
Wiring Diagram - MIRROR - ...................................203 POWER DOOR LOCK - IVMS ....................................288
GI
AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR..................204 Component Parts and Harness Connector
Wiring Diagram - I/MIRR -.......................................204 Location ...................................................................288
POWER SEAT (Passenger side) ...............................205 System Description..................................................289 MA
Schematic ................................................................205 Schematic ................................................................290
Wiring Diagram - SEAT - .........................................206 Wiring Diagram - D/LOCK -.....................................291
HEATED SEAT ............................................................210 CONSULT-II .............................................................295
EM
Wiring Diagram - HSEAT - ......................................210 On board Diagnosis - Mode III (Power door lock
REAR SUNSHADE ......................................................212 operation).................................................................298 LC
Component Parts and Harness Connector Trouble Diagnoses...................................................300
Location ...................................................................212 MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM - IVMS...........309
System Description..................................................213 Component Parts and Harness Connector EC
Wiring Diagram - SHADE -......................................214 Location ...................................................................309
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................216 System Description..................................................310
FE
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)....218 Schematic ................................................................312
Component Parts and Harness Connector Wiring Diagram - MULTI - .......................................313
Location ...................................................................218 CONSULT-II .............................................................319 AT
System Description..................................................219 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................320
Schematic ................................................................221 Electrical Components Inspection ...........................329
Wiring Diagram - ASCD - ........................................222 ID Code Entry Procedure ........................................330 PD
CONSULT-II .............................................................227 INTERIOR ILLUMINATION CONTROL - IVMS ..........333
Fail-safe System Description...................................229 System Description..................................................333
FA
Fail-safe System Check...........................................230 Schematic ................................................................337
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................231 Wiring Diagram - ROOM/L - ....................................338
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................239 CONSULT-II .............................................................345 RA
ASCD Wire Adjustment ...........................................240 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................346
IVMS (LAN)..................................................................241 STEP LAMP - IVMS ....................................................355
Overall Description ..................................................241 Component Parts and Harness Connector BR
Component Parts Location ......................................242 Locations..................................................................355
System Diagram ......................................................243 System Description..................................................356
Sleep/Wake-up Control............................................244 Schematic ................................................................357
ST
Fail-safe System ......................................................244 Wiring Diagram - STEP/L -......................................358
CONSULT-II .............................................................245 CONSULT-II .............................................................363 RS
On board Diagnosis.................................................252 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................364
On board Diagnosis - Mode I (IVMS REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION
communication diagnosis) .......................................253 - IVMS ..........................................................................366 BT
On board Diagnosis - Mode II (Switch monitor)......255 System Description..................................................366
Schematic ................................................................257 Wiring Diagram - SW/ILL - ......................................367
Wiring Diagram - COMM -.......................................258 CONSULT-II .............................................................369 HA
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................262 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................370
BCM (Body Control Module) .....................................266 THEFT WARNING SYSTEM - IVMS ...........................371
Schematic ................................................................266 Component Parts Harness Connector Location......371
LOCAL CONTROL UNITS (LCUs) .............................268 System Description..................................................372
Schematic ................................................................268 Schematic ................................................................374 IDX
POWER WINDOW - IVMS...........................................272 Wiring Diagram - THEFT -.......................................375
Component Parts and Harness Connector CONSULT-II .............................................................383
Location ...................................................................272 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................384
System Description..................................................273 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER - IVMS ................397
Schematic ................................................................274 Component Parts and Harness Connector
Wiring Diagram - WINDOW - ..................................275 Location ...................................................................397
EXIT
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
System Description..................................................398 Engine Compartment...............................................496
Schematic ................................................................402 Luggage Compartment ............................................497
Wiring Diagram - AUT/DP - .....................................403 Passenger Compartment.........................................498
CONSULT-II .............................................................410 HARNESS LAYOUT ....................................................500
On board Diagnosis - Mode IV (Automatic drive Outline......................................................................500
positioner operation) ................................................414 How to Read Harness Layout .................................501
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................416 Engine Room Harness ............................................502
IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System - NATS) ..442 Instrument Harness .................................................505
Component Parts and Harness Connector Main Harness...........................................................506
Location ...................................................................442 Engine Control Harness ..........................................508
System Description..................................................443 Body Harness and Tail Harness..............................510
System Composition................................................443 Body No. 2 Harness ................................................512
Wiring Diagram - NATS -.........................................444 Engine Harness .......................................................514
CONSULT-II .............................................................445 Room Lamp Harness...............................................515
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................447 Air Bag Harness ......................................................516
How to Replace IVIS (NATS) Antenna Amp. ..........459 Front Door Harness .................................................517
INTEGRATED HOMELINK TRANSMITTER ...............460 Rear Door Harness..................................................518
Wiring Diagram - TRNSMT - ...................................460 SPLICE LOCATION.....................................................519
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................461 How to Read Splice Location ..................................519
INFINITI COMMUNICATOR (IVCS).............................462 Engine Room Harness ............................................520
Precaution................................................................462 Main Harness...........................................................522
Communicator Response Center Telephone Instrument Harness .................................................523
Number for Technicians...........................................462 Engine Control Harness ..........................................524
Component Parts and Harness Connector Engine Harness .......................................................525
Location ...................................................................463 Body Harness and Tail Harness..............................526
System Description..................................................464 Body No. 2 Harness ................................................527
Schematic ................................................................470 Room Lamp Harness...............................................528
Wiring Diagram - IVCS -..........................................471 Front Door Harness .................................................529
CONSULT-II .............................................................475 Rear Door Harness..................................................530
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................479 BULB SPECIFICATIONS ............................................531
Trouble Diagnoses for Intermittent Incident ............489 Headlamp.................................................................531
Demonstration Mode ...............................................490 Exterior Lamp ..........................................................531
System Setting (When IVCS unit is replaced) ........492 Interior Lamp............................................................531
LOCATION OF ELECTRICAL UNITS.........................496 WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (Cell codes) ..................532
EXIT
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to INFINITI Q45 is as follows: GI
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer-
ing wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt MA
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front EM
seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring
harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual. LC
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per- EC
formed by an authorized INFINITI dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by intentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
FE
Module, see the RS section.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this AT
Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses (except satellite sensor and side air bag mod-
ule) covered with yellow insulation tape either just before the harness connectors or for the com-
plete harness are related to the SRS. PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-5
EXIT
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
I The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
I The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the
illustration below.
Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector.
CAUTION:
Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
SEL769DA
EL-6
EXIT
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description (Cont’d)
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
I A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those
related to OBD.
I The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnec-
tion. GI
I The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustra-
tion below.
CAUTION: MA
I Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
I Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
EM
[Example]
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL769V
HA
IDX
EL-7
EXIT
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS
Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
SEL881H
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS

1M .................... 1 Make 2M .................... 2 Make
1T .................... 1 Transfer 1M⋅1B .................... 1 Make 1 Break
SEL882H
EL-8
EXIT
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
SEL661TA
EL-9
EXIT
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Schematic
TEL041M
EL-10
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — POWER —

BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION
NOTE: For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “GROUND DISTRIBUTION”, EL-21.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL042M
EL-11
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)
TEL043M
EL-12
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL044M
EL-13
EXIT
TEL045M
EL-14
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL046M
EL-15
EXIT
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ACC” OR “ON”
TEL047M
EL-16
EXIT
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ON” AND/OR “START”
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL048M
EL-17
EXIT
TEL049M
EL-18
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL050M
EL-19
EXIT
Fuse
a. If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem
before installing new fuse.
b. Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than
specified rating.
c. Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse
holder properly.
d. Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is
not used for a long period of time.
CEL083
Fusible Link
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or
by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit
tester or test lamp.
CAUTION:
a. If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit
(power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted.
In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of
problem.
b. Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Impor-
CEL403 tant: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness,
vinyl or rubber parts.
CEL404
Circuit Breaker Inspection

For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to
20 seconds.
SBF284E
EL-20
EXIT
GROUND DISTRIBUTION
Engine Room Harness
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL043M
EL-21
EXIT
GROUND DISTRIBUTION
Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)
CEL044M
EL-22
EXIT
GROUND DISTRIBUTION
Main Harness
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL045M
EL-23
EXIT
GROUND DISTRIBUTION
Main Harness (Cont’d)
CEL046M
EL-24
EXIT
GROUND DISTRIBUTION
Engine Control Harness
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL047M
EL-25
EXIT
GROUND DISTRIBUTION
Engine Control Harness (Cont’d)
CEL008M
EL-26
EXIT
GROUND DISTRIBUTION
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
CEL989
FA
Engine Harness
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL990
EL-27
EXIT
GROUND DISTRIBUTION
Body Harness
CEL156A
EL-28
EXIT
GROUND DISTRIBUTION
Body Harness (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL157A
EL-29
EXIT
GROUND DISTRIBUTION
Body No. 2 Harness
CEL993
EL-30
EXIT
BATTERY
CAUTION:
a. If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster
battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt booster battery.
b. After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are
tightly clamped to battery terminals for good contact.
c. Never add distilled water through the hole used to check GI
specific gravity.
MA
EM
How to Handle Battery
METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE
LC
The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharg-
ing a battery. EC
I The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept
clean and dry.
I The terminal connections should be clean and tight. FE
I At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level.
This also applies to batteries designated as “low maintenance”
MEL040F
and “maintenance-free”. AT
I When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of
time, disconnect the negative battery terminal. (If the vehicle PD
has an extended storage switch, turn it off.)
FA
RA
BR
MEL041F
I Check the charge condition of the battery. ST

Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep
a close check on charge condition to prevent over-discharge.
RS
BT
HA
MEL042F
CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

WARNING:
Do not allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, IDX
fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, do not
touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your
hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
EL-31
EXIT
BATTERY
How to Handle Battery (Cont’d)
I Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool.
I Add distilled water up to the MAX level.
MEL043F
SULPHATION
A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended
for a long time and the specific gravity will become less than
1.100. This may result in sulphation on the cell plates.
To determine if a battery has been “sulphated”, note its volt-
age and current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less
current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of
charging sulphated batteries.
A sulphated battery may sometimes be brought back into ser-
vice by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, fol-
SEL709E
lowed by a battery capacity test.
SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK

1. Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level.
2. Use the chart below to correct your hydrometer reading
according to electrolyte temperature.
Hydrometer temperature correction
Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F) Add to specific gravity reading
71 (160) 0.032
66 (150) 0.028
60 (140) 0.024
MEL042FA 54 (130) 0.020
49 (120) 0.016
43 (110) 0.012
38 (100) 0.008
32 (90) 0.004
27 (80) 0
21 (70) −0.004
16 (60) −0.008
10 (50) −0.012
4 (40) −0.016
−1 (30) −0.020
−7 (20) −0.024
−12 (10) −0.028
−18 (0) −0.032
EL-32
EXIT
BATTERY
How to Handle Battery (Cont’d)
Corrected specific gravity Approximate charge condition
1.260 - 1.280 Fully charged
1.230 - 1.250 3/4 charged
1.200 - 1.220 1/2 charged GI
1.170 - 1.190 1/4 charged
1.140 - 1.160 Almost discharged MA
1.110 - 1.130 Completely discharged
CHARGING THE BATTERY EM

CAUTION:
I Do not “quick charge” a fully discharged battery. LC
I Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being
charged.
I When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then EC
turn on the charger. Do not turn on the charger first, as
this may cause a spark.
I If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 60°C (140°F), FE
stop charging. Always charge battery at a temperature
below 60°C (140°F).
Charging rates: AT
Amps Time
50 1 hour PD
25 2 hours
10 5 hours
5 10 hours FA
Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate.
Note: The ammeter reading on your battery charger will auto- RA
matically decrease as the battery charges. This indi-
cates that the voltage of the battery is increasing nor-
mally as the state of charge improves. The charging BR
amps indicated above refer to initial charge rate.
I If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies
more than .050, the battery should be replaced. ST
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
RS
Type 80D26R
Capacity V-AH 12-55 BT
Cold cranking current A
582
(For reference value)
HA
IDX
EL-33
EXIT
STARTING SYSTEM
System Description
Power is supplied at all times
I to ignition switch terminal q 1
I through 30A fusible link (letter g , located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box).
With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied
I from ignition switch terminal q 4
I to park/neutral position switch terminal q 1
I through park/neutral position switch terminal q 2 , with the selector lever in the P or N position
I to terminal q 1 of the starter motor windings.
The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and starter motor. The
starter motor is grounded to the engine block. With power and ground supplied, cranking occurs and the engine
starts.
EL-34
EXIT
STARTING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — START —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL962A
EL-35
EXIT
STARTING SYSTEM
Construction
MEL581G
Removal and Installation

REMOVAL
1. Remove steering gear and linkage assembly. (Refer to “ST
section”.)
2. Remove harness connector.
3. Remove starter by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
MEL583G
INSTALLATION
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
MEL582G
EL-36
EXIT
STARTING SYSTEM
Pinion/Clutch Check
1. Inspect pinion teeth.
I Replace pinion if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check
condition of ring gear teeth.)
2. Inspect reduction gear teeth. GI
I Replace reduction gear if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also
check condition of armature shaft gear teeth.)
3. Check to see if pinion locks in one direction and rotates MA
smoothly in the opposite direction.
I If it locks or rotates in both directions, or unusual resistance is
evident, replace. EM
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
LC
STARTER
M2T84671
EC
Type MITSUBISHI make
Reduction gear type
FE
System voltage V 12
No-load
Terminal voltage V 11.0
AT
Current A Less than 145
Revolution rpm More than 3,300 PD
Minimum diameter of commutator mm (in) 31.4 (1.236)
Minimum length of brush mm (in) 11.0 (0.433) FA
30.9 - 37.7
Brush spring tension N (kg, lb)
(3.15 - 3.85, 6.95 - 8.47)
RA
Clearance between pinion front edge and pinion
0.5 - 2.0 (0.020 - 0.079)
stopper mm (in)
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-37
EXIT
CHARGING SYSTEM
System Description
The alternator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle’s electrical system and to keep the battery charged.
The voltage output is controlled by the IC regulator.
Power is supplied at all times to alternator terminal q S through:
I 120A fusible link (letter a , located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box), and
I 7.5A fuse (No. 62 , located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box).
Terminal q B supplies power to charge the battery and operate the vehicle’s electrical system. Output voltage
is controlled by the IC regulator at terminal q S detecting the input voltage. The charging circuit is protected by
the 120A fusible link.
Terminal q E of the alternator supplies ground through body ground E112 .
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 4 , located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to combination meter terminal q 41 for the charge warning lamp.
Ground is supplied to terminal q 25 of the combination meter through terminal q L of the alternator. With power
and ground supplied, the charge warning lamp will illuminate. When the alternator is providing sufficient volt-
age with the engine running, the ground is opened and the charge warning lamp will go off.
If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a fault is indicated.
EL-38
EXIT
CHARGING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — CHARGE —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL051M
EL-39
EXIT
CHARGING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses
Before conducting an alternator test, make sure that the battery is fully charged. A 30-volt voltmeter and suit-
able test probes are necessary for the test. The alternator can be checked easily by referring to the Inspec-
tion Table.
I Before starting, inspect the fusible link.
I Use fully charged battery.
WITH IC REGULATOR
Check the fol-
lowing:
I Warning
Ignition switch Warning lamp Disconnect connector (S, L) and Warning lamp
lamp bulb
“ON” “OFF” ground L harness side. “OFF”
I Fuse for
warning lamp
Warning lamp Damaged IC

“ON” regulator.
Replace.
Warning lamp
“ON”
Engine start. Warning lamp Check the following: Engine idling Warning lamp OK
Engine speed: “ON” I Drive belt “OFF”
1,500 rpm I Fuse for S terminal
I Connector (S, L terminal) con- Warning lamp
nection “ON”
Warning lamp OK Engine speed: More than Damaged IC

“OFF” 1,500 rpm 15.5V regulator.
(Measure B Replace.
terminal volt-
age) No generation Field circuit is
open.
Warning lamp: “CHARGE” warning lamp in combination meter
Note:
I If the inspection result is OK even though the charging system is malfunctioning, check the B ter-
minal connection. (Check the tightening torque.)
I When field circuit is open, check condition of rotor coil, rotor slip ring and brush. If necessary,
replace faulty parts with new ones.
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
The IC regulator warning function activates to illuminate “CHARGE” warning lamp, if any of the following
symptoms occur while alternator is operating:
I Excessive voltage is produced.
I No voltage is produced.

REMOVAL
1. Remove engine upper cover.
2. Remove drive belt from alternator.
3. Disconnect harness connector.
4. Remove alternator.
INSTALLATION
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
MEL585G
EL-40
EXIT
CHARGING SYSTEM
Construction
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
SEL276VG
RA
BR
Service Data and Specifications (SDS) ST

ALTERNATOR
LR1110-707J RS
Type
HITACHI make
Nominal rating V-A 12-110 BT
Ground polarity Negative
Minimum revolution under no-load
Less than 950 HA
(When 13.5 volts is applied) rpm
More than 34/1,300
Hot output current
More than 82/2,500
(When 13.5 volts is applied) A/rpm
More than 105/5,000
Regulated output voltage V 14.1 - 14.7
IDX
Minimum length of brush mm (in) 6.0 (0.236)
1.000 - 3.432
Brush spring pressure N (g, oz)
(102 - 350, 3.60 - 12.34)
Slip ring minimum outer diameter
26.0 (1.024)
mm (in)
Rotor (Field coil) resistance Ω 2.31
EL-41
EXIT
COMBINATION SWITCH
Check
CEL994
EL-42
EXIT
COMBINATION SWITCH
Replacement
For removal and installation of spiral cable, refer to RS section
[“SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)”, “Installation
— Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable”].
I Each switch can be replaced without removing combination GI
switch base.
MA
CEL501 EM
I To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching
screw. LC
EC
FE
CEL406
AT
I Before installing steering wheel, align the steering wheel guide
pins with the screws which secure the combination switch, as PD
shown in the left figure.
FA
RA
BR
SEL151V
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-43
EXIT
STEERING SWITCH
Check
WITH INFINITI COMMUNICATOR (IVCS)
CEL995
EL-44
EXIT
STEERING SWITCH
Check (Cont’d)
WITHOUT INFINITI COMMUNICATOR (IVCS)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL846
EL-45
EXIT
HEADLAMP (FOR U.S.A.) — XENON TYPE —
Component Parts and Harness Connector

Location
SEL856W
System Description
I through 15A fuse [No. 54 , located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box]
I to headlamp relay terminal q 1 and
I to headlamp relay terminal q 7 , and
I through 15A fuse [No. 53 , located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box]
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 14 , located in the fuse block (J/B)].
I to BCM terminal 105 .
Power is also supplied at all times
I to HID relay terminal q 1 , and
I through 20A fuse (No. 61 , located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box)
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
I to BCM terminal q 60 .
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied
Ground is supplied
I to BCM terminals q 56 and 113
I to illumination time control switch terminal q
3
I through body grounds M14 and M47 , and
I to the lighting switch terminals q 8 and q5
I through body grounds E22 and E36 .
HEADLAMP SWITCH OPERATION

Low beam operation
When the lighting switch is turned to 2ND (LOW or HI) or PASS (“C”) position, ground is supplied
I to HID relay terminal q 2
I from the lighting switch terminal q12 .
EL-46
EXIT
System Description (Cont’d)
HID relay is then energized, and power is supplied.
I from the HID relay terminal q 5
I to terminal q 2 LH headlamp
Power is also supplied
I to terminal q 2 RH headlamp GI
Ground is supplied at all times.
I to LH headlamp terminal q 4 and RH headlamp terminal q4
I through body ground E22 and E36 . MA
With power and ground supplied, the low beam headlamps illuminate.
High beam operation/flash-to-pass operation EM

When the lighting switch is turned to 2ND and HIGH (“A”) or PASS (“C”) position, ground is supplied
I to headlamp relay terminal q 2 LC
I from the lighting switch terminal q 12 .
Headlamp relay is then energized, and power is supplied
I from the headlamp relay terminal q 6 EC
I to terminal q 1 of the LH headlamp, and
I to combination meter terminal q 22 for the HIGH BEAM indicator
I from headlamp relay terminal q 3 FE
I to terminal q 1 of the RH headlamp.
Ground is supplied
I to terminal q 3 of the LH headlamp, and AT
I to combination meter terminal q 23
I from the lighting switch terminal q 6
I to terminal q 3 of the RH headlamp PD
With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps illuminate.
FA
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION
BCM is connected to the optical sensor. The optical sensor sends a signal to BCM according to outside
brightness.
RA
When the lighting switch is turned to AUTO position, ground is supplied
I to BCM terminal q 14
BR
When ignition switch is set to ON or START and outside is darker than the prescribed level, ground is sup-
plied ST
I to HID relay terminal q 2 and headlamp relay terminal q 2
I from the BCM terminal q 5 .
HID relay and headlamp relay are energized. RS
Then the low beam headlamps illuminate.
And the high beam headlamps illuminate when the lighting switch is turned to HIGH (“A”) or PASS (“C”) posi-
tions. BT
Auto light operation allows headlamps to turn off when outside is brighter than the prescribed level.
Or the ignition switch is turned to OFF position.
For parking, license and tail lamp auto operation, refer to “PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS” (EL-76). HA
SHUT OFF DELAY
While the headlamps are lit in the auto-light operation mode, the ignition switch is turned from the “ON” to the
“OFF” position. The BCM no longer receives a voltage signal at terminal q 68 . This starts the auto light shut off
delay timer. The timer is set based on the resistance value at BCM terminal q 57 . With the timer running, the
headlamps remain lit. When the timer reaches the end of its cycle, the headlamps turn off. Headlamp light- IDX
ing time can be adjusted from about 0 to 3 minutes. (This function is not applicable to the tail lamps.)
THEFT WARNING SYSTEM

The theft warning system will flash the high beams if the system is triggered. Refer to “THEFT WARNING
SYSTEM — IVMS” (EL-371).
EL-47
EXIT
XENON HEADLAMP
Xenon type headlamp is adopted to the low beam headlamps. Xenon bulbs do not use a filament. Instead,
they produce light when a high voltage current is passed between two tungsten electrodes through a mixture
of xenon (an inert gas) and certain other metal halides. In addition to added lighting power, electronic control
of the power supply gives the headlamps stable quality and tone color.
Following are some of the many advantage of the xenon type headlamp.
I The light produced by the headlamps is white color approximating sunlight that is easy on the eyes.
I Light output is nearly double that of halogen headlamps, affording increased area of illumination.
I The light features a high relative spectral distribution at wavelengths to the human eye is most sensitive,
which means that even in the rain, more light is reflected back from the road surface toward the vehicle,
for added visibility.
I Power consumption is approximately 25 percent less than halogen headlamps, reducing battery load.
SEL956V
EL-48
EXIT
Schematic
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL966A
EL-49
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —
TEL052M
EL-50
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL053M
EL-51
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — (Cont’d)
TEL054M
EL-52
EXIT
CONSULT-II (For auto light operation)

CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector.
GI
MA
SEF046TA EM
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Touch “START”. LC
EC
FE
PBR455D
AT
5. Touch “IVMS”.
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL471W
6. Touch “AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM”. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL485W
I DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are available for the auto
light.
IDX
SEL480W
EL-53
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses/Auto Light Operation
WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
H
No
Do headlamps illuminate with lighting switch E HEADLAMP TROUBLE DIAGNOSES (EL-60)
operation?
Yes
H
No
Do parking, license and tail lamps illuminate with E PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
lighting switch operation? TROUBLE DIAGNOSES (EL-79)
Yes
H
IVMS COMMUNICATION DIAGNOSIS (EL-247 or EL-253)
Does self-diagnostic results exist?
Yes No
SYMPTOM
BASIS
H H
E Repair/Replace according to the self- Select diagnostic procedure on the F

diagnostic results. (EL-249) basis of symptom.
H H
NG
IVMS COMMUNICATION DIAGNOSIS REPAIR/REPLACE
(EL-247 or EL-253)
OK
H H
FINAL CHECK NG
Confirm that the malfunction is completely fixed by operating the system.
OK
H
CHECK OUT
NOTICE:
I When LCU connectors are disconnected for more than 1 minute such as during trouble diagnoses,
the “disconnected” data will be memorized by the BCM. (While BCM memorizes the “disconnected”
data, IVMS communication diagnosis of CONSULT-II will display “PAST NO RESPONSE”.)
Therefore, after reconnecting the LCU connectors, erase the memory.
I To erase the memory, perform the procedure below.
Erase the memory with CONSULT-II (Refer to EL-247.) or turn the ignition switch to “OFF” position
and remove 7.5A fuse [No. 14 located in the fuse block (J/B)].
EL-54
EXIT
(Cont’d)
SYMPTOM CHART
PROCEDURE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
REFERENCE PAGE EL-56 EL-56 EL-57 EL-58 EL-59
GI
(Illumination time control switch check)

MA
(Lighting switch “AUTO” check)

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
EM
(Auto light output check)
(IGN input signal check)

(Optical sensor check)
LC
EC
SYMPTOM
When outside is dark, neither tail lamps nor headlamps turn on by
X X X
FE
auto light operation.
When outside is dark, tail lamps turn on but headlamps do not turn
on by auto light operation.
X AT
When outside is dark, headlamps turn on but tail lamps do not turn
X
on by auto light operation. PD
Light does not turn off when ignition key switch is turned to “OFF”.
X
(when shut off delay is canceled.)
FA
When outside is bright, neither tail lamps nor headlamps turn off
X
by auto light operation.
Shut off delay does not work properly. X X RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-55
EXIT
(Cont’d)
[Lighting switch (AUTO) check]
NG
CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH (AUTO) E Check the following.
INPUT SIGNAL. I Lighting switch
I Harness for open or
CONSULT-II short between BCM and
lighting switch
See “AUTO LIGHT SW” in DATA MONI- I Ground circuit for lighting
TOR mode. switch
SEL852W
When lighting switch is in AUTO:
AUTO LIGHT SW ON
When lighting switch is OFF:
AUTO LIGHT SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
Perform On board diagnosis — Mode II

(Switch monitor) for light switch. Refer to
EL-255.
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-51.
OK
H
Lighting switch (AUTO) is OK.
(Auto light output check)
NG
CHECK AUTO LIGHT OUTPUT SIGNAL/ E Check harness for open or
CIRCUIT. short between BCM and
headlamp relay or tail lamp
CONSULT-II relay.
See “HEADLAMP RELAY” and “TAIL

LAMP RELAY” in ACTIVE TEST mode,
and turn lighting switch to AUTO position.
Headlamp and tail lamp should turn on.
SEL574W ------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON position

or lighting switch to AUTO position.
2. Check voltage between BCM terminal
q5 or q 11 and ground.
Output condition Voltage V
Sensor not struck by light

(Determined to be “dark” by 0
sensor)
Sensor struck by light Approx. 12
SEL098V
OK
H
Auto light output is OK.
EL-56
EXIT
(Cont’d)
(Optical sensor check)
CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR INPUT SIG-
OK
E Optical sensor is OK. GI
NAL.
CONSULT-II
MA
See “OPTICAL SEN” in DATA MONITOR
mode.
SEL572W
When optical sensor is struck by light: EM
More than 3V
When optical sensor is not struck by light:
Approx. 0.5V LC
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC position.

EC
q
52 and ground.
FE
Condition of optical sensor Voltage V
Sensor struck by light More than 3
SEL559UA Sensor not struck by light Approx. 0.5

AT
NG
PD
H
NG
CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR OPEN CIR- E Repair harness. FA
CUIT.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and optical
sensor connector.
2. Check harness continuity between BCM RA
connector and optical sensor connector.
Terminals BR
Optical Continuity
SEL853W BCM
sensor
q q
3
58
q
52 q
2 Yes
ST
q
59 q
1
RS
OK
H
NG
CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR SHORT CIR- E Repair harness. BT
CUIT.
Check harness continuity between BCM
connector and body ground.
HA
Terminals Continuity
SEL017V
q
58 - ground
q
52 - ground No
q
59 - ground
H
OK IDX
Replace optical sensor.
EL-57
EXIT
(Cont’d)
(IGN input signal check)
CHECK ACC AND IGN INPUT SIGNAL. NG Check the following.
E
CONSULT-II I 7.5A fuse [No. 32 ,
located in the fuse block
See “IGN ON SW” in DATA MONITOR (J/B)]
mode. I Harness for open or
SEL499W When ignition switch is ON: short between fuse and
IGN ON SW ON BCM
When ignition switch is OFF:
IGN ON SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER
Check voltage between BCM terminal q

68
and ground.
Termi- Ignition switch position

nals OFF ACC ON START
SEL855W q68 -
Approx. 0V Battery voltage
Ground
OK
H
IGN input signal is OK.
EL-58
EXIT
(Cont’d)
(Illumination time control switch check)
CHECK ILLUMINATION TIME CONTROL

OK Illumination time control
GI
E
SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. switch is OK.
CONSULT-II
MA
See “ILLUM TIME” in DATA MONITOR
mode.
SEL573W When time control switch is fully turned to EM
short time
Approx. 0 kΩ
When time control switch is fully turned to LC
long time
Approx. 1 kΩ
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- EC
TESTER
1. Disconnect BCM connector. FE

2. Check resistance between BCM termi-
nal q
57 and ground.
SEL019V
Time control switch Resistance AT
condition kΩ
Fully short Approx. 0

PD
Fully long Approx. 1

FA
NG
H
NG
RA
CHECK ILLUMINATION TIME CONTROL Replace illumination time
E
SWITCH. control switch.
1. Disconnect illumination time control BR
SEL020V switch.
2. Check resistance between illumination
time control switch terminals q
1 and q3 .
ST
Time control switch Resistance
condition kΩ
Fully short Approx. 0
RS
Fully long Approx. 1
BT
OK
H
HA
Check the following:
I Illumination time control switch ground
circuit
I Harness for open or short between BCM
and illumination time control switch
IDX
EL-59
EXIT
WARNING:
I The xenon headlamp has a high-tension current generating area. Be extremely careful when remov-
ing and installing. Be certain to disconnect the battery negative cable prior to removing or install-
ing.
I When the xenon headlamp is lit, do not touch the harness (covered with red or amber insulation),
bulb itself or the bulb socket with your bare hands.
I Never service a xenon headlamp with wet hands.
I When checking body side harness with a circuit tester, be certain to disconnect the harness con-
nector from the xenon headlamp.
I When the xenon headlamp is lit, the xenon bulb must be installed in the headlamp housing. (Never
turn on xenon headlamp, if the bulb is out of the headlamp housing.)
CAUTION:
Make sure to install the bulb securely; if the xenon bulb is improperly installed in its socket, high-ten-
sion current leaks occur. This may lead to a melted bulb and/or bulb socket.
Trouble Diagnoses/Headlamp (Xenon Type)

Symptom Possible cause Repair order
Any beam does not illuminate. 1. Lighting switch 1. Check lighting switch.
2. Lighting switch ground circuit 2. Check lighting switch ground circuit.
3. Open in the HID relay and head- 3. Check harness between HID relay terminal q 2 /headlamp
lamp relay circuits relay terminal q
2 and lighting switch terminal q
12 /BCM ter-
minal q5 .
Neither high beam illuminates, 1. Headlamp relay 1. Check headlamp relay.
but low beam operates. 2. Open in the headlamp relay circuit 2. Check harness between headlamp relay terminal q
2 and
lighting switch terminal q
12 /BCM terminal q
5 .
Neither low beam illuminates, 1. HID relay 1. Check HID relay.
but high beam operates. 2. Open in the HID relay circuit 2. Check harness between HID relay terminal q
2 and light-
ing switch terminal q
12 /BCM terminal q
5 .
LH high beam does not 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse. (No. 54 , located in fuse, fusible link and
operate, but LH low beam relay box.) Verify battery positive voltage is present at
operates. terminal q
7 of headlamp relay.
2. Bulb 2. Check bulb.
3. Headlamp relay 3. Check headlamp relay.
4. Open in LH high beam circuit 4-1. Check harness between headlamp relay terminal q 6
and LH headlamp for open or short circuit.
4-2. Check harness between lighting switch terminal q
6 and
LH headlamp for open or short circuit.
5. Lighting switch 5. Check lighting switch.
LH low beam does not 1. 20A fuse 1. Check 20A fuse. (No. 61 , located in fuse, fusible link and
operate, but LH high beam relay box.) Verify battery positive voltage is present at
3 of HID relay.
2. HID relay 2. Check HID relay.
3. Open in LH low beam circuit 3. Check harness between HID relay terminal q 5 and LH
headlamp and harness between LH headlamp and
ground for open or short circuit. (Before inspecting head-
lamp terminal, disconnect headlamp connector with igni-
tion switch “OFF” position.)
4. Xenon bulb 4. Replace the xenon bulb with the other side bulb or new
one. (If headlamps illuminate correctly, replace the bulb.)
5. HID control unit 5. Replace the HID control unit with the other side control
unit or new one. (If headlamps illuminate correctly,
replace the control unit.)
6. Booster 6. Replace booster as a headlamp assembly.
EL-60
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses/Headlamp (Xenon Type)
(Cont’d)

RH high beam does not 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse. (No. 53 , located in fuse, fusible link and
operate, but RH low beam relay box.) Verify battery positive voltage is present at
GI
5 of headlamp relay.
2. Bulb 2. Check bulb. MA

3. Headlamp relay 3. Check headlamp relay.
4. Open in RH high beam circuit 4-1. Check harness between headlamp relay terminal q 3 EM
and RH headlamp for open or short circuit.
4-2. Check harness between lighting switch terminal q
9 and
RH headlamp for open or short circuit. LC
RH low beam does not 1. 20A fuse 1. Check 20A fuse. (No. 59 , located in fuse, fusible link and
EC
operate, but RH high beam relay box.) Verify battery positive voltage is present at
6 of HID relay.
2. HID relay 2. Check HID relay. FE

3. Open in RH low beam circuit 3. Check harness between HID relay terminal q 7 and RH
headlamp and harness between RH headlamp and
ground for an open circuit. (Before inspecting headlamp
AT
terminal, disconnect headlamp connector with ignition
switch in “OFF” position.)
PD
4. Xenon bulb 4. Replace the xenon bulb with the other side bulb or new
one. (If headlamps illuminate correctly, replace the bulb.)
5. HID control unit 5. Replace the HID control unit with the other side control FA
unit or new one. (If headlamps illuminate correctly,
replace the control unit.)
RA
6. Booster 6. Replace booster as a headlamp assembly.
High beam indicator does not 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter.
work. 2. Open in high beam circuit 2-1. Check harness between lighting switch and combina-
BR
tion meter for an open circuit.
2-2. Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal q
22 ST
of combination meter, when high beam illuminates.
HID: High Intensity Discharge
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-61
EXIT
Bulb Replacement/Xenon Type
CAUTION:
I After replacing a new xenon bulb, be sure to make aiming
adjustments.
I Hold only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never
touch the glass envelope.
I Do not leave headlamp reflector without bulb for a long
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering head-
lamp body may affect the performance of the headlamp.
Remove headlamp bulb from the headlamp reflector just
before a replacement bulb is installed.
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Disconnect headlamp connector.
3. Remove headlamp assembly.
WARNING:
Never service a xenon headlamp with wet hands.
XENON BULB (LOW BEAM)

1. Remove tamper proof torx bolt (size: T20), then remove head-
lamp seal cover.
SEL803V
2. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise with keep pushing, then

remove it.
SEL804V
EL-62
EXIT
(Cont’d)
3. Release retaining pin.
4. Remove the xenon bulb.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: GI
I When disposing of the xenon bulb, do not break it; always
dispose of it as is.
I Make sure to install the bulb securely; if the xenon bulb is MA
improperly installed in its socket, high-tension current
leaks occur. This may lead to a melted bulb and/or bulb
SEL805V socket. EM
HIGH BEAM
1. Remove headlamp seal cover by turning it counterclockwise. LC
2. Disconnect bulb connector.
3. Release retaining pin.
4. Remove the bulb. EC
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
FE
SEL806V
AT
Aiming Adjustment/Xenon Type

PD
LOW BEAM
1. Turn headlamp low beam on.
2. Use adjusting screw to perform aiming adjustment. FA
I First tighten the adjusting screw all the way and then
make adjustment by loosening the screw. RA
BR
SEL829V
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-63
EXIT
Aiming Adjustment/Xenon Type (Cont’d)
SEL957V
CAUTION:
Be sure aiming switch is set to “0” when performing aiming
adjustment.
SEL466V
EL-64
EXIT
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — XENON TYPE —

Location
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL857W
PD
Daytime Light System/System Description
The headlamp system for Canada vehicles contains a daytime light control unit that activates the high beam
FA
headlamps at approximately half illumination whenever the engine is running. If the parking brake is applied
before the engine is started the daytime lights will not be illuminated. The daytime lights will illuminate once
the parking brake is released. Thereafter, the daytime lights will continue to operate when the parking brake RA
is applied.
I through 15A fuse (No. 54 , located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box) BR
I through 15A fuse (No. 53 , located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box) ST
I to headlamp relay terminal q 5 .
Power is also supplied at all times
I to HID relay terminal q 1 , and RS
I through 20A fuse (No. 59 , located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box) BT
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 20 , located in the fuse block (J/B)] HA
I to daytime light control unit terminal q
3 .
With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied
I to daytime light control unit terminal q
2 .
Ground is supplied to daytime light control unit terminal q
16 through body grounds E22 and E36 .
IDX
HEADLAMP SWITCH OPERATION
When the lighting switch is turned to 2ND or PASS (“C”) positions, ground is supplied
I to headlamp relay terminal q 2 and HID relay terminal q
2
Headlamp relay is then energized, and power is supplied
I from the headlamp relay terminal q 6
I to combination meter terminal q 22 for the HIGH BEAM indicator and
I through daytime light control unit terminals q5 and q
6
EL-65
EXIT
Daytime Light System/System Description
(Cont’d)
I to terminal q 1 of the LH headlamp.
I from the headlamp relay terminal q 3
I through daytime light control unit terminals q
4 and q
7
I to terminal q 1 of the RH headlamp.
HID relay is also energized, and power is supplied.
I to terminal q 2 LH headlamp
I to terminal q 2 RH headlamp
Ground is supplied at all times.
I to LH headlamp terminal q 4 and RH headlamp terminal q
4
I through body ground E22 and E36 .
Low beam operation
When the lighting switch is turned to 2ND (LOW or HI) or PASS (“C”) position, the low beam headlamps illu-
minate.
High beam operation/flash-to-pass operation
When the lighting switch is turned to 2ND and HIGH (“A”) or PASS (“C”) position, ground is supplied
I to terminal q 3 of LH headlamp and combination meter terminal q 23 for the HIGH BEAM indicator
10 and q
13
I through lighting switch terminals q 9 and q8
Ground is also supplied
I to terminal q 3 of RH headlamp
9 and q14
I through lighting switch terminals q 6 and q5
With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps illuminate.
XENON HEADLAMP
For description regarding xenon headlamp, refer to EL-48.

For auto light operation, refer to EL-47.
DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION

With the engine running, the lighting switch in the OFF or 1ST position and parking brake released, power is
supplied
I through daytime light control unit terminal q 7
I to terminal q1 of RH headlamp
I through terminal q 3 of RH headlamp
I to daytime light control unit terminal q9
I through daytime light control unit terminal q 6
I to terminal q1 of LH headlamp.
Ground is supplied to terminal q3 of LH headlamp.
I through daytime light control unit terminals q 10 and q
16
Because the high beam headlamps are now wired in series, they operate at half illumination.
EL-66
EXIT
Operation (Daytime light system with xenon

headlamp)
After starting the engine with the lighting switch in the “OFF” or
“1ST” position, the headlamp high beam automatically turns on.
Lighting switch operations other than the above are the same as GI
conventional light systems.
Engine With engine stopped With engine running
MA
OFF 1ST 2ND OFF 1ST 2ND
Lighting switch
A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C
EM
High beam X X q X X q q X q g* g* q g* g* q q X q
Headlamp
Low beam X X X X X X q q q X X X X X X q q q
LC
Parking and tail lamp X X X q q q q q q X X X q q q q q q
License and instrument illumination lamp X X X q q q q q q X X X q q q q q q
q : Lamp “ON”
EC
X : Lamp “OFF”
g : Lamp dims.
: Added functions FE
*: When starting the engine with the parking brake released, the daytime light will come ON.
When starting the engine with the parking brake pulled, the daytime light won’t come ON.
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-67
EXIT
Schematic
TEL972A
EL-68
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — DTRL —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL055M
EL-69
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — (Cont’d)
TEL056M
EL-70
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL057M
EL-71
EXIT
TEL058M
EL-72
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses
DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE
(Data are reference values.)
Terminal Judgement GI
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard
1 W/R Alternator
When turning ignition switch to “ON” Less than 1V MA
When engine is running Battery voltage EM
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”

Less than 1V LC
2 SB Start signal
When turning ignition switch to “ST” Battery voltage EC
When turning ignition switch to “ON” from

Less than 1V FE
“ST”

Less than 1V AT
3 R/G Power
source When turning ignition switch to “ON” Battery voltage PD
When turning ignition switch to “ST” Battery voltage FA

Less than 1V RA
4 G Power When lighting switch is turned to “2ND” or
Battery voltage
source PASS (“C”) position BR
Except the above 1V or less
5 L/W Power When lighting switch is turned to “2ND” or ST

Battery voltage
source PASS (“C”) position
Except the above Less than 1V RS

6 L/R LH head- When lighting switch is turned to “2ND” or
Battery voltage
lamp control PASS (“C”) position
BT
When releasing parking brake with engine
running and turning lighting switch to “OFF”
(daytime light operation) Approx. half battery voltage HA
CAUTION: Block wheels and ensure
selector lever is in N or P position.
Except the above Less than 1V
7 L/Y RH head- When lighting switch is turned to “2ND” or

Battery voltage IDX
lamp control PASS (“C”) position

(daytime light operation) Battery voltage
Except the above Less than 1V
EL-73
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard
9 L RH high When turning lighting switch to “2ND” and
Less than 1V
beam HIGH (“A”) or PASS (“C”) positions
(Ground)
(daytime light operation) Approx. half battery voltage
10 R LH high When turning lighting switch to “2ND” and

Less than 1V
beam HIGH (“A”) or PASS (“C”) positions
(Ground)
(daytime light operation) Less than 1V
13 W Lighting
switch When turning lighting switch HIGH (“A”) or
Less than 1V
(LH high PASS (“C”) position
beam)
14 B/W Lighting
switch When turning lighting switch HIGH (“A”) or
Less than 1V
(RH high PASS (“C”) position
beam)
16 B Ground — —
17 OR Parking When parking brake is released Battery voltage
brake switch
When parking brake is set Less than 1.5V

For bulb replacement, refer to EL-62.
Aiming Adjustment/Xenon Type

For aiming adjustment, refer to EL-63.
EL-74
EXIT
HEADLAMP — Headlamp Aiming Control —
Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL059M
EL-75
EXIT
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
System Description
I to tail lamp relay terminals q
1 and q 6
I through 15A fuse [No. 63 , located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box].
Ground is supplied
I to the lighting switch terminals q
5 and q 8
SWITCH OPERATION
When the lighting switch is turned to 1ST or 2ND position, ground is supplied
I to tail lamp relay terminal q2
Tail lamp relay is then energized, and power is supplied
I from tail lamp relay terminal q 7
I to power terminals of parking, license and tail lamps through stop and tail lamp sensor terminal q
8 .
With power supplied, parking, license and tail lamps illuminate.

BCM is connected to the optical sensor. The optical sensor sends a signal to BCM according to outside
brightness.
When the lighting switch is turned to AUTO position, ground is supplied
When ignition switch is set to ON or START and outside is darker than the prescribed level, ground is sup-
plied
I to tail lamp relay terminal q 2
I from the BCM terminal q 11 .
Tail lamp relay is then energized, and parking, license and tail lamps illuminate.
Auto light operation allows these lamps to turn off when outside is brighter than the prescribed level.
Or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
For detailed wiring diagram of auto light, refer to “HEADLAMP” (EL-50).
TAIL AND STOP WARNING LAMP

When one of the stop lamp bulbs is burned out with the stop lamp switch depressed, or one of the tail bulbs
is burned out with the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position, the tail and stop warning lamp illuminate. For
details, refer to “WARNING LAMPS” (EL-116).
EL-76
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL061M
EL-77
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — (Cont’d)
TEL062M
EL-78
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses
Parking, license and tail lamps do 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse (No. 63 , located in fuse, fusible link
not operate. and relay box).
2. Tail lamp relay 2. Check tail lamp relay.
GI
4. Open in tail lamp relay circuit 4-1. Check harness between tail lamp relay terminal q 2
and lighting switch terminal q
11 for an open circuit.
MA
5. Lighting switch ground circuit 4-2. Check harness between tail lamp relay terminal q 7
and joint connector-13 for open circuit.
5. Check lighting switch ground circuit.
EM
Individual parking or license lamps 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
do not operate. 2. Lamp ground 2. Check lamp ground circuit. LC
3. Open circuit 3. Check harness between power supply terminal of lamp
and tail lamp relay terminal q
7 for an open circuit.
Tail lamps do not operate. (See 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

EC
note.) 2. Lamp ground 2. Check lamp ground circuit.
3. Stop and tail lamp sensor - 3. Check stop and tail lamp sensor. (Refer to EL-126.)
related circuit
FE
Auto light malfunctioning. — Refer to trouble diagnoses in “HEADLAMP” (EL-54).
AT
Note: If one of the tail lamp bulbs is burned out or if one of the circuits between the tail lamps and stop and
tail lamp sensor is open, tail and stop warning lamp in the combination meter will illuminate with the
lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position. PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-79
EXIT
STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —

NOTE: For “System Description” and “Trouble Diagnoses”, refer to “PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL
LAMPS” (EL-76).
TEL063M
EL-80
EXIT
BACK-UP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL064M
EL-81
EXIT
FRONT FOG LAMP
System Description
I to fog lamp relay terminal q 3
I through 15A fuse [No. 40 , located in the fuse block (J/B)],
I to headlamp relay terminal q 5
I through 15A fuse (No. 53 , located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box) and
I to headlamp relay terminals q 1 and q
7
I through 15A fuse (No. 54 , located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box).
When the lighting switch in the 2ND position, ground is supplied
I to headlamp relay terminal q 2
I through lighting switch terminal q12
I to lighting switch terminal q8
The headlamp relay is energized and power is supplied
I from headlamp relay terminal q 3 .
FOG LAMP OPERATION

The fog lamp switch is built into the combination switch. The lighting switch must be in the 2ND position and
LOW (“B”) position for fog lamp operation. With the fog lamp switch in the ON position, ground is supplied
I through front fog lamp switch terminal q 31
I to front fog lamp switch terminal q 32
I through lighting switch terminal q 10
I to lighting switch terminal q 8
The fog lamp relay is energized and power is supplied
I from fog lamp relay terminal q 5
I to terminal q1 of each fog lamp.
Ground is supplied to terminal q 2 of each fog lamp through body grounds E22 and E36 . With power and
ground supplied, the fog lamps illuminate.
EL-82
EXIT
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL065M
EL-83
EXIT
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — (Cont’d)
TEL066M
EL-84
EXIT
FRONT FOG LAMP
Aiming Adjustment
Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following.
a. Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure.
b. Place vehicle on level ground.
c. Check that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant, GI
engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the
driver or equivalent weight placed in driver’s seat.
Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjusting MA
screw.
CEL409 EM
1. Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog
lamp lens as shown at left. LC
2. Turn front fog lamps ON.
EC
FE
MEL327G
AT
3. Adjust front fog lamps so that the top edge of the high inten-
sity zone is 100 mm (4 in) below the height of the fog lamp PD
centers as shown at left.
I When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the head-
lamps and opposite fog lamp. FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
MEL328G
Bulb Specifications
Item Wattage W
Front fog lamp 55
IDX
EL-85
EXIT
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
System Description
TURN SIGNAL OPERATION
With the hazard switch in the OFF position and the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is sup-
plied
I to hazard switch terminal q 2
I through terminal q 1 of the hazard switch
I to combination flasher unit terminal q1
I through terminal q 3 of the combination flasher unit
I to turn signal switch terminal q 1 .
Ground is supplied to combination flasher unit terminal q2 through body grounds M14 and M47 .
LH turn
When the turn signal switch is moved to the L position, power is supplied from turn signal switch terminal q 3
to
I front combination lamp LH terminal q 3
I rear combination lamp LH terminal q 2
I combination meter terminal q 21 .
Ground is supplied to the front combination lamp LH terminal q 2 through body grounds E22 and E36 .
Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp LH terminal q 4 through body grounds T12 , B22 and B35 .
Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal q 38 through body grounds M14 and M47 .
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the LH turn signal lamps.
RH turn
When the turn signal switch is moved to the R position, power is supplied from turn signal switch terminal q 2
to
I front combination lamp RH terminal q 3
I rear combination lamp RH terminal q 2
Ground is supplied to the front combination lamp RH terminal q 2 through body grounds E22 and E36 .
q
Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp RH terminal 4 through body grounds T12 , B22 and B35 .
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the RH turn signal lamps.
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION

Power is supplied at all times to hazard switch terminal q3 through:
I 10A fuse [No. 13 , located in the fuse block (J/B)].
With the hazard switch in the ON position, power is supplied
I through terminal q 1 of the hazard switch
I to combination flasher unit terminal q 1
I through terminal q 3 of the combination flasher unit
I to hazard switch terminal q 4 .
Ground is supplied to combination flasher unit terminal q 2 through body grounds M14 and M47 .
Power is supplied through terminal q 5 of the hazard switch to
I front combination lamp LH terminal q 3
I rear combination lamp LH terminal q 2
Power is supplied through terminal q 6 of the hazard switch to
I front combination lamp RH terminal q 3
I rear combination lamp RH terminal q 2
Ground is supplied to terminal q 2 of each front combination lamp through body grounds E22 and E36 .
Ground is supplied to terminal q 4 of each rear combination lamp through body grounds T12 , B22 and B35 .
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning
lamps.
WITH MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM

I through 10A fuse [No. 13 , located in the fuse block (J/B)]
EL-86
EXIT
I to multi-remote control relay terminals q 1 ,q3 and q 6 .
Ground is supplied to multi-remote control relay terminal q
2 , when the multi-remote control system is triggered
through the BCM (Body Control Module).
Refer to “MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM” (EL-310).
The multi-remote control relay is energized.
Power is supplied through terminal q 5 of the multi-remote control relay GI
I to front combination lamp LH terminal q 3 ,
I to rear combination lamp LH terminal q 2 and
I to combination meter terminal q 21 . MA
Power is supplied through terminal q 7 of the multi-remote control relay
I to front combination lamp RH terminal q 3 ,
I to rear combination lamp RH terminal q 2 and EM
I to combination meter terminal q 30 .
Ground is supplied to terminal q2 of each front combination lamp through body grounds E22 and E36 .
Ground is supplied to terminal q4 of each rear combination lamp through body grounds T12 , B22 and B35 . LC
With power and ground supplied, the BCM controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps.
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-87
EXIT
Schematic
TEL451B
EL-88
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — TURN —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL067M
EL-89
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — TURN — (Cont’d)
TEL068M
EL-90
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — TURN — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL069M
EL-91
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses
Turn signal and hazard warning 1. Hazard switch 1. Check hazard switch.
lamps do not operate. 2. Combination flasher unit 2. Refer to combination flasher unit check. (EL-92)
3. Open in combination flasher unit 3. Check wiring to combination flasher unit for open cir-
circuit cuit.
Turn signal lamps do not operate 1. 7.5A fuse 1. Check 7.5A fuse [No. 19 , located in the fuse block
but hazard warning lamps operate. (J/B)]. Turn ignition switch ON and verify battery
positive voltage is present at terminal q
2 of hazard
switch.
2. Hazard switch 2. Check hazard switch.
3. Turn signal switch 3. Check turn signal switch.
4. Open in turn signal switch circuit 4. Check L/B wire between combination flasher unit and
turn signal switch for open circuit.
Hazard warning lamps do not oper- 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 13 , located in the fuse block
ate but turn signal lamps operate. (J/B)]. Verify battery positive voltage is present at
terminal q3 of hazard switch.
2. Hazard switch 2. Check hazard switch.
3. Open in hazard switch circuit 3. Check L/B wire between combination flasher unit and
hazard switch for open circuit.
Front turn signal lamp LH or RH 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
does not operate. 2. Grounds E22 and E36 2. Check grounds E22 and E36 .
3. Open in front turn signal lamp 3. Check wire between fuse block and front turn signal
LH or RH circuit lamp LH or RH for open circuit.
Rear turn signal lamp LH or RH 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
does not operate. 2. Grounds T12 , B22 and B35 2. Check grounds T12 , B22 and B35 .
3. Open in rear turn signal lamp 3. Check wire between fuse block and rear turn signal
LH or RH circuit lamp LH or RH for open circuit.
LH and RH turn indicators do not 1. Grounds M14 and M47 1. Check grounds M14 and M47 .
operate.
LH or RH turn indicator does not 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter.
operate. 2. Open in turn indicator circuit 2. Check wire between hazard switch and combination
meter (turn indicator) for open circuit.
Electrical Components Inspection

COMBINATION FLASHER UNIT CHECK
I Before checking, ensure that bulbs meet specifications.
I Connect a battery and test lamp to the combination flasher
unit, as shown. Combination flasher unit is properly function-
ing if it blinks when power is supplied to the circuit.
SEL122E
EL-92
EXIT
ILLUMINATION
System Description

I to tail lamp relay terminals q 1 and q 6 . GI
Ground is supplied to tail lamp relay terminal q2 , when the lighting switch is moved to the 1ST or 2ND posi-
tion. The tail lamp relay is energized.
The lighting switch must be in the 1ST or 2ND position for illumination. MA
The illumination control switch that controls the amount of current to the illumination system. As the amount
of current increases, the illumination becomes brighter.
The following chart shows the power and ground connector terminals for the components included in the illu- EM
mination system.
Component Connector No. Power terminal Ground terminal
LC
Combination meter N12 , N14 q
16 , q
41 q
17 , q
38
Rear cigarette lighter D45 , D65 q

3 — (Unit ground)
EC
Rear ashtray D44 , D64 q
1 q
2
Glove box lamp M26 q

1 q
2
q q
FE
TCS switch N7 5 6
Active damper suspension select switch N5 q

7 q
8
Audio unit N20 q

8 q
7
AT
Illumination time control switch N8 q
2 q
4
Front cigarette lighter N6 q

2 — (Unit ground) PD
Headlamp aiming switch N4 q
3 q
4
A/T device M36 q

3 q
4 FA
Front power window main switch D12 q
2 q
1
Auto anti-dazzling inside mirror R4 q

3 q
4 RA
IVCS switch R10 q
2 q
12
Driver’s door control unit D13 q

9 q
2
BR
Passenger door control unit D29 q
9 q
2
Clock N28 q
3 q
2
ST
A/C control unit N17 q
1 q
4
Hazard switch N22 q

7 q
8
Telephone switch N25 q

24 q
23
RS
Rear sunshade switch N30 q
4 q
5
Illumination control switch N23 q

1 q
5
BT
The ground for all of the components except for rear ashtray, and rear cigarette lighter, glove box lamp and
front cigarette lighter are controlled through terminals q
4 and q
5 of the illumination control switch and body HA
grounds M14 and M47 .
IDX
EL-93
EXIT
ILLUMINATION
Schematic
TEL070M
EL-94
EXIT
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL071M
EL-95
EXIT
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)
TEL072M
EL-96
EXIT
ILLUMINATION
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL073M
EL-97
EXIT
ILLUMINATION
TEL074M
EL-98
EXIT
ILLUMINATION
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL075M
EL-99
EXIT
TRUNK ROOM AND VANITY MIRROR LAMP
Wiring Diagram — INT/L —
TEL082M
EL-100
EXIT
METER AND GAUGES

Location
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL858W
PD
System Description
UNIFIED CONTROL METER
I Speedometer, odo/trip meter, tachometer, fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are controlled totally FA
by control unit combined with speedometer.
I Digital meter is adopted for odo/trip meter.*
*The record of the odo meter is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected. The record of the trip meter RA
is erased when the battery cable is disconnected.
I Odo/trip meter segment can be checked in diagnosis mode.
I Meter/gauge can be checked in diagnosis mode. BR
HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
SEL253V
Note: Turn ignition switch to the “ON” position to operate odo/trip meter.
EL-101
EXIT
METER AND GAUGES
Ground is supplied
I through body grounds M14 and M47 .
FUEL GAUGE
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.
The fuel gauge is regulated by a variable ground signal supplied
I to combination meter terminal q 8 for the fuel gauge
I from terminal q 5 of the fuel level sensor unit
I through terminal q 4 of the fuel level sensor unit and
I through ECM terminal 129 .
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The reading on the gauge is based
on the resistance of the thermal transmitter.
As the temperature of the coolant increases, the resistance of the thermal transmitter decreases. A variable
ground is supplied to terminal q
7 of the combination meter for the water temperature gauge. The needle on
the gauge moves from “C” to “H”.
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
The tachometer is regulated by a signal
I from terminal q52 of the ECM
I to combination meter terminal q 13 for the tachometer.
SPEEDOMETER
The vehicle speed sensor sends a voltage signal to the combination meter for the speedometer.
The voltage signal is sent
I to combination meter terminals q 12 and q14 for the speedometer
I from terminals q 1 and q2 of the vehicle speed sensor.
The speedometer converts the voltage into the vehicle speed displayed.
EL-102
EXIT
METER AND GAUGES
Combination Meter
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL996
EL-103
EXIT
METER AND GAUGES
Wiring Diagram — METER —
TEL083M
EL-104
EXIT
METER AND GAUGES
Wiring Diagram — METER — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL084M
EL-105
EXIT
METER AND GAUGES
Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter

Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
I Odo/trip meter segment can be checked in diagnosis mode.
I Meters/gauges can be checked in diagnosis mode.
HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE

1. Turn ignition switch to ON and change odo/trip meter to “TRIP
A” or “TRIP B”.
2. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch to ON when pushing odo/trip meter switch.
4. Confirm that trip meter indicates “000.0”.
5. Push odo/trip meter switch more than three times within 5
seconds.
6. All odo/trip meter segments should be turned on.

NOTE: If some segments are not turned on, speedometer (uni-
fied meter control unit) with odo/trip meter should be
replaced.
At this point, the unified control meter is turned to diagnosis
mode.
SEL110V
7. Push odo/trip meter switch. Indication of each meter/gauge

should be as shown left during pushing odo/trip meter switch
if it is no malfunctioning.
NOTE: It takes about 1 minute for indication of fuel gauge to
become stable.
SEL111V
EL-106
EXIT
METER AND GAUGES
Flexible Print Circuit (FPC)

Tachometer, fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are con-
nected with unified meter control unit (speedometer) by Flexible
Print Circuit (FPC) connector. When replace or remove and install
unified control unit (speedometer), disconnect and connect FPC GI
connector according to the following steps.
MA
EM
DISCONNECT
1. Open connector cover. LC
2. Release connector lock by holding both ends of it and pulling
it up.
3. Disconnect FPC by pulling it up. EC
FE
SEL109V
AT
CONNECT
1. Insert FPC into connector and lock connector pushing FPC
PD
downward.
2. Check secure connection of FPC. FA
3. Check continuity of check land terminal for secure connection
of FPC.
Resistance: 0Ω RA
4. Close connector cover.
BR
SEL114V
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-107
EXIT
METER AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses
PRELIMINARY CHECK
CHECK-IN
H
No Yes
Can Diagnosis mode E
Do meter warning E
Check the screws E
Can Diagnosis mode
be activated? Refer to lamps operate? securing speedometer. be activated?
“Meter/Gauge Opera- (The screws are G
tion and Odo/Trip Meter No located behind the Yes No
Segment Check in combination meter. For
Diagnosis Mode”, details refer to EL-112.)
EL-106.
Yes
H
Check power supply
and ground circuit.
Refer to “POWER SUP-
PLY AND GROUND
CIRCUIT CHECK”,
EL-109.
H
Check meter/gauge
F
operation in Diagnosis
mode.
H H H
Malfunction is indicated No malfunction is indi- Replace speedometer
in Diagnosis mode. cated in Diagnosis (unified meter control
mode. unit).
H H
Check the following: SYMPTOM CHART 2
I FPC connector con- Refer to EL-109.
nection
Refer to “Flexible
Print Circuit (FPC)”, NG
EL-107.
I Screws securing the
malfunctioning meter/
gauge
(The screws are
located behind the
combination meter.
For details refer to
EL-112.)
OK
H H
SYMPTOM CHART 1 Reconnect FPC connector and check continuity between
Refer to EL-109. check land terminals and/or repair malfunctioning part.
Refer to “Flexible Print Circuit (FPC)”, EL-107.
EL-108
EXIT
METER AND GAUGES
SYMPTOM CHART
Symptom chart 1 (Malfunction is indicated in Diagnosis mode)
Symptom Possible causes Repair order
Speedometer and/or odo/trip I Speedometer (Unified meter control unit) I Replace speedometer (unified meter control unit). GI
meter indicate(s) malfunction
in Diagnosis mode.
Multiple meter/gauge indicate MA

malfunction in Diagnosis
mode.
One of tachometer/fuel gauge/ I Meter/Gauge 1. Check resistance of meter/gauge indicating malfunction. If EM
water temp. gauge indicates I Speedometer (Unified meter control unit) the resistance is NG, replace the meter/gauge. Refer to
malfunction in Diagnosis “METER/GAUGE RESISTANCE CHECK”, EL-112.
mode. 2. If the resistance is OK, replace speedometer (unified meter
control unit). LC
Symptom chart 2 (No malfunction is indicated in Diagnosis mode)

EC
Speedometer and odo/trip 1. Sensor 1. Check vehicle speed sensor.

meter are malfunctioning. - Speedometer, Odo/Trip meter INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (Refer to EL-110.) FE
2. FPC connector 2. Check FPC connector. Refer to “Flexible Print Circuit (FPC)”,
EL-107.
3. Speedometer (Unified meter control unit) 3. Replace speedometer (unified meter control unit).
AT
Multiple meter/gauge are mal- 1. FPC connector 1. Check FPC connector. Refer to “Flexible Print Circuit (FPC)”,
functioning. (except EL-107.
speedometer, odo/trip meter) 2. Speedometer (Unified meter control unit) 2. Replace speedometer (unified meter control unit).
PD
One of tachometer/fuel gauge/ 1. Sensor/Engine revolution signal 1. Check the sensor for malfunctioning meter/gauge.
water temp. gauge is malfunc- - Tachometer INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL (Refer to
tioning.
- Fuel gauge
EL-111.)
INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT (Refer to
FA
- Water temp. gauge EL-111.)
2. FPC connector INSPECTION/THERMAL TRANSMITTER (Refer to EL-112.)
2. Check FPC connector. Refer to “Flexible Print Circuit (FPC)”, RA
3. Speedometer (Unified meter control unit) EL-107.
3. Replace speedometer (unified meter control unit).
Before starting trouble diagnoses above, perform PRELIMINARY CHECK, EL-108. BR
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK ST

Power supply circuit check
Terminals Ignition switch position
RS
! @ OFF ACC ON
Battery Battery Battery BT
q
20 Ground
voltage voltage voltage
q
41 Ground 0V 0V
Battery HA
voltage
If NG, check the following.

I 7.5A fuse [No. 4 , located in fuse block (J/B)]
I 10A fuse [No. 28 , located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between fuse and combination IDX
meter
SEL367VA
EL-109
EXIT
METER AND GAUGES
Ground circuit check
q
39 - Ground Yes
SEL368VA
INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OK Vehicle speed sensor is

E
OUTPUT. OK.
1. Remove vehicle speed sensor from
transmission.
2. Check voltage between combination
meter terminals q
12 and q14 while quickly
turning speed sensor pinion.
Voltage: Approx. 0.5V
SEL369VA
NG
H
CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR. NG Replace vehicle speed
E
Check resistance between vehicle speed sensor.
sensor terminals q
1 and q2 .
Resistance: Approx. 250Ω
OK
H
Check harness for open or short between
CEL914 speedometer and vehicle speed sensor.
EL-110
EXIT
METER AND GAUGES
INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL
CHECK ECM OUTPUT. OK Engine revolution signal is

E
1. Start engine. OK.
2. Check voltage between combination GI
meter terminal q
13 and ground at idle
and 2,000 rpm.
Higher rpm = Higher voltage MA
Lower rpm = Lower voltage
Voltage should change with rpm.
SEL370VA EM
NG
H
Check the following. LC
I Harness for open or short between ECM
and combination meter
EC
FE
AT
INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
PD
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FUEL E Check harness for open or
LEVEL SENSOR UNIT. short between ECM and FA
Check harness continuity between fuel fuel level sensor unit.
level sensor unit terminal q
4 and ground.
Continuity should exist. RA
OK
H
NG BR
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT. E Repair or replace.
SEL632VB
Refer to “FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT Refer to FE section.
CHECK” (EL-113). (“FUEL SYSTEM”)
ST
OK
RS
H
NG
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN OR Repair harness or connec-
SHORT.
E
tor.
BT
1. Disconnect combination meter connec-
tor and fuel level sensor unit connector.
2. Check continuity between combination HA
meter terminal q 8 and fuel level sensor
SEL372VD unit terminal q5 .
Continuity should exist.
3. Check continuity between combination
meter terminal q 8 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
IDX
OK
H
Fuel level sensor unit is OK.
EL-111
EXIT
METER AND GAUGES
INSPECTION/THERMAL TRANSMITTER
NG
CHECK THERMAL TRANSMITTER. E Repair or replace.
Refer to “THERMAL TRANSMITTER
CHECK” (EL-113).
OK
H
NG
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN OR E Repair harness or connec-
SHORT. tor.
1. Disconnect combination meter connec-
SEL373VA tor and thermal transmitter connector.
meter terminal q 7 and thermal transmit-
ter terminal q
1 .
meter terminal q 7 and ground.
OK
H
Thermal transmitter is OK.

METER/GAUGE RESISTANCE CHECK
1. Disconnect FPC connector. Refer to “Flexible Print Circuit
(FPC)” (EL-107).
2. Check resistance between installation screws of meter/gauge
after removing meter/gauge.
Screws Resistance
Tachometer Fuel/Temp. gauge Ω
A-C A-C Approx. 70 - Approx. 140
B-D B-C Approx. 90 - Approx. 170
CEL915
EL-112
EXIT
METER AND GAUGES
Electrical Components Inspection (Cont’d)
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK
I For removal, refer to FE section “FUEL SYSTEM”.
5 and q
Check the resistance between terminals q 4 .
Ohmmeter Float position Resistance value
(+) (−) mm (in) Ω GI
*3 Full 70 (2.76) Approx. 4 - 6
q
5 q
4 *2 1/2 189 (7.44) 31 - 34 MA
*1 Empty 308 (12.13) 80 - 83
SEL064X *1 and *3: When float rod is in contact with stopper. EM
THERMAL TRANSMITTER CHECK
Check the resistance between the terminals of thermal transmitter LC
and body ground.
Water temperature Resistance EC
60°C (140°F) Approx. 170 - 210Ω
100°C (212°F) Approx. 47 - 53Ω
FE
MEL424F
AT
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK
PD
Oil pressure
Continuity
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
More than 20 - 29 FA
Engine start NO
(0.2 - 0.3, 3 - 4)
Less than 20 - 29 RA
Engine stop YES
(0.2 - 0.3, 3 - 4)
Check the continuity between the terminals of oil pressure switch

and body ground. BR
MEL425F
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK ST

1. Remove vehicle speed sensor from transmission.
2. Turn vehicle speed sensor pinion quickly with fingers and mea-
sure voltage across q
2 and q 1 . RS
BT
HA
CEL219
DIODE CHECK
I Check continuity using an ohmmeter.
I Diode is functioning properly if test results are as shown in the IDX
figure at left.
NOTE: Specification may vary depending on the type of tester.
Before performing this inspection, be sure to refer to
the instruction manual for the tester to be used.
CEL520
EL-113
EXIT
METER AND GAUGES
Electrical Components Inspection (Cont’d)
I Diodes for warning lamps are built into the combination meter
printed circuit.
CEL916
EL-114
EXIT
WARNING LAMPS
System Description
Ground is supplied GI
I to combination meter terminal q
39 and
I A/T device (OD control switch) terminal q
2
I through body grounds M14 and M47 . MA
Ground is supplied
I to fuel level sensor unit terminal q
4 EM
I through ECM terminal 129 .
Ground is supplied
I seat belt buckle switch terminal q
14
LC
I through body grounds B22 and B35 .
Ground is supplied EC
I to brake fluid level switch terminal q
2 and
I washer level switch terminal q 2
I through body grounds E22 and E36 . FE
AIR BAG WARNING LAMP
During prove out or when an air bag malfunction occurs, the ground path is interrupted AT
I from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit terminal q
15
PD
Ground is supplied
I through combination meter terminal q 39 .
With power and ground supplied, the air bag warning lamp (LEDs) illuminate. FA
For further information, refer to RS section (“TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”).
DOOR WARNING LAMP
RA
Door warning lamp is controlled by BCM.
28 , q
When one of the passenger door is opened, ground is supplied to the BCM terminals q 32 , q
33 or q
37 .
And then ground is supplied BR
I from BCM terminal 111 .
With power and ground supplied, the door warning lamp illuminates. ST
ACTIVE DAMPER INDICATOR LAMP (SPORT)
When an active damper suspension system malfunction occurs, or “SPORT” mode is selected by active RS
damper suspension select switch, ground is supplied
I from active damper suspension control unit terminal q 16 . BT
With power and ground supplied, the active damper indicator lamp (SPORT) blinks or illuminates.
For further information, refer to FA section (“TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR ACTIVE DAMPER SUSPENSION”).
LOW OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP HA
Low oil pressure causes oil pressure switch terminal q
1 to provide ground to combination meter terminal q
33 .
With power and ground supplied, the low oil pressure warning lamp illuminates.
CHARGE WARNING LAMP
During prove out or when a alternator malfunction occurs, ground is supplied IDX
I to combination meter terminals q 31 and q40
I from alternator terminal q
3 .
With power and ground supplied, the charge warning lamp and brake lamp illuminate.
EL-115
EXIT
WARNING LAMPS
LOW WASHER LEVEL WARNING LAMP
When the washer fluid level is low, ground is supplied
I from washer fluid level switch terminal q1 .
With power and ground supplied, the low washer level warning lamp illuminates.
OD OFF WARNING LAMP
When an A/T system malfunction occurs, or OD control switch is in OFF position, ground is supplied
I from TCM (transmission control module) terminal q 3 .
With power and ground supplied, the OD warning lamp blinks or illuminates.
For further information, refer to AT section (“TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”).
LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING LAMP
The amount of fuel in the fuel tank is determined by the fuel level sensor in the fuel tank. A signal is sent from
fuel level sensor unit terminal q6 to combination meter terminal q 3 . The fuel level sensor will illuminate the
low fuel level warning lamp when the fuel level is low.
With power and ground supplied, the low fuel level warning lamp illuminates.
ABS WARNING LAMP
When an ABS malfunction occurs, ground is supplied
I from ABS/TCS control unit terminal q 22 .
With power and ground supplied, the ABS warning lamp illuminates.
For further information, refer to BR section (“TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”).
TCS OFF WARNING LAMP
When TCS off switch is in OFF position, or an ABS/TCS malfunction occurs, ground is supplied
With power and ground supplied, the TCS off warning lamp illuminates.
SLIP WARNING LAMP
When TCS is in operation, or a TCS malfunction occurs, ground is supplied
With power and ground supplied, the slip warning lamp illuminates.
SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP
When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened, ground is supplied
I to air bag diagnoses sensor unit terminal q 22
I from seat belt buckle switch terminal q 41 .
And then ground is supplied
I from air bag diagnoses sensor unit terminal q 16 .
With power and ground supplied, the seat belt warning lamp illuminates.
BRAKE WARNING LAMP
When the parking brake is applied, or the brake fluid level is low, ground is supplied
I from parking brake switch terminal q 1 , or
I brake fluid level switch terminal q1 .
With power and ground supplied, the brake warning lamp illuminates.
TAIL AND STOP WARNING LAMP
When one of the stop lamp bulbs is burned out with the stop lamp switch depressed, or one of the tail lamp
bulbs is burned out with the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position, ground is supplied.
I from stop and tail lamp sensor terminal q 3 .
With power and ground is supplied, the tail and stop lamp warning lamp illuminates.
EL-116
EXIT
WARNING LAMPS
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
During prove out or when an engine control malfunction occurs, ground is supplied
I from ECM terminal q 48 .
With power and ground supplied, the malfunction indicator lamp illuminates. GI
For further information, refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-117
EXIT
WARNING LAMPS
Schematic
TEL085M
EL-118
EXIT
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL086M
EL-119
EXIT
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)
TEL087M
EL-120
EXIT
WARNING LAMPS
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL088M
EL-121
EXIT
WARNING LAMPS
TEL089M
EL-122
EXIT
WARNING LAMPS
CONSULT-II (For door warning lamp)

GI
MA
SEF046TA EM
EC
FE
PBR455D
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL471W
6. Touch “DOOR OPEN WARNING”. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL485W
I DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are available for door

open warning lamp.
IDX
SEL480W
EL-123
EXIT
WARNING LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses/Door Warning Lamp

WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
H
LISTEN TO CUSTOMER COMPLAINT
H
Do self-diagnostic results exist?
Yes No
SYMPTOM
BASIS
H H
E Repair/Replace according to Perform diagnostic procedure on F

the self-diagnostic results. the next page.
(EL-249)
H H
NG
IVMS COMMUNICATION REPAIR/REPLACE
DIAGNOSIS (EL-247 or
EL-253)
OK
H H
FINAL CHECK NG
Confirm that the malfunction is completely fixed by operating the
system.
OK
H
CHECK OUT
NOTICE:
EL-124
EXIT
WARNING LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses/Door Warning Lamp
(Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Door warning lamp is not operating correctly.
NG GI
CHECK WARNING LAMP OPERATION. Check the following.
E
CONSULT-II I Bulb
I Power supply circuit for
Perform “DR OPN WARN LAMP” in warning lamp MA
ACTIVE TEST mode. I Harness for open or
Check warning lamp operation. short between BCM and
SEL497W
Warning lamp should illuminate. warning lamp EM
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Disconnect BCM connector.

LC
2. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
3. Apply ground to BCM terminal 111 .
Warning lamp should illuminate. EC
OK
H FE
NG
CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. E
Check the following.
CONSULT-II I Door switch
I Door switch ground con- AT
SEL677UA
See “DOOR SW” in DATA MONITOR dition (Front door) or
mode. door switch ground cir-
When door is open: cuit (Rear door) PD
DOOR SW ON I Harness for open or
When door is closed: short between door
DOOR SW OFF switch and BCM
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
FA
ON BOARD
Check all doors switches in Switch moni- RA

tor (Mode II) mode.
(Refer to On board Diagnosis, EL-255.)
BR
SEL498W
OK
H
NG
CHECK IGNITION SWITCH ON SIGNAL.
E
Check the following. ST
See “IGN ON SW” in DATA MONITOR (J/B)] RS
When ignition switch is ON: short between fuse and
IGN ON SW ON BCM
When ignition switch is ACC or OFF:
BT
IGN ON SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD HA
SEL499W
68
and ground.
Condition of ignition switch Voltage V
ON Approx. 12 IDX
ACC or OFF 0
OK
H
Replace BCM.
SEL556UB
EL-125
EXIT
WARNING LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses/Stop and Tail Lamp Sensor
SEL810V
STOP AND TAIL LAMP SENSOR INSPECTION TABLE

Voltage
Terminal
Wire color Connections Operated condition (Approximate
No.
values)
When sensing one of the bulbs
Less than 1.5V
3 L Stop and tail warning lamp burned out (See note.)
Other than above condition 12V
Depressed 12V
4 R Stop lamp switch
Released 0V
Depressed 11V
5 R/W High-mounted stop lamp Stop lamp switch
Released 0V
6 L Tail lamp RH (Fender side) Turned ON 11V
Lighting switch or auto lamp
7 G/R Tail lamp LH (Fender side) Turned OFF 0V
Turned ON 11V
8 R/G Tail lamp relay Lighting switch or auto lamp
Turned OFF 0V
9 B Ground — —
Depressed 11V
10 R/L Stop lamp LH and RH (Fender side) Stop lamp switch
Released 0V
Depressed 12V
12 R Stop lamp switch
Released 0V
Note: The system senses bulb burnout only when the stop lamp switch is depressed for stop lamps or tail
lamp relay is energized for tail lamps.
EL-126
EXIT
WARNING LAMPS

FUEL WARNING LAMP SENSOR CHECK
I It will take a short time for the bulb to light.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
CEL218-A
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK

PD
Oil pressure
Continuity
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
More than 20 - 29 FA
Engine start NO
(0.2 - 0.3, 3 - 4)
Less than 20 - 29 RA
Engine stop YES
(0.2 - 0.3, 3 - 4)
Check the continuity between the terminals of oil pressure switch

and body ground. BR
MEL425F
DIODE CHECK ST
I Diode is functioning properly if test results are as shown in the
figure at left. RS
NOTE: Specification may vary depending on the type of tester.
Before performing this inspection, be sure to refer to
the instruction manual for the tester to be used. BT
HA
SEL901F
I Diodes for warning lamps are built into the combination meter
printed circuit.
IDX
CEL916
EL-127
EXIT
A/T INDICATOR
Schematic
TEL382B
EL-128
EXIT
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram — AT/IND —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL090M
EL-129
EXIT
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram — AT/IND — (Cont’d)
TEL091M
EL-130
EXIT
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram — AT/IND — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL092M
EL-131
EXIT
WARNING CHIME

Location
SEL859W
System Description
FUNCTION
I The following warning chime functions are controlled by BCM.
Item Details of control
Ignition key warning chime Sounds warning chime when driver’s door is opened with key in ignition key cylinder and
ignition switch “OFF” or “ACC” position.
Light warning chime Sounds warning chime when driver’s door is opened with light switch in the 1st or 2nd posi-
tion and ignition switch “OFF” or “ACC” position.
Seat belt warning chime Sounds warning chime for about 6 seconds if ignition switch is turned “ON” when driver’s
seat belt is unfastened
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME

I to key switch terminal q 3 .
I to warning chime terminal q 1 .
Ground is supplied to BCM terminal q 32 through driver side door switch terminal q 1 when driver side switch is
in OPEN position.
With the key in the ignition key cylinder, the ignition switch in the ACC or OFF position, and the driver’s door
open, ground is supplied to warning chime terminal q 3 from BCM terminal q 12 . The warning chime will then
sound.
LIGHT WARNING CHIME

I Through 15A fuse [No. 63 , located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box]
I to tail lamp relay terminals q1 and q6 .
EL-132
EXIT
WARNING CHIME
When the lighting switch is in the 1ST or 2ND position, ground is supplied
I from body grounds E22 and E36 GI
I through lighting switch terminals q 11 and q5 .
I to BCM terminal q 3 MA
With the lighting switch in the 1ST, 2ND position, the ignition switch in ACC or OFF position, and the driver’s EM
door OPEN, the warning chime will sound in the same manner as ignition key warning chime.
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME LC

I through 10A fuse [No. 12 , located in the fuse block (J/B)] EC
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 32 , located in the fuse block (J/B)] FE
Ground is supplied to BCM terminal q 34 through seat belt buckle switch terminals q
41 and q
14 , when seat belt
buckle switch is in UNFASTENED position, and body grounds B22 and B35 . AT
The warning chime sounds for about 6 seconds, when ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON and seat belt
is unfastened.
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-133
EXIT
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —
TEL093M
EL-134
EXIT
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL094M
EL-135
EXIT
WARNING CHIME
CONSULT-II
SEF046TA

4. Touch “START”.
PBR455D
SEL471W
6. Touch “IGN KEY WARN ALM”, “LIGHT WARN ALM” or “SEAT

BELT TIMER”.
SEL487W
I DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are available for the warn-
ing chime.
SEL480W
EL-136
EXIT
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
GI
H
LISTEN TO CUSTOMER COMPLAINT MA
H
EM
LC
Yes No
SYMPTOM
BASIS EC
H H
E Repair/Replace according to Select diagnostic procedure on F

the self-diagnostic results. the basis of symptom. FE
(EL-249)
AT
H H
NG
DIAGNOSIS (EL-247 or PD
EL-253)
OK FA
H H
FINAL CHECK NG
RA
system.
OK BR
H
CHECK OUT ST
NOTICE:
RS
the “disconnected” data will be memorized by the BCM. (While BCM memorizes the “disconnected” BT
I To erase the memory, perform the procedure below. HA
IDX
EL-137
EXIT
WARNING CHIME
SYMPTOM CHART
REFERENCE PAGE EL-138 EL-139 EL-139 EL-140
(Seat belt buckle switch input signal check)

(Lighting switch input signal check)
(Key switch input signal check)

SYMPTOM
Light warning chime does not activate. X X
Ignition key warning chime does not activate. X X
Seat belt warning chime does not activate. X X
All warning chimes do not activate. X
(Lighting switch input signal check)
CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIG- NG Check the following.

E
NAL. I 7.5A fuse [No. 22 ,
CONSULT-II located in the fuse block
(J/B)]
See “HD/LMP 1ST SW” in DATA MONI- I Harness for open or
TOR mode. short between fuse and
When lighting switch is in 1ST or 2ND: BCM
HD/LMP 1ST SW ON
SEL500W
When lighting switch is OFF:
HD/LMP 1ST SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
Check lighting switch in Switch monitor

(Mode II) mode. (Refer to On board
Diagnosis, EL-255.)
OK
H
Go to Procedure 4.
EL-138
EXIT
WARNING CHIME
(Key switch input signal check)
CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. NG Check the following.
E
CONSULT-II I Key switch GI
Refer to “Electrical Com-
See “IGN KEY SW” in DATA MONITOR ponents Inspection” (EL-
mode. 141). MA
When key is inserted in ignition key cylin- I 10A fuse [No. 28 ,
der: located in the fuse block
SEL532W IGN KEY SW ON (J/B)] EM
When key is removed from ignition key I Harness for open or
cylinder: short between key switch
IGN KEY SW OFF and fuse LC
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- I Harness for open or
TESTER short between BCM and
key switch EC
69
and ground.
FE
Condition of key switch Voltage V
Key is inserted Approx. 12
SEL916V Key is removed 0

AT
OK
PD
H
Go to Procedure 4.
FA
RA
BR
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 ST
(Seat belt buckle switch input signal check)
CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH NG

RS
E
INPUT SIGNAL. I Seat belt buckle switch
CONSULT-II Refer to “Electrical Com-
ponents Inspection” (EL- BT
See “SEAT BELT SW” in DATA MONITOR 141).
mode. I Seat belt buckle switch
When driver’s seat belt is not fastened: ground circuit HA
SEAT BELT SW ON I Harness for open or
SEL501W
When driver’s seat belt is fastened: short between BCM and
SEAT BELT SW OFF seat belt buckle switch
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
IDX
Check seat belt buckle switch in Switch
monitor (Mode II) mode. (Refer to On
board Diagnosis, EL-255.)
OK
H
Go to procedure 4.
EL-139
EXIT
WARNING CHIME
NG
CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. E Check the following.
CONSULT-II I Driver door switch
See “DOOR SW-DR” in DATA MONITOR ponents Inspection” (EL-
mode. 141).
When driver’s door is open: I Driver door switch
DOOR SW-DR ON ground condition
When driver’s door is closed: I Harness for open or
DOOR SW-DR OFF short between driver
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- door switch and BCM
SEL502W ON BOARD
Check driver side door switch in Switch

OK
H
NG
CHECK IGNITION SWITCH ON SIGNAL. E Check the following.
IGN ON SW ON BCM
SEL499W When ignition switch is ACC or OFF:
IGN ON SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER

68
and ground.
ON Approx. 12
ACC or OFF 0
OK
SEL556UB
H
OK
Perform “WARN ALM” in ACTIVE E System is OK.
TEST mode.
Check chime operation.
If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this
procedure and go to the next proce-
dure below.
NG
H
NG
CHECK WARNING CHIME. E Replace chime.
1. Disconnect warning chime connector.
SEL495W 2. Apply 12V direct current to warning
chime and check operation.
OK
H
I 10A fuse [No. 12 located in the fuse
block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between fuse
and chime
I Harness for open or short between
chime and BCM
SEL564UB
EL-140
EXIT
WARNING CHIME

KEY SWITCH (Insert)
Check continuity between terminals when key is inserted in ignition
key cylinder and key is removed from ignition key cylinder.
GI
Terminal No. Condition Continuity
Key is inserted Yes
q
3 -q
4
Key is removed No MA
SEL907U EM
DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH
Check continuity between terminal and switch body ground when LC
door switch is pushed and released.
Terminal No. Condition Continuity EC
Door switch is pushed. No
q
1 - ground
Door switch is released. Yes
FE
SEL927U
AT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
Check continuity between terminals when seat belt is fastened and
PD
unfastened.
Terminal No. Condition Continuity FA
Seat belt is fastened. No
q
14 - q
41
Seat belt is unfastened. Yes
RA
BR
SEL928U
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-141
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER

Location
SEL854W
System Description
WIPER OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
I to front wiper motor terminal q 3 .
Ground is supplied to front wiper switch terminals q 17 and q 20 through body grounds E22 and E36 .
Low and high speed wiper operation
When the front wiper switch is placed in the LO position, ground is supplied
I through terminal q 14 of the front wiper switch
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at low speed.
When the front wiper switch is placed in the HI position, ground is supplied
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at high speed.
Auto stop operation
When the front wiper switch is placed in the OFF position, the front wiper motor will continue to operate until
the wiper arms reach the base of the windshield (Auto stop).
When the front wiper switch is placed in the OFF position, ground is supplied
I from terminal q 14 of the front wiper switch
I to front wiper motor terminal q 5 , in order to continue front wiper motor operation at low speed.
Ground is also supplied until the wiper arms reaches the base of the windshield
I to wiper relay terminal q 3
I through terminal q 4 of the wiper relay
I to front wiper motor terminal q 2
I through terminal q 1 of the front wiper motor, and
When the wiper arms reach the base of the windshield, the switch in the front wiper motor moves to the “STOP”
position. The ground path is interrupted and the front wiper motor stops.
Intermittent operation
Intermittent operation is controlled by the BCM.
When the front wiper switch is placed in the INT position, ground is supplied
EL-142
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
I from front wiper switch terminal q 15
The desired interval time is input
I from front wiper switch terminal q 19 and GI
I from combination meter terminal q 18 (vehicle speed pulse).
Based on these three inputs, an intermittent ground is supplied MA
I to front wiper relay terminal q 2
I from BCM terminal q 7 .
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper relay is activated. EM
When activated, an intermittent ground is supplied
I to front wiper motor terminal q 5
I through the front wiper switch terminal q 14
LC
I to front wiper switch terminal q 13
I through front wiper relay terminal q 3
I to front wiper relay terminal q 5
EC
Front wiper motor operates at desired interval with BCM terminal q 9 grounded.
Intermittent operation can be adjusted from:
FE
Approx. 4 - 19 sec.: (when vehicle is stopped)
Approx. 0.4 - 12 sec.: (when vehicle is moving) AT
Judgement on vehicle stopped or moving:
Stopped , Moving: More than 4 km/h (2 MPH)
Moving , Stopped: Less than 2 km/h (1 MPH) PD
WASHER OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied FA
I to front washer motor terminal q 2 .
When the lever is pulled to the WASH position, ground is supplied RA
I to washer motor terminal q 1 , and
I from terminal q 18 of the front wiper switch BR
I through terminal q 17 of the front wiper switch, and
With power and ground supplied, the washer motor operates. ST
The front wiper motor operates at low speed for about 3 seconds. This feature is controlled by the BCM in the
same manner as the intermittent operation.
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-143
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
Schematic
TEL777
EL-144
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
Wiring Diagram — WIPER —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL095M
EL-145
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
Wiring Diagram — WIPER — (Cont’d)
TEL096M
EL-146
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
Wiring Diagram — WIPER — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL097M
EL-147
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
CONSULT-II
SEF046TA

PBR455D
SEL471W
6. Touch “WIPER”.
SEL472W
I WORK SUPPORT, DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are

available for the wiper and washer.
SEL486W
EL-148
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
CONSULT-II CUSTOMIZING PROCEDURE
GI
MA
SEF046TA EM
EC
FE
PBR455D
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL471W
6. Touch “WIPER”. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL472W
7. Touch “WORK SUPPORT”.
IDX
SEL486W
EL-149
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
8. Touch “WIP INT VHCL SPD ADJ”.
SEL490W
I Wiper intermittent speed control by vehicle speed can be can-
celed or resumed.
SEL491W
10. Touch “CHANGE SETT” for changing “CURRENT SETTING”.

For no changing “CURRENT SETTING”, touch “END”.
“CURRENT SETTING” Wiper intermittent speed control
“ON” Activated
“OFF” Disactivated
SEL492W
11. Touch “END” after customizing is completed.
SEL493W
EL-150
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
GI
H
H
EM
LC
Yes No
SYMPTOM
BASIS EC
H H
E Repair/Replace according to the self- Select diagnostic procedure on the F

diagnostic results. (EL-249) basis of symptom. FE
H H
AT
NG
IVMS COMMUNICATION DIAGNOSIS REPAIR/REPLACE
(EL-247 or EL-253)
PD
OK
H H
NG
FA
FINAL CHECK
OK RA
H
CHECK OUT BR
ST
NOTICE:
the “disconnected” data will be memorized by the BCM. (While BCM memorizes the “disconnected” RS
I To erase the memory, perform the procedure below. BT
HA
IDX
EL-151
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
SYMPTOM: Intermittent wiper does not operate.
CHECK INTERMITTENT WIPER SWITCH NG Check the following.

E
INPUT SIGNAL. I Front wiper switch
CONSULT-II I Harness for open or
short between BCM and
See “INT SW” in DATA MONITOR mode. wiper switch
When wiper switch is in INT position: I Front wiper switch
INT SW ON ground circuit.
When wiper switch is in OFF position:
SEL503W
INT SW OFF
Note: When “Data monitor” is
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
operating, intermittent
ON BOARD
wiper do not operate.
Check wiper switch (INT) in Switch moni-

tor (Mode II) mode. (Refer to On board
Diagnosis, EL-255.)
OK
H
SEL504W CHECK WIPER AUTO STOP SIGNAL. NG Check the following.
E
CONSULT-II I Wiper motor
I Wiper ground circuit
See “WIP AUTO STOP” in DATA MONI- I Harness for open or
TOR mode, and turn wiper switch to LO or short between BCM and
HI position. wiper motor
When wiper switch is in INT or OFF:
WIP AUTO STOP ACC
When wiper switch is in LO or HI:
WIP AUTO STOP GND
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER
SEL648UB
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
2. Turn wiper switch to LO or HI position.
3. Check voltage between BCM connector
terminal q38 and ground.
Wiper condition Voltage V

Moving 0
Stop Approx. 12
OK
H
q
A
EL-152
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
q
A
H
CHECK IGNITION SWITCH ACC SIG- NG Check the following.
E
NAL. I 7.5A fuse [No. 23 , GI
(J/B)]
See “IGN ACC SW” in DATA MONITOR I Harness for open or MA
mode. short between fuse and
When ignition switch is ACC or ON BCM
SEL505W IGN ACC SW ON EM
When ignition switch is OFF
IGN ACC SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- LC
TESTER

60
EC
and ground.
Condition of ignition switch Voltage V FE

ACC or ON Approx. 12
SEL682UA
OFF 0 AT
OK PD
H FA
CHECK WIPER OPERATION. OK Replace BCM.
E
CONSULT-II
RA
See “WIPER AMP” in ACTIVE TEST
mode.
Perform operation shown on display. BR
SEL494W Wiper motor should operate.
Note:
If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this ST
procedure and go to procedure 5.
NG
RS
H
Go to procedure 5.
BT
HA
IDX
EL-153
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
SYMPTOM: Intermittent time of wiper cannot be adjusted.
CHECK INTERMITTENT WIPER VOL- OK Replace BCM.

E
UME INPUT SIGNAL.
CONSULT-II
See “INT RESIST” in DATA MONITOR

mode while turning intermittent wiper vol-
ume.
SEL506W
Position of wiper knob Resistance kΩ

Short interval Approx. 0
Long interval Approx. 1
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER
Measure resistance between BCM termi-

nal q48 and ground while turning intermit-
tent wiper volume.
SEL566UA
Position of wiper knob Resistance kΩ
Short interval Approx. 0
Long interval Approx. 1
NG
H
Check front wiper switch. NG Replace intermittent wiper
E
volume.
OK
H
and intermittent wiper volume
I Intermittent wiper volume ground circuit
EL-154
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
SYMPTOM: Wiper and washer activate individually but not in
combination.
CHECK WASHER SWITCH INPUT SIG- NG Check the following.

NAL.
E
GI
CONSULT-II short between BCM and
wiper switch
See “WASH SW” in DATA MONITOR
MA
mode.
When washer switch is ON:
SEL507W EM
WASH SW ON
When washer switch is OFF:
WASH SW OFF LC
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
EC
Check wiper switch (WASH) in Switch
board Diagnosis, EL-255). FE
OK
AT
H
Replace BCM. PD
FA
RA
BR
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 ST
SYMPTOM: Intermittent wiper operates, but there is no change
in intermittent time between when vehicle is
stopped and moving. RS
No
Does speedometer operate normally? E Check vehicle speed sen-
sor circuit. Refer to BT
Yes EL-110.
H HA
NG
CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR E Replace BCM.
SEL681UA
PULL UP VOLTAGE.
q
49 and ground.
Approx. 5V should exist.
IDX
OK
H
BCM terminal q49 and combination meter
terminal q
18 .
EL-155
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
SYMPTOM: Wiper and washer activate individually but inter-
mittent wiper and washer combination does not
operate.
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR NG Check the following.

E
FRONT WIPER RELAY. I 20A fuse [No. 11 ,
1. Disconnect front wiper relay. located in the fuse block
2. Turn wiper switch to OFF or INT posi- (J/B)]
SEL925U tion. I Harness for open or
3. Turn ignition switch to ACC position. short
4. Check voltage between front wiper
relay connector terminal q1 or q
3 and
ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK
H
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FRONT NG Repair harness.
SEL926U E
WIPER RELAY.
Check continuity between front wiper con-
nector terminal q
5 and ground.
OK
H
Check front wiper relay. NG Replace relay.
E
OK
H
SEL565UA CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL. OK Check harness for open or
E
1. Connect front wiper relay. short between front wiper
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC. relay and BCM.
3. Check voltage between BCM connector
terminal q7 and ground.
Wiper switch condition Voltage V

Wash 0 (for 0.7 sec.)
OFF Approx. 12
NG
H
Replace BCM.
EL-156
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER

WIPER ARMS
1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate
wiper motor and then turn it “OFF” (Auto Stop).
2. Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set GI
the blade center to clearance “L1” & “L2” immediately before
tightening nut.
3. Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor
MA
and then turn it “OFF”.
4. Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance “L1” & “L2”.
SEL543TA
Clearance “L1”: 20 - 34 mm (0.79 - 1.34 in)
EM
Clearance “L2”: 23 - 37 mm (0.91 - 1.46 in)
I Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque. LC
Front wiper: 21 - 26 N⋅m (2.1 - 2.7 kg-m, 15 - 20 ft-lb)
EC
FE
AT
I Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as

illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm loose- PD
ness.
FA
RA
BR
SEL024J
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-157
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
WIPER LINKAGE
CEL319
Removal
1. Remove 4 bolts that secure wiper motor.
2. Detach wiper motor from wiper linkage at ball joint.
3. Remove wiper linkage.
Be careful not to break ball joint rubber boot.
Installation
I Grease ball joint portion before installation.
1. Installation is the reverse order of removal.
Washer Nozzle Adjustment

I Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure
at left.
Adjustable range: ±10°
SEL241PA
Unit: mm (in)
*1 236 (9.29) *8 136 (5.35)
*2 337 (13.27) *9 8 (0.31)
*3 606 (23.86) *10 216 (8.50)
*4 422 (16.61) *11 149 (5.87)
*5 198 (7.80) *12 482 (18.98)
*6 286 (11.26) *13 376 (14.80)
*7 436 (17.17) *14 385 (15.16)
*1: The diameter of a circle is less than 80 mm (3.15 in).
CEL425 *2 - 7: The radius of the arc across the end of these areas is less than 40 mm
(1.57 in).
EL-158
EXIT
WIPER AND WASHER
Washer Tube Layout
GI
MA
CEL426 EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-159
EXIT
HORN
Wiring Diagram — HORN —
TEL098M
EL-160
EXIT
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
Wiring Diagram — CIGAR —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL099M
EL-161
EXIT
CLOCK
Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —
TEL100M
EL-162
EXIT
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

Location
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL860W
PD
System Description
FUNCTION FA
I The following time control function is controlled by BCM.
Item Details of control RA
Turn off rear window defogger about 15 minutes after the rear window defogger switch is
Rear window defogger timer
turned “ON”.
BR
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER TIMER
The rear window defogger system is controlled by the BCM. ST
I to the rear window defogger relay terminal q 6 , and RS
I to the rear window defogger relay terminal q 3 .
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied BT
I to the rear window defogger relay terminal q 1 and,
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 32 , located in the fuse block (J/B)]. HA
When the rear window defogger switch is ON, ground is supplied
I through terminal q 2 of the rear window defogger switch (A/C control unit)
Terminal q1 of the BCM then supplies ground to the rear window defogger relay terminal q 2 .
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized to operate rear window defog-
ger for about 15 minutes. IDX
When the system is activated, the rear window defogger indicator in the rear window defogger switch illumi-
nates.
Power is supplied
I from rear window defogger relay terminal q 5
I to A/C auto amp. terminal q 5 .
Then A/C auto amp. sends an indicator signal to A/C control unit combined with rear window defogger switch.
EL-163
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — DEF —
TEL101M
EL-164
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — DEF — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL102M
EL-165
EXIT
CONSULT-II
SEF046TA

PBR455D
SEL471W
6. Touch “REAR DEFOGGER”.
SEL472W
I DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are available for the rear
window defogger.
SEL480W
EL-166
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
GI
H
H
EM
LC
Yes No
SYMPTOM
BASIS EC
H H
E Repair/Replace according to the self- Perform diagnostic procedure on the F

diagnostic results. (EL-249) next page. FE
H H
AT
NG
IVMS COMMUNICATION DIAGNO- REPAIR/REPLACE
SIS (EL-247 or EL-253)
PD
OK
H H
NG
FA
FINAL CHECK
OK RA
H
CHECK OUT BR
NOTICE: ST
data, IVMS communication diagnosis of CONSULT-II will display “PAST NO RESPONSE”.) RS
Erase the memory with CONSULT-II (Refer to EL-247.) or turn the ignition switch to “OFF” position BT
HA
IDX
EL-167
EXIT
SYMPTOM: Rear window defogger does not activate or does
not turn off after activating.
NG
CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER E Check harness for open or
SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. short between BCM and
CONSULT-II rear window defogger
switch.
See “DEFOGGER SW” in DATA MONI- OK NG
TOR mode.
When defogger switch is pushed (turned
ON): H
SEL508W DEFOGGER SW ON Repair har-
When defogger switch is pushed again ness.
(turned OFF):
DEFOGGER SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD H
Replace rear window
Check rear window defogger switch in defogger switch (combined
Switch monitor (Mode II) mode. (Refer to with A/C control unit).
On board Diagnosis, EL-255.)
OK
H
NG
CHECK IGNITION SWITCH ON SIGNAL. E Check the following.
SEL499W (J/B)]
See “IGN ON SW” in DATA MONITOR
IGN ON SW ON BCM
IGN ON SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER

68
and ground.
ON Approx. 12
SEL556UA ACC or OFF 0
OK
H
NG
CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER E Check rear window defog-
OUTPUT SIGNAL. ger relay.
2. Check voltage between BCM terminal OK NG
q
1 and ground. H
Replace
Condition of ignition switch Voltage V relay.
ON Approx. 12 H
OFF 0 Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 32 ,
SEL655UA OK located in the fuse block
(J/B)]
short between fuse and
rear window defogger
relay
short between rear win-
dow defogger relay and
BCM
H
Connect BCM connector.
H
q
A
EL-168
EXIT
q
A
H
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ACTIVE NG Replace BCM.
E
TEST. GI
CONSULT-II
Perform “RR DEFOGGER RLY” in MA

ACTIVE TEST mode. Check rear defogger
relay operation.
SEL489W ------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- EM
TESTER
1. Turn ignition switch to ON. LC

q
1 and ground.
EC
Condition of rear defogger
Voltage V
switch
ON 0
OFF Approx. 12
FE
OK
SEL924U H AT
Check rear window defogger circuit.
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-169
EXIT
Filament Check
1. Attach probe circuit tester (in volt range) to middle portion of
each filament.
SEL263
I When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of

the negative probe. Then press the foil against the wire
with your finger.
SEL122R
2. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or 12 volts.
SEL265
3. To locate burned out point, move probe along filament. Tester

needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the point.
SEL266
EL-170
EXIT
Filament Repair
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
1. Conductive silver composition (Dupont No. 4817 or equivalent)
2. Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
3. Drawing pen GI
4. Heat gun
5. Alcohol
6. Cloth
MA
EM
REPAIRING PROCEDURE
1. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a LC
cloth dampened in alcohol.
2. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen. EC
Shake silver composition container before use.
3. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive sil-
ver composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap
FE
existing heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of
the break. AT
BE540 4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for con-
tinuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
composition is deposited. PD
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.
FA
RA
BR
SEL012D
5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area ST

for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum dis-
tance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area
and hot air outlet. If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired RS
area dry for 24 hours.
BT
HA
SEL013D
IDX
EL-171
EXIT
AUDIO
System Description
BOSE SYSTEM
Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating instructions.
I to audio unit terminal q 6 .
I to BOSE speaker amp. terminal q 27 and
I to audio amp. relay terminal q 3 .
I to CD auto changer terminal q 52 .
I to audio unit terminal q 10 and
I to CD auto changer terminal q 56 .
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit and BOSE speaker amp.
Ground is also supplied to CD auto changer terminal q 55 through body grounds B105 and B118 .
When the audio unit is turned to the ON position, power is supplied
I through audio unit terminal q 12
I to BOSE speaker amp. terminal q 25 , and
I to audio amp. relay terminal q 1 .
The audio amp. relay is energized, power is supplied
I through audio amp. relay terminal q 5
I to LH and RH rear speaker terminal q 3 .
When the audio unit is turned to the ON position, audio signals are supplied
I through terminals q 13 , q
14 , q
15 , q 16 , q1 ,q 2 ,q 3 and q 4 of audio unit
I to terminals q 21 , q
34 , q
23 , q
36 , q20 , q33 , q22 and q 35 of the BOSE speaker amp.
I through terminals q 30 , q
31 , q
28 , q 29 , q
37 , q24 , q
18 , q
17 , q
32 , q
19 , q
41 and q
42 of the BOSE speaker amp.
I to tweeters and the front and rear door speakers and rear speakers terminals q 1 and q2 .
EL-172
EXIT
AUDIO
Schematic
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL200M
EL-173
EXIT
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —
TEL105M
EL-174
EXIT
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL106M
EL-175
EXIT
AUDIO
TEL107M
EL-176
EXIT
AUDIO
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL108M
EL-177
EXIT
AUDIO
TEL109M
EL-178
EXIT
AUDIO
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL209A
EL-179
EXIT
AUDIO
TEL110M
EL-180
EXIT
AUDIO
Trouble Diagnoses
AUDIO UNIT (BOSE SYSTEM)
Audio unit inoperative (no digi- 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 8 , located in the fuse block (J/B)].
tal display and no sound from Turn ignition switch ACC or ON and verify that battery posi- GI
speakers). tive voltage is present at terminal q
10 of audio unit.
2. Poor audio unit case ground 2. Check audio unit case ground.
3. Audio unit 3. Remove audio unit for repair. MA
Audio unit controls are 1. AMP ON signal 1. Turn ignition switch ACC and radio ON. Verify battery positive
operational, but no sound is voltage is present from audio unit terminal q12 to BOSE
heard from any speaker. speaker amp. terminal q 25 and audio amp. relay terminal q
1 . EM
2. Audio amp. relay 2. Check audio amp. relay.
3. Audio amp. relay ground 3. Check audio amp. relay ground (Terminal q 2 ).
4. Poor speaker amp. case ground 4. Check speaker amp. case ground.
5. Speaker amp. output 5. Check speaker amp. output voltage. LC
6. Speaker amp. 6. Remove speaker amp. for repair.
Audio unit presets are lost 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse [No. 58 , located in the fuse, fusible link and
when ignition switch is turned relay box] and verify that battery positive voltage is present EC
OFF. at terminal q
6 of audio unit.
2. Audio unit 2. Remove audio unit for repair.
Individual speaker is noisy or 1. Speaker 1. Check speaker. FE
inoperative. 2. Speaker ground 2. Check speaker ground (Terminal q 4 : RR LH, q 4 : RR RH).
3. Power supply 3. Check power supply for speaker (Terminal q3 : RR LH, q3 :
4. Audio unit/speaker amp. output

RR RH).
4. Check radio/speaker amp. output voltage.
AT
5. Speaker circuit 5. Check wires for open or short between audio unit, amp. and
speaker.
6. Audio unit/speaker amp. 6. Remove audio unit or speaker amp. for repair. PD
7. Speaker 7. Replace speaker.
AM stations are weak or noisy 1. Antenna 1. Check antenna.
(FM stations OK). 2. Poor audio unit ground 2. Check audio unit ground. FA
FM stations are weak or noisy 1. Window antenna 1. Check window antenna.

(AM stations OK). 2. Audio unit 2. Remove audio unit for repair. RA
Radio generates noise in AM 1. Poor audio unit ground 1. Check audio unit ground.
and FM modes with engine 2. Loose or missing ground bonding straps 2. Check ground bonding straps.
running. 3. Ignition condenser or rear window defogger 3. Replace ignition condenser or rear window defogger noise BR
noise suppressor condenser suppressor condenser.
4. Alternator 4. Check alternator.
5. Ignition coil or secondary wiring 5. Check ignition coil and secondary wiring.
ST
Radio generates noise in AM 1. Poor audio unit ground 1. Check audio unit ground.
and FM modes with accesso- 2. Antenna 2. Check antenna.
ries on (switch pops and motor 3. Accessory ground 3. Check accessory ground.
RS
noise). 4. Faulty accessory 4. Replace accessory.
BT
HA
IDX
EL-181
EXIT
AUDIO
CD AUTOCHANGER
No play of the CD after CD play button

is pushed.
There is no error code shown on 1. Audio unit 1. Remove the audio unit for repair.
the audio unit. (The audio unit is not working.)
2. Harness connection 2. Check harness connection.
(Magazine does not eject.)
3. Changer 3. Remove the changer for repair.
Error code [CD Err] is shown on 1. Discs 1. Inspect discs.
the audio unit. (Refer to testing magazines and discs.)
2. Magazine does not eject or a 2. Reset the changer.
disc remains in CD player. (Disconnect harness connector at the changer and reconnect
after 30 sec.)
CD skipping. 1. Rough road driving 1. System is not malfunctioning.

2. Discs 2. Inspect discs.
(Refer to testing magazines and discs.)
3. Bracket 3. Check and repair bracket and installation of changer.
Error code [CD no disk] is shown on the 1. Magazine setting 1. Confirm the magazine is pushed completely.
audio unit after CD play button is 2. Magazine 2. Inspect magazine.
pressed. (Refer to testing magazines and discs.)
Error code [CD HHHH] is shown on the 1. Overheat 1. Turn the radio off. Open the trunk lid to lower the trunk room
audio unit after CD play button is and changer temperature.
pressed. 2. Reset the Error code 2. Reset the audio unit or changer.
(Disconnect harness connector at the audio unit or changer and
reconnect.)
3. Audio unit or changer 3. Remove the audio unit or changer for repair.
Testing magazines and discs

1. Confirm discs are installed correctly into the magazine (not upside down).
2. Visually inspect/compare the customer’s discs with each other and other discs.
Identify any of the following conditions:
I Discs with a large outside diameter. [Normal size is 120 mm (4.72 in).]
I Discs with rough or lipped edges.
I Discs with excessive thickness [Normal size is 1.2 mm (0.047 in).]
I Discs with scratches, abrasions, or pits on the surface.
I Discs with grease/oil, fingerprints, foreign material.
I Discs are warped due to excessive heat exposure.
3. Slide/place the discs in and out of the various magazine positions.
Identify any discs and/or positions that require additional force for placement/ejection. If interference
(sticking, excessive tensions) is found, replace the magazine or the discs.
Note
I Discs which are marginally out of specification (ex. dirty, scratched and so on) may play correctly
on a home stereo.
However, when used in the automotive environment skipping may occur due to the added vehicle
movement and/or vibration due to road conditions. Autochangers should not be replaced when
discs are at fault.
I Use a soft damp cloth to wipe the discs starting from the center outward in radial direction. Never
use chemical cleaning solutions to clean the discs.
EL-182
EXIT
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — REMOTE —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL111M
EL-183
EXIT
AUDIO ANTENNA
System Description
I to power antenna timer and motor terminal q 6 .
I to audio unit terminal q 10 .
Ground is supplied to the power antenna timer and motor terminal q 2 through body grounds B22 and B35 .
When the audio unit is turned to the ON position, battery positive voltage is supplied
I through audio unit terminal q 5
The antenna raises and is held in the extended position.
When the audio unit is turned to the OFF position, battery positive voltage is interrupted
I from audio unit terminal q 5
The antenna retracts.
EL-184
EXIT
AUDIO ANTENNA
Wiring Diagram — P/ANT —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL112M
EL-185
EXIT
AUDIO ANTENNA
Trouble Diagnoses
POWER ANTENNA
Power antenna does not oper- 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 28 , located in the fuse block (J/B)].
ate. Verify that battery positive voltage is present at terminal q
6
of power antenna timer and motor.
2. Audio signal 2. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON and radio ON. Verify that
battery positive voltage is present at terminal q4 of power
antenna timer and motor.
3. Grounds B22 and B35 3. Check grounds B22 and B35 .
4. Power antenna timer and motor 4. Check power antenna timer and motor.
Location of Antenna
CEL427
Antenna Rod Replacement

REMOVAL
1. Remove antenna nut and antenna base.
CEL428
2. Withdraw antenna rod while raising it by operating antenna

motor.
CEL429
EL-186
EXIT
AUDIO ANTENNA
Antenna Rod Replacement (Cont’d)
INSTALLATION
1. Lower antenna rod by operating antenna motor.
2. Insert gear section of antenna rope into place with it facing
toward antenna motor.
3. As soon as antenna rope is wound on antenna motor, stop GI
antenna motor. Insert antenna rod lower end into antenna
motor pipe.
4. Retract antenna rod completely by operating antenna motor. MA
5. Install antenna nut and base.
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
CEL430
Window Antenna Repair

PD
ELEMENT CHECK
1. Attach probe circuit tester (in ohm range) to antenna terminal
on each side. FA
2. If an element is broken, no continuity will exist.
3. To locate broken point, move probe along element. Tester
needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the point.
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL252I
ELEMENT REPAIR
Refer to REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER “Filament Repair” (EL-171).
IDX
EL-187
EXIT
TELEPHONE (Pre wire)
Wiring Diagram — PHONE —
TEL113M
EL-188
EXIT
TELEPHONE (Pre wire)
Wiring Diagram — PHONE — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL114M
EL-189
EXIT
TRUNK LID AND FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
Wiring Diagram — T&FLID —
TEL115M
EL-190
EXIT
TRUNK LID AND FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
Wiring Diagram — T&FLID — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL116M
EL-191
EXIT
TRUNK CLOSURE

Location
SEL861W
System Description
I to trunk closure control unit terminal q
2 .
Ground is supplied at all times
I to trunk closure control unit terminal q
4
I through body ground T12 .
I through 10A fuse [No. 27 , located in the fuse block (J/B)] and trunk room lamp
I to trunk room lamp switch (lock switch).
OPERATION
When trunk is closed
1. CLOSED (LOCK) signal is supplied from trunk room lamp switch (lock switch) to trunk closure control unit
terminal q1 (Battery voltage is supplied to trunk closure control unit terminal q
1 when trunk room lamp
switch is turned to CLOSED (LOCK)).
2. When trunk closure control unit receive CLOSED (LOCK) signal from trunk room lamp switch, power is
supplied to trunk closure motor from trunk closure control unit within 40 msec.
3. When stop switch in trunk closure control unit is turned to OFF during closing operation, trunk closure
motor stops within 40 msec.
When trunk is opened

1. OPEN (UNLOCK) signal is supplied from trunk room lamp switch (lock switch) to trunk closure control unit
terminal q1 (Battery voltage to trunk closure control unit terminal q
1 is cut off when trunk room lamp switch
is turned to OPEN (UNLOCK)).
2. OPEN signal is supplied to trunk closure control unit terminal q 3 from striker switch.
3. When trunk closure control unit receives OPEN signal from striker switch, power is supplied to trunk clo-
sure motor from trunk closure control unit within 40 msec.
4. When stop switch in trunk closure control unit is turned to ON during opening operation, trunk closure motor
stops within 40 msec.
EL-192
EXIT
TRUNK CLOSURE
Wiring Diagram — T/CLOS —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL117M
EL-193
EXIT
TRUNK CLOSURE
Wiring Diagram — T/CLOS — (Cont’d)
TEL118M
EL-194
EXIT
TRUNK CLOSURE
Trouble Diagnosis
SYMPTOM CHART
REFERENCE PAGE EL-195 EL-196 —
GI
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK

MA
EM
LC
Replace Trunk Closure Unit

EC
FE
AT
SYMPTOM
Trunk closure does not operate for closing
and opening trunk lid.
X X PD
Trunk closure operation does not stop. X
Trunk closure operation stops in an unstable
X
FA
trunk lid position.
RA
BR
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK ST

Terminal Ignition switch RS
! @ OFF ACC ON
q
2 Ground
Battery Battery Battery BT
voltage voltage voltage
HA
SEL820V

q
4 - Ground Yes IDX
SEL821V
EL-195
EXIT
TRUNK CLOSURE
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)
OK
CHECK TRUNK CLOSURE MOTOR Eq
A
OPERATION.
1. Open trunk lid and remove the trunk
room trim.
2. Disconnect trunk room lamp switch con-
nector and check the operation of trunk
closure motor.
3. Apply ground to trunk room lamp switch
harness connector terminal q1 .
4. Check the operation of trunk closure
motor.
Does trunk closure motor operate when
trunk room lamp switch connector is
disconnected or ground is applied to
trunk room lamp switch harness con-
nector terminal q
1 ?
Trunk closure motor should operate.
NG
H
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR E Check harness for open or
STRIKER SWITCH. short between striker
1. Disconnect striker switch harness con- switch and ground.
nector.
SEL948V
2. Check harness continuity between
striker switch harness connector termi-
nal q2 and ground.
OK
H
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO TRUNK E Check power supply circuit
ROOM LAMP SWITCH. to trunk closure control unit
1. Disconnect trunk room lamp switch harness connector terminal
harness connector and trunk closure q1 and trunk room lamp
control unit connector T14 . switch harness connector
2. Check voltage between trunk closure terminal q1 for open or
control unit and trunk room lamp switch short.
SEL949V
harness connectors terminal q 1 and
ground respectively.
OK or NG
OK
H
Replace trunk closure units.
SEL823V
EL-196
EXIT
TRUNK CLOSURE
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)
q
A
H
NG
CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH. E Replace trunk lid lock
Disconnect trunk room lamp switch har- which has trunk room lamp GI
ness connector. switch.
Check continuity between the trunk room
lamp switch harness connector terminal MA
q1 and q2 .
When lock the trunk room lid lock
SEL825V When unlock the trunk room lid lock EM
OK or NG
OK LC
H
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. E Check harness for open or EC
1. Disconnect trunk room lamp switch short between trunk room
harness connector. lamp switch and ground.
2. Check the harness continuity between
trunk room lamp switch harness con- FE
nector and ground.
SEL822V
OK or NG AT
OK
H
Trunk closure electric system is OK. PD
Check mechanical malfunction.
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-197
EXIT
ELECTRIC SUNROOF

Location
SEL943W
System Description
OUTLINE
Electric sunroof system consists of
I Sunroof switch
I Sunroof motor assembly
I Sunroof relay
I BCM (Body Control Module)
BCM controls the operation of sunroof relay. Power is supplied to sunroof motor assembly through sunroof
relay. Sunroof will be operated depending on sunroof switch condition.
OPERATION
I Sunroof can be opened or closed and tilted up or down with sunroof switch.
Auto operation
The power sunroof AUTO feature makes it possible to open and close the sunroof without holding the sunroof
switch in the down or up position.
Delayed power operation

When the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position, the sunroof will still operate for up to approximately
45 seconds unless driver’s side or passenger side door is opened.
Interruption detection function

The CPU of sunroof motor monitors the sunroof motor operation and the sunroof position (full closed or other)
for sunroof by the signals from sunroof motor.
When sunroof motor detects interruption during the following close operation,
I automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the “ON” position
I automatic close operation during retained power operation
sunroof switch controls the motor for open and the sunroof will operate about 150 mm (5.91 in).
EL-198
EXIT
ELECTRIC SUNROOF
Wiring Diagram — SROOF —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL119M
EL-199
EXIT
ELECTRIC SUNROOF
Wiring Diagram — SROOF — (Cont’d)
TEL120M
EL-200
EXIT
ELECTRIC SUNROOF
CONSULT-II
GI
MA
SEF046TA EM
EC
FE
PBR455D
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL471W
6. Touch “SUN ROOF RELAY”. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL581W
I DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are available for the sun-
roof relay.
IDX
SEL480W
EL-201
EXIT
ELECTRIC SUNROOF
Trouble Diagnoses
Power sunroof cannot be operated 1. 10A fuse, 40A fusible link and B5 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 28, located in fuse block
using any switch. circuit breaker (J/B)], 40A fusible link (letter h, located in fuse,
fusible link and relay box) and B5 circuit breaker.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and verify battery posi-
tive voltage is present at terminals 1 and 6 of
sunroof motor.
2. Sunroof relay 2. Check sunroof relay
3. Grounds M14 and M47 3. Check grounds M14, M47.
4. Sunroof switch 4. Check sunroof switch.
5. Sunroof switch circuit 5. Check harness between sunroof switch and sun-
roof motor.
6. Sunroof motor 6. Check sunroof motor.
Power sunroof cannot be operated 1. Sunroof switch 1. Check sunroof switch.
using one of the sunroof switches. 2. Sunroof switch circuit 2. Check the harness between sunroof motor and
sunroof switch.
Power sunroof auto function cannot 1. Sunroof slide mechanism 1-1. Check obstacles in sunroof, etc.
be operated properly. 1-2. Check worn or deformed sunroof.
1-3. Check sunroof sash tilted too far inward or out-
ward.
2. Sunroof switch 2. Check sunroof switch.
3. Sunroof switch circuit 3. Check harness between sunroof motor and sun-
roof switch.
4. Sunroof motor 4. Replace sunroof motor.
Delyaed power operation does not 1. Driver or passenger side door 1-1. Check harness between smart entrance control
operate properly. switch circuit unit and driver or passenger side door switch
for short circuit.
1-2. Check driver or passenger side door switch
ground circuit.
1-3. Check driver or passenger side door switch.
2. BCM 2. Check BCM
EL-202
EXIT
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL121M
EL-203
EXIT
AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — I/MIRR —
TEL122M
EL-204
EXIT
POWER SEAT (Passenger side)
Schematic
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL809
EL-205
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — SEAT —
TEL123M
EL-206
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — SEAT — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL811
EL-207
EXIT
TEL812
EL-208
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL213A
EL-209
EXIT
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — HSEAT —
TEL124M
EL-210
EXIT
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — HSEAT — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL815
EL-211
EXIT
REAR SUNSHADE

Location
SEL862W
EL-212
EXIT
REAR SUNSHADE
System Description
Power is supplied at all times.
I to rear sunshade unit terminal q5 .
Ground is supplied at all times GI
I to rear sunshade unit terminal q6
I through body ground B105 and B118 .
MA
OPEN OPERATION
When rear sunshade switch is turned to “OPEN”, the ground is supplied to rear sunshade unit terminal q
1 .
6 through rear sunshade unit terminal q
Based on the ground signal to control unit terminal q 1 , EM
power is supplied
I to motor terminal q 2
I from control unit terminal q
9 LC
and ground is supplied
I to motor terminal q 1
I from control unit terminal q
8 . EC
When sunshade is fully opened, control unit stops to supply power to motor based on the signal from
UP/DOWN limit switch.
FE
CLOSE OPERATION
When rear sunshade switch is turned to “CLOSE”, ground is supplied to rear sunshade unit terminal q 2 . Based AT
on the ground signal to control unit terminal q7 through rear sunshade unit terminal q 2 ,
power is supplied
I to motor terminal q 1 PD
I from control unit terminal q8
and ground is supplied
I to motor terminal q 2 FA
I from control unit terminal q9 .
When sunshade is fully closed, control unit stops to supply power to motor based on the signal from UP/DOWN
limit switch. RA
Once the sunshade switch is pushed, the open or close operation will be continued until the control unit detects
full open or full close based on the signal from UP/DOWN limit switch. During open or close operation of BR
sunshade, the input signal from sunshade switch is ignored.
When control unit detects the slack of sunshade based on the signal from slack detection switch, the motor
will be stopped. When control unit detects no slack of sunshade based on the signal from slack detection ST
switch, power is supplied again to motor after 1 sec. after no slack is detected.
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-213
EXIT
REAR SUNSHADE
Wiring Diagram — SHADE —
TEL125M
EL-214
EXIT
REAR SUNSHADE
Wiring Diagram — SHADE — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL126M
EL-215
EXIT
REAR SUNSHADE
Trouble Diagnoses
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
Check voltage between rear sunshade unit terminal q
5 and ground.
Ignition switch position
Terminals
OFF ACC ON START
q
5 - Ground 0V Battery voltage

SEL926V
I Harness for open or short between 7.5A fuse [No. 10 , located
in fuse block (J/B)] and rear sunshade unit.
GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK

Check continuity between rear sunshade unit terminal q
6 and
ground.
q
6 - Ground Yes
If NG, check harness for open between rear sunshade unit termi-
nal q
6 and body ground B105 and B118 .
SEL927V
REAR SUNSHADE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CHECK

1. Disconnect rear sunshade unit connector.
2. Check the following continuity.
Terminals Switch position Continuity
Open Yes
q
1 - Ground Neutral No
Close No
Open No
SEL924V q
2 - Ground Neutral No
Close Yes

I Harness for open or short between rear sunshade unit and rear
sunshade switch
I Harness for open or short between rear sunshade switch and
ground
I Rear sunshade switch
EL-216
EXIT
REAR SUNSHADE
REAR SUNSHADE SWITCH CHECK
1. Disconnect rear sunshade switch.
2. Check continuity between rear sunshade switch terminals.
Terminals Switch position Continuity
Open Yes
GI
q
1 -q
3 Neutral No
Close No MA
Open No
SEL863W q
2 -q
3 Neutral No EM
Close Yes
If NG, replace rear sunshade switch. LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-217
EXIT
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)

Location
SEL864W
EL-218
EXIT
System Description
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
When ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I to ASCD hold unit terminal q 1 . GI
When MAIN switch is depressed, ground is supplied
I to ASCD hold unit terminal q 2
I through ASCD steering switch terminal q 4 .
MA
If those two signals are input, ASCD hold unit supplies power
I to ASCD control unit terminal q 4 ,
I to ASCD control unit terminal q 5 (through ASCD brake switch and park/neutral position relay) and
EM
I to combination meter terminal q 45 to illuminate CRUISE indicator.
ASCD hold unit keeps power supply until any of following condition exists.
I Ignition switch is returned to the ACC or OFF position.
LC
I MAIN switch is depressed again.
Ground is supplied EC
I to ASCD hold unit terminal q 4 and
I to ASCD control unit terminal q 3
I through body grounds M14 and M47 . FE
OPERATION
Set operation AT
To activate the ASCD, all of following conditions must exist.
I Power supply to ASCD control unit terminal q 4
I Power supply to ASCD control unit terminal q 5 (Brake pedal is released and A/T selector lever is in other PD
than P and N position.)
I Vehicle speed is between 48 km/h (30 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH). (Signal from combination meter)
When the SET/COAST switch is depressed, power is supplied FA
I from ASCD steering switch terminal q 2
I to ASCD control unit terminal q 2 .
And then ASCD pump is activated to control throttle wire and ASCD control unit supply power RA
I to combination meter terminal q 46 to illuminate SET indicator.
A/T overdrive control during cruise control driving
BR
When the vehicle speed is approximately 8 km/h (5 MPH) below set speed, a signal is sent
I from ASCD control unit terminal q 12
I to TCM (transmission control module) terminal q40 . ST
When this occurs, the TCM (transmission control module) cancels overdrive.
After vehicle speed is approximately 3 km/h (2 MPH) above set speed, overdrive is reactivated.
Coast operation RS
When the SET/COAST switch is depressed during cruise control driving, ASCD actuator returns the throttle
cable to decrease vehicle set speed until the switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
Accel operation BT
When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed, power is supplied
I from ASCD steering switch terminal q 3 HA
I to ASCD control unit terminal q 1 .
If the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed during cruise control driving, ASCD actuator pulls the throttle cable
to increase the vehicle speed until the switch is released or vehicle speed is reached to maximum controlled
speed by the system. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
Cancel operation
When any of following condition exists, cruise operation will be canceled. (CRUISE indicator will continue to IDX
illuminate.)
I CANCEL switch is depressed. (Power supply to ASCD control unit terminals q 1 and q2 )
I Brake pedal is depressed. (Power supply to ASCD control unit terminal q 11 from stop lamp switch)
I Brake pedal is depressed or A/T selector lever is shifted to P or N position. (Power supply to ASCD con-
trol unit terminal q
5 is interrupted.)
If MAIN switch is depressed during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operation will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
EL-219
EXIT
Resume operation
When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed after cancel operation other than depressing MAIN switch is
performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must
meet following conditions.
I Brake pedal is released.
I A/T selector lever is in other than P and N position.
I Vehicle speed is between 48 km/h (30 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ASCD PUMP OPERATION

The ASCD pump consists of a vacuum motor, an air valve and a release valve. When the ASCD activates,
power is supplied
I from terminal q 8 of ASCD control unit
I to ASCD pump terminal q 1 .
Ground is supplied to vacuum motor, air valve and release valve from ASCD control unit depending on the
operated condition as shown in the below table.
The pump is connected to ASCD actuator by vacuum hose. When the ASCD pump is activated, the ASCD
pump vacuum the diaphragm of ASCD actuator to control throttle cable.
Actuator inner pres-
Air valve* Release valve* Vacuum motor
sure
ASCD not operating Open Open Stopped Atmosphere
Releasing throttle
Open Closed Stopped Vacuum (decrease)
cable
ASCD operating Holding throttle
Closed Closed Stopped Vacuum (hold)
position
Pulling throttle cable Closed Closed Operated Vacuum (increase)
*: When power and ground is supplied, valve is closed.
EL-220
EXIT
Schematic
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL028M
EL-221
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — ASCD —
TEL127M
EL-222
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — ASCD — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL128M
EL-223
EXIT
TEL129M
EL-224
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL130M
EL-225
EXIT
TEL131M
EL-226
EXIT
CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to data link connector.
GI
MA
SEF046TA EM
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Turn ASCD main switch ON. LC
5. Touch START (on CONSULT-II display).
6. Touch ASCD.
7. Touch SELF-DIAG RESULTS. EC
FE
SEL509W
AT
I Self-diagnostic results are shown on display.
Refer to table on the next page. PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL510W
8. Touch DATA MONITOR. ST

The items on the next page are available as data monitor
items.
RS
BT
HA
SEL511W
I Touch START.
I Data monitor results are shown on display.
Refer to table on the next page.
For further information, read the CONSULT-II Operation IDX
Manual.
SEL512W
EL-227
EXIT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Diagnostic item Description Repair/Check order
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
I Even if no self diagnostic code is indicated, further testing
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE —
may be required as far as the customer complains.
REQUIRED.
I The power supply circuit for the ASCD pump is open. (An Diagnostic procedure 6
POWER SUPPLY-VALVE
abnormally high voltage is entered.) (EL-237)
I The vacuum pump circuit is open or shorted. (An abnormally Diagnostic procedure 6
VACUUM PUMP
high or low voltage is entered.) (EL-237)
I The air valve circuit is open or shorted. (An abnormally high Diagnostic procedure 6
AIR VALVE
or low voltage is entered.) (EL-237)
I The release valve circuit is open or shorted. (An abnormally Diagnostic procedure 6
RELEASE VALVE
high or low voltage is entered.) (EL-237)
I The vehicle speed sensor or the fail-safe circuit is malfunc- Diagnostic procedure 5
VHCL SP-S/FAILSAFE
tioning. (EL-236)
CONTROL UNIT I The ASCD control unit is malfunctioning. Replace ASCD control unit.
Diagnostic procedure 3
BRAKE SW/STOP/L SW I The brake switch or stop lamp switch is malfunctioning.
(EL-234)
DATA MONITOR
Monitored item Description
BRAKE SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the brake switch circuit.
STOP LAMP SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the stop lamp switch circuit.
SET SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the set switch circuit.
RESUME/ACC SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the resume/accelerate switch circuit.
CANCEL SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the cancel circuit.
I The present vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed sensor signal is
VHCL SPEED SE
displayed.
SET VHCL SPD I The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
VACUUM PUMP I The operation time of the vacuum pump is displayed.
AIR VALVE I The operation time of the air valve is displayed.
PW SUP-VALVE I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the circuit for the air valve and the release valve.
CRUISE LAMP I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the cruise lamp circuit.
A/T-OD CANCEL I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the OD cancel circuit.
AT OD MONITOR I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of over drive.
FAIL SAFE-LOW I The fail-safe (LOW) circuit function is displayed.
FAIL SAFE-SPD I The fail-safe (SPEED) circuit function is displayed.
TCS MONITOR I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of traction control system.
EL-228
EXIT
Fail-safe System Description

When the fail-safe system senses a malfunction, it deactivates
ASCD operation. The SET indicator in the combination meter will
then flash.
GI
MA
CEL322-A EM
MALFUNCTION DETECTION CONDITIONS
LC
ASCD operation during
Detection conditions
malfunction detection
I ASCD steering (RESUME/ACCEL, CANCEL, SET/COAST) switch is stuck. I ASCD is deactivated. EC
I Vacuum motor ground circuit or power circuit is open or shorted. I Vehicle speed memory is can-
I Air valve ground circuit or power circuit is open or shorted. celed.
I Release valve ground circuit or power circuit is open or shorted. FE
I Vehicle speed sensor is faulty.
I ASCD control unit internal circuit is malfunctioning.
AT
I ASCD brake switch or stop lamp switch is faulty. I ASCD is deactivated.
I Vehicle speed memory is not
canceled. PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-229
EXIT
Fail-safe System Check

1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
2. Turn ASCD main switch to ON and check if the “SET indica-
tor” blinks.
If the indicator lamp blinks, check the following.
I ASCD steering switch. Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
4” (EL-235).
SEL417V
3. Drive the vehicle at more than 48 km/h (30 MPH) and push
SET/COAST switch.
I Vehicle speed sensor. Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
5” (EL-236).
I ASCD pump circuit. Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6”
(EL-237).
I Replace control unit.
SEL767P
4. Depress brake pedal slowly (brake pedal should be depressed

more than 5 seconds).
I ASCD brake/stop lamp switch. Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PRO-
CEDURE 3” (EL-234).
SAT797A
5. END. (System is OK.)
EL-230
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses
SYMPTOM CHART
PROCEDURE — Diagnostic procedure
REFERENCE PAGE EL-227 EL-230 EL-232 EL-233 EL-234 EL-235 EL-236 EL-237 EL-238 GI
(POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK)

MA
(ASCD BRAKE/STOP LAMP SWITCH CHECK)

EM
(ASCD STEERING SWITCH CHECK)
(VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CHECK)
(ASCD ACTUATOR/PUMP CHECK)

(ASCD PUMP CIRCUIT CHECK)
LC
Self-diagnosis in CONSULT-II
(ASCD HOLD UNIT CHECK)

SYMPTOM
EC
Fail-safe system check
FE
AT
ASCD cannot be set. (“SET” indica-

tor lamp does not blink.)
X X X X X PD
ASCD cannot be set. (“SET” indica-
X X X X X X
tor lamp blinks.★1) FA
Vehicle speed does not decrease
after SET/COAST switch has been X X X
pressed. RA
Vehicle speed does not return to the
set speed after RESUME/ACCEL X X X BR
switch has been pressed.★2
Vehicle speed does not increase
after RESUME/ACCEL switch has X X X ST
been pressed.
System is not released after CAN-
CEL switch (steering) has been X X X
RS
pressed.
Large difference between set speed
X X X X
BT
and actual vehicle speed.
Deceleration is greatest immediately
after ASCD has been set.
X X X X HA
★1: It indicates that system is in fail-safe. After completing diagnostic procedures, perform “Fail-safe System Check” (EL-230)
to verify repairs.
★2: If vehicle speed is greater than 48 km/h (30 MPH) after system has been released, pressing RESUME/ACCEL switch returns
vehicle speed to the set speed previously achieved. However, doing so when the ASCD main switch is turned to “OFF”,
vehicle speed will not return to the set speed since the memory is canceled. IDX
EL-231
EXIT
(POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK)
1. Turn ignition switch ON. No Check the following.
E
2. Turn ASCD main switch “ON”. I ASCD hold unit. Go to
Does “CRUISE” indicator illuminate? DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-
DURE 2 (ASCD HOLD
Yes
UNIT CHECK).
short between ASCD
SEL289UI hold unit and combina-
tion meter
I “CRUISE” indicator
ground circuit
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR No Check harness for open or
E
ASCD CONTROL UNIT. short between ASCD con-
1. Disconnect ASCD control unit connec- trol unit and ASCD hold
tor. unit.
SEL764UA 3. Turn ASCD main switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between control unit
connector terminal q 4 and ground.
Does battery voltage exist?
Yes
H
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ASCD No Repair harness.
E
CONTROL UNIT.
Check continuity between ASCD control
unit harness terminal q
3 and ground.
Does continuity exist?
Yes
H
Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
EL-232
EXIT
(ASCD HOLD UNIT CHECK)
CHECK HOLD UNIT OUTPUT. Yes ASCD hold unit is OK. GI

E
2. Depress ASCD main switch.
3. Check voltage between hold unit termi- MA
nal q
3 and ground.
Does battery voltage exist?
SEL361VB EM
No LC
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR No Check the following. EC
E
HOLD UNIT. I 7.5A fuse [No. 32 ,
1. Turn ignition switch ON. located in the fuse block
2. Check voltage between hold unit termi- (J/B)]
FE
nal q
1 and ground. I Harness for open or
Does battery voltage exist? short between fuse and
SEL362VB hold unit
AT
Yes
H
PD
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR HOLD No Repair harness.
E
UNIT.
Check continuity between hold unit termi-
FA
nal q
4 and ground.
Does continuity exist?
RA
Yes
H
BR
SEL363VB
CHECK MAIN SWITCH INPUT. NG Check the following.
E
1. Disconnect hold unit connector. I ASCD steering switch ST
2. Check continuity between hold unit Refer to “Electrical Com-
connector terminal q
2 and ground. ponents Inspection” (EL-
239). RS
Condition of main I Harness for open or
Continuity
switch short between ASCD
Pressed Yes hold unit and ASCD BT
steering switch
Released No
I ASCD steering switch
OK
ground circuit HA
SEL364VB H
Replace ASCD hold unit.
IDX
EL-233
EXIT
(ASCD BRAKE/STOP LAMP SWITCH CHECK)
NG
CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT. E Check the following.
See “BRAKE SW” in “Data moni- I ASCD brake switch
tor” mode. Refer to “Electrical Com-
When brake pedal is depressed or ponents Inspection” (EL-
A/T selector lever is in “N” or “P” 239).
range: I Park/Neutral position
BRAKE SW OFF switch
SEL513W When brake pedal is released and Refer to “Electrical Com-
A/T selector lever is not in “N” or ponents Inspection” (EL-
“P” range: 239).
BRAKE SW ON I Park/Neutral position
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- relay
1. Disconnect ASCD control unit I Diode
connector. Refer to “Electrical Com-
2. Turn ignition switch ON. ponents Inspection” (EL-
3. Turn ASCD main switch “ON”. 239).
4. Check voltage between control I Harness for open or
unit connector terminal q 5 and short
ground.
When brake pedal is depressed
or A/T selector lever is in “N” or
“P” range:
SEL765UI Approx. 0V
When brake pedal is released
and A/T selector lever is not in
“N” or “P” range:
Refer to wiring diagram in

EL-224.
OK
H
NG
CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT. E Check the following.
See “STOP LAMP SW” in “Data I 15A fuse [No. 37 ,
SEL514W monitor” mode. located in the fuse block
When brake pedal is released: (J/B)]
STOP LAMP SW OFF I Stop lamp switch
When brake pedal is depressed: Refer to “Electrical Com-
STOP LAMP SW ON ponents Inspection” (EL-
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- 239).
1. Disconnect ASCD control unit I Harness for open or
connector. short.
2. Check voltage between ASCD
control unit terminal q 11 and
ground.
Voltage
Condition
V
Stop lamp Depressed Approx. 12
SEL759UA switch Released 0
OK
H
ASCD brake/stop lamp switch is OK.
EL-234
EXIT
(ASCD STEERING SWITCH CHECK)
CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH

OK
ASCD steering switch is GI
E
INPUT. OK.
See “SET SW”, “RESUME/ACC
SW” and “CANCEL SW” in “Data MA
monitor” mode.
SET SW, RESUME/ACC SW and
CANCEL SW
SEL515W When switch is pressed: ON EM
When switch is released: OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Disconnect ASCD control unit
connector.
LC
2. Check voltage between control
unit terminals and ground.
Terminal No. Switch condition
EC
! @ Pressed Released
SET/
COAST q
2 Ground 12V 0V FE
SW
RESUME/
q
1 Ground 12V 0V
SEL760UA
ACC SW AT
CANCEL q
2 Ground 12V 0V
SW q
1 Ground 12V 0V
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-223. PD

NG
H
NG
FA
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR ASCD E Check the following.
STEERING SWITCH. I 15A fuse (No. 64 ,
Does horn work? located in the fuse, fus- RA
ible link and relay box)
OK I Horn relay
short between horn relay BR
SEL365V and fuse
ST
H
NG
CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH. E Replace ASCD steering
Check continuity between terminals by switch. RS
pushing each switch.
Terminal
Switch
q
1 q
3 q
2
BT
SET/
q q
COAST
RESUME/
HA
q q
ACCEL
q E q
CANCEL
q E q
OK
H IDX
ASCD steering switch and ASCD con-
trol unit
ASCD steering switch and spiral cable
EL-235
EXIT
(VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CHECK)
CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL. OK Vehicle speed sensor is OK.

E
See “VHCL SPEED SE” in
“Data monitor” mode while driv-
ing.
------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------
1. Apply wheel chocks and jack
SEL516W up drive wheel.
2. Disconnect ASCD control
unit connector.
3. Connect voltmeter between
control unit connector termi-
nal q 7 and ground.
4. Slowly turn drive wheel.
5. Check deflection of voltme-
ter pointer.
Refer to wiring diagram in

EL-226.
SEL761UA
NG
H
CHECK SPEEDOMETER OPERA- No Check speedometer and
E
TION. vehicle speed sensor circuit.
Does speedometer operate normally? Refer to EL-108.
Yes
H
Check harness for open or short
between ASCD control unit terminal q 7
and combination meter terminal q18 .
EL-236
EXIT
(ASCD PUMP CIRCUIT CHECK)
CHECK ASCD PUMP. NG Replace ASCD pump. GI

E
1. Disconnect ASCD pump connector.
2. Measure resistance between ASCD
pump terminals q1 and q2 ,q
3 ,q4 . MA
Terminals Resistance Ω
MEL401GI q
4 Approx. 3 EM
q
1 q
2 Approx. 65
q
3 Approx. 65
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-225. LC

OK
H EC
ASCD pump and ASCD control unit.
If a self-diagnostic result has FE
already been accomplished,
check using the following table.
AT
CONSULT-II Check circuit
self-diagnostic ASCD control ASCD pump
result unit terminal terminal
POWER SUP-
PD
q
8 q
1
PLY-VALVE
VACUUM
q
9 q
4
PUMP FA
AIR VALVE q
10 q
2
RELEASE
q
14 q
3
VALVE
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-237
EXIT
(ASCD ACTUATOR/PUMP CHECK)
NG
CHECK VACUUM HOSE. E Repair or replace hose.
Check vacuum hose (between ASCD
actuator and ASCD pump) for breakage,
cracks or fracture.
OK
H
MEL402G NG
CHECK ASCD WIRE. E Repair or replace wire.
Check wire for improper installation, rust Refer to “ASCD Wire
formation or breaks. Adjustment” (EL-240).
OK
H
NG
CHECK ASCD ACTUATOR. E Replace ASCD actuator.
1. Disconnect vacuum hose from ASCD
actuator.
2. Apply −40 kPa (−0.41 kg/cm2, −5.8 psi)
vacuum to ASCD actuator with hand
vacuum pump.
MEL403G ASCD wire should move to pull throttle
drum.
3. Wait 10 seconds and check for
decrease in vacuum pressure.
Vacuum pressure decrease:
Less than 2.7 kPa (0.028 kg/cm2, 0.39
psi)
OK
H
NG
CHECK ASCD PUMP. E Replace ASCD pump.
1. Disconnect vacuum hose from ASCD
pump and ASCD pump connector.
2. If necessary remove ASCD pump.
3. Connect vacuum gauge to ASCD
pump.
4. Apply 12V direct current to ASCD
pump and check operation.
12V direct current sup-

ply terminals Operation
! @
Air valve q
2 Close
Release
q
3 Close
valve q
1
Vacuum
q
4 Operate
motor
MEL404GF A vacuum pressure of at least −35 kPa

(−0.36 kg/cm2, −5.1 psi) should be gen-
erated.
OK
H
ASCD actuator/pump is OK.
EL-238
EXIT

ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Check continuity between terminals by pushing each button.
Terminal GI
Button
q
1 q
3 q
2 q
4 q
5
q MA
SET/COAST q
RESUME/ACCEL q q
SEL366V
q E q
EM
CANCEL q
E q
LC
MAIN q q
EC
FE
AT
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH AND STOP LAMP SWITCH
PD
Continuity
Condition ASCD brake
switch
Stop lamp switch FA
When brake pedal is depressed No Yes
When brake pedal is released Yes No RA
Check each switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR
section, “BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET”. BR
CEL488
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ST

Check continuity between terminals by setting selector lever to
each position.
RS
Terminal
Selector lever position
q
3 q
7 q
9
q
BT
“N” q
“P” q q HA
CEL333-B Others
DIODE
I Diode is functioning properly if test results are as shown in the IDX
figure at left.
NOTE: Specifications may vary depending on the type of
tester. Before performing this inspection, be sure to
refer to the instruction manual for your tester.
q
1 q
2 Yes
CEL490
EL-239
EXIT
ASCD Wire Adjustment
CEL434
CAUTION:
I Be careful not to twist ASCD wire when removing it.
I Do not tense ASCD wire excessively during adjustment.
Adjust the tension of ASCD wire in the following manner.
1. Loosen lock nut and adjusting nut.
2. Make sure that accelerator wire is properly adjusted. (Refer to
FE section, “ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM”.)
3. Tighten adjusting nut until throttle drum just starts to move.
4. Loosen adjusting nut again 1/2 to 1 turn.
5. Tighten lock nut.
EL-240
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
Overall Description
OUTLINE
The In-Vehicle Multiplexing System, IVMS (LAN system), consists of a BCM (Body Control Module) and five
LCUs (Local Control Units). Some switches and electrical loads are connected to each LCU. Some electrical
systems are directly connected to the BCM. Control of each LCU, (which is provided by a switch and electri- GI
cal load), is accomplished by the BCM, via multiplex data lines (A-1, A-2 or A-3) connected between them.
BCM (Body Control Module) MA

The BCM, which is a master unit of the IVMS (LAN), consists of microprocessor, memory and communication
LSI sections and has communication and control functions. It receives data signals from the LCUs and sends EM
electrical load data signals to them.
LCU (Local Control Unit) LC

The LCUs, which are slave units of the BCM, have only a communication function and consist of communi-
cation LSI and input-output interface circuits. They receive data signals from the BCM, control the ON/OFF
operations of electrical loads and the sleep operation, as well as send switch signals to the BCM. EC
CONTROLLED SYSTEMS
FE
The IVMS controls several body-electrical systems. The systems included in the IVMS are as follows:
I Power window
I Power door lock AT
I Multi-remote control system
I Theft warning system
I Interior illumination control system PD
I Step lamp
I Illumination (Power window switch illumination)
I Auto drive positioner FA
I Auto light (Refer to “HEADLAMP”, EL-47.)
I Door open warning (Refer to “WARNING LAMPS”, EL-115.)
I Ignition key warning (Refer to “WARNING CHIME”, EL-132.) RA
I Light warning (Refer to “WARNING CHIME”, EL-132.)
I Seat belt warning (Refer to “WARNING CHIME”, EL-133.)
I Wiper amp. (Refer to “WIPER AND WASHER”, EL-142.) BR
I Rear window defogger timer (Refer to “REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER”, EL-163.)
I Trouble-diagnosing system
— with CONSULT-II ST
— ON BOARD
Also, IVMS has the “sleep/wake-up control” function. IVMS puts itself (the whole IVMS system) to sleep under
certain conditions to prevent unnecessary power consumption. Then, when a certain input is detected, the RS
system wakes itself up. For more detailed information, refer to “Sleep/Wake-up Control”.
BT
HA
IDX
EL-241
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
Component Parts Location
SEL934U
EL-242
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
System Diagram
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
SEL865W
EL-243
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
Sleep/Wake-up Control
SLEEP CONTROL
SEL465TA
“Sleep” control prevents unnecessary power consumption. After the following conditions are met, the BCM
suspends the communication between itself and all LCU’s. The whole IVMS is set in the “sleep” mode.
I Ignition switch “OFF”
I All electrical loads (in the IVMS) “OFF”
I Timer “OFF”
WAKE-UP CONTROL
SEL466T
As shown above, when the BCM detects a “wake-up” signal, it wakes up the whole system and starts com-
municating again. The “sleep” mode of all LCUs is now canceled, and the BCM returns to the normal control
mode. When any one of the following switches are turned ON, the “sleep” mode is canceled:
I Ignition key switch (Insert)* I Hood switch
I Ignition switch “ACC” or “ON” I Driver’s side door key cylinder switch (Unlock)
I Lighting switch (1st) I Passenger side door key cylinder switch
I Interior lamp switch (Unlock)
I Rear personal lamp switch I Trunk lid key cylinder switch (Unlock)
I Door switches (all doors) I Steering tilt switch
I Multi-remote controller I Steering telescopic switch
I Trunk room lamp switch I All switches combined or connected with LCU
* Also, when key is pulled out of ignition (ignition key switch is turned from ON to OFF), the “sleep” mode is
canceled.
Fail-safe System
Fail-safe system operates when the signal from LCU is judged to be malfunctioning by BCM. If LCU sends no
signal or an abnormal signal to BCM a certain number of times in succession, the IVMS is set in a fail-safe
condition. In the fail-safe condition, the electrical loads controlled by the switch on the questionable LCU will
be operated at fail-safe side.
EL-244
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
CONSULT-II
DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS APPLICATION
MODE
IVMS
WAKE-UP SELF-DI-
GI
Test item Diagnosed system COMM DATA ACTIVE WORK
DIAGNO- AGNOSTIC
DIAGNO- MONITOR TEST SUPPORT
SIS RESULTS
SIS MA
IVMS communication
IVMS-COMM CHECK X X
and wake-up function
EM
POWER WINDOW Power window X X
DOOR LOCK Power door lock X X X
LC
AUTO DRIVE POSI- Automatic drive posi-
X X X
TIONER tioner
WIPER Wiper and washer X X X EC
REAR DEFOGGER Rear window defogger X X
IGN KEY WARN ALM Warning chime X X FE
LIGHT WARN ALM Warning chime X X
SEAT BELT TIMER Warning chime X X AT
THEFT WARNING
Theft warning system X X
SYSTEM
STEP LAMP Step lamps X X
PD
ILLUM LAMP Illumination X X
MULTI-REMOTE CONT FA
Multi-remote control X X X
SYS
INTERIOR ILLUMINA- Interior illumination con-
X X RA
TION trol system
SUNROOF RELAY Sunroof X X
DOOR OPEN WARN-
BR
Warning lamps X X
ING
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Headlamp X X ST
X: Applicable
For diagnostic item in each control system, read the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
RS
DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS DESCRIPTION
MODE Description BT
Diagnosis of continuity in the communication line(s), and of the function of the communi-
IVMS COMM DIAGNOSIS cation interface between the body control module and the local control units, accom-
plished by transmitting a signal from the body control module to the local control units.
HA
Diagnosis of the “wake-up” function of local control units by having a technician input the
WAKE-UP DIAGNOSIS
switch data into the local control unit that is in the temporary “sleep” condition.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS —
DATA MONITOR
Displays data relative to the body control module (BCM) input signals and various control IDX
related data for each system.
Turns on/off actuators, relay and lamps according to the commands transmitted by the
ACTIVE TEST
CONSULT-II unit.
WORK SUPPORT for WIPER Wiper intermittent speed control by vehicle speed can be canceled or resumed.
WORK SUPPORT for MULT-REMOTE
ID code of multi-remote controller can be registered and erased.
CONT SYS
NOTE: When CONSULT-II diagnosis is operating, some systems under IVMS control do not operate.
EL-245
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
SEF046TA

PBR455D
SEL471W
6. Perform each diagnostic item according to the item application

chart as follows:
For further information, read the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual.
SEL472W
EL-246
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
IVMS COMMUNICATION DIAGNOSIS
1. Touch “IVMS-COMM DIAGNOSIS” in “IVMS-COMM CHECK”.
GI
MA
SEL473W EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL474W
AT
3. If no DTC is detected, inspection is end.
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL475W
If any problem code is displayed, repair/replace the system ST

according to the IVMS communication diagnosis results.
(Refer to EL-249.)
RS
BT
HA
SEL559W
4. Erase the diagnostic results memory.

a. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
b. Touch “IVMS”.
c. Touch “IVMS-COMM DIAGNOSIS” in “IVMS-COMM CHECK”. IDX
d. Touch “START” for “IVMS-COMM DIAGNOSIS”.
e. Touch “ERASE”.
EL-247
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
WAKE-UP DIAGNOSIS
1. Touch “WAKE-UP DIAGNOSIS” in “IVMS-COMM CHECK”.
2. Touch “START” for “WAKE-UP DIAGNOSIS”.
SEL476W
3. After touching “START”, turn ON switch designated on CON-

SULT-II display within 15 seconds.
SEL477W
4. If no DTC is detected, touch “NEXT” and perform wake-up

diagnosis for next LCU or touch “END”. (INSPECTION END)
SEL478W
If any problem is displayed, replace the LCU.
SEL479W
If “SW DATA UNMATCH” is displayed, touch “RETEST” and

perform wake-up diagnosis again.
SEL517W
EL-248
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
IVMS COMMUNICATION DIAGNOSES RESULTS LIST —
1
Number of malfunc- CONSULT-II diagno- On board diagnosis
Diagnostic item Expected cause Service procedure
tioning LCU sis result (Mode 1) code No.
IVMS system is in GI
— NO FAILURE 11 — —
good order
POWER WINDOW MA
C/U-DR 24
[COMM FAIL]
POWER WINDOW EM
C/U-AS 34
[COMM FAIL]
LC
POWER WINDOW
1. Malfunctioning
One C/U-RR 41 1. Replace LCU.*
LCU
[COMM FAIL] EC
POWER WINDOW
C/U-RL 44
[COMM FAIL] FE
POWER SEAT
C/U-DR 47
[COMM FAIL]
AT
Combination of
Communication mal- POWER WINDOW PD
functioning C/U-DR
[COMM FAIL]
POWER WINDOW FA
C/U-AS Combination of
[COMM FAIL] 24
POWER WINDOW 34 1. Malfunctioning RA
Two or more 1. Replace LCU.*
C/U-RR 41 LCU
[COMM FAIL] 44
POWER WINDOW 47 BR
C/U-RL
[COMM FAIL]
POWER SEAT ST
C/U-DR
[COMM FAIL]
RS
BCM 1. Malfunctioning
[COMM FAIL] 1. Replace BCM.*
24, 34, 41, 44 and BCM
All 2. Replace all
BCM 47 2. Malfunctioning all
LCUs.* BT
[COMM FAIL 2] LCUs
*: Before replacing BCM/LCU, clear the memory of diagnoses result and perform communication diagnoses again.
If the diagnoses result is still NG, replace BCM/LCU. HA
NOTE: When CONSULT-II indicates [PAST COMM FAIL] or [PAST NO RESPONSE], erase the memory and perform communication
diagnoses again.
To erase the memory, perform the procedure below.
Erase the memory by CONSULT-II or turn the ignition to “OFF” position and remove 7.5A fuse [No. 14 , located in the fuse
block (J/B)].
IDX
EL-249
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
2
Number of malfunc- CONSULT-II diagno- On board diagnosis Service procedure
Diagnostic item Expected cause
tioning LCU sis result (Mode 1) code No. (Reference page)
POWER WINDOW 1. Check power
C/U-DR 25 supply circuit of
[NO RESPONSE] 1. Power supply cir- the LCU in ques-
cuit for LCU tion. (EL-264)
POWER WINDOW 2. Check connector
C/U-AS 35 2. Poor connection connection of
[NO RESPONSE] at LCU connector LCU in question.
3. Check ground
POWER WINDOW
3. Ground circuit of circuit of the LCU
One C/U-RR 42
the LCU in question. (EL-
[NO RESPONSE]
263)
POWER WINDOW 4. Open circuit in 4. Check open cir-
C/U-RL 45 the data line cuit in the data
[NO RESPONSE] line between
5. Malfunctioning BCM and LCU in
POWER SEAT LCU question. (EL-
C/U-DR 48 265)
[NO RESPONSE] 5. Replace LCU.*
Combination of
POWER WINDOW
1. Check power
C/U-DR
supply circuit of
[NO RESPONSE] Combination of
the LCU in ques-
POWER WINDOW causes below
tion. (EL-264)
C/U-AS Combination of 1. Power supply cir-
2. Check connector
[NO RESPONSE] 25 cuit for LCU
connection of
Communication via POWER WINDOW 35
Two or more LCU in question.
data line not C/U-RR 42 2. Poor connection
3. Check open cir-
responded [NO RESPONSE] 45 at LCU connector
cuit in the data
POWER WINDOW 48
line between
C/U-RL 3. Open circuit in
BCM and LCU in
[NO RESPONSE] the data line
question. (EL-
POWER SEAT
265)
C/U-DR
[NO RESPONSE]
1. Short circuit in 1. Short circuit in
the data line the data line
between BCM
2. Poor connection and any LCU.
at BCM connec- (EL-265)
tor 2. Check connector
connection of
3. Open circuit in BCM.
the data line 3. Check open cir-
BCM/HARNESS 25, 35, 42, 45, 48
All between BCM cuit in the data
[COMM LINE] and 62
and all LCUs. line between
BCM and all
4. Malfunctioning LCUs. (EL-265)
BCM 4. Replace BCM.*
5. Disconnect each
5. Short circuit in LCUs one by one
the data line of to check whether
LCU internal cir- the other LCUs
cuit operate properly.
If the diagnoses result is still NG, replace BCM/LCU.
diagnoses again.
Erase the memory by CONSULT-II or turn the ignition to “OFF” position and remove 7.5A fuse [No. 14 , located in the fuse
block (J/B)].
EL-250
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
3
Number of malfunc- CONSULT-II diagno- On board diagnosis
Diagnostic item Expected cause Service procedure
tioning LCU sis result (Mode 1) code No.
POWER WINDOW GI
C/U-DR
[SLEEP]
POWER WINDOW MA
C/U-AS
[SLEEP]
POWER WINDOW
EM
1. Malfunctioning
One C/U-RR — 1. Replace LCU.*
LCU
[SLEEP]
POWER WINDOW
LC
Sleep control of
LCU is malfunction- C/U-RL
[SLEEP]
ing
POWER SEAT
EC
C/U-DR
[SLEEP]
FE
Combination of 1. Malfunctioning
— 1. Replace LCU.*
above results LCU
1. Malfunctioning
AT
Two or more 1. Replace BCM.*
BCM
All of above results — 2. Replace all
2. Malfunctioning all
LCUs
LCUs.* PD
If the diagnoses result is still NG, replace BCM/LCU. FA
diagnoses again.
Erase the memory by CONSULT-II or turn the ignition to “OFF” position and remove 7.5A fuse [No. 14 , located in the fuse RA
block (J/B)].
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-251
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
On board Diagnosis
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS INDICATOR LAMP
Front map lamps and step lamps (all seats) act as the indicators
for the on board diagnosis Mode I, II and III. Seat memory indica-
tor-1 and 2 act as the indicators for the on board diagnosis Mode
IV. These lamps blink simultaneously in response to diagnostic
results.
SEL598U
SEL071V
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION

Self-diagnostic results indicator lamp
Automatic Reference
Mode Function Step lamps
Interior lamp drive positioner page
(all seats)
indicator lamps
Diagnosing any abnormality or
IVMS commu- inability of communication
Mode I nication diag- between BCM and LCUs X X — EL-253
nosis (DATA LINES A-1, A-2 and
A-3).
Monitoring conditions of
Mode II Switch monitor switches connected to BCM X X — EL-255
and LCUs.
Power door
Mode III lock self-diag- — X X — EL-298
nosis
Automatic
Mode IV drive positioner — — — X EL-414
self-diagnosis
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
NOTE: I When on board diagnosis Mode I, II or III is operating, all systems under IVMS control do not oper-
ate.
I When on board diagnosis Mode IV is operating, automatic drive positioner does not operate.
I The step lamp of malfunctioning LCU does not blink.
EL-252
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
On board Diagnosis — Mode I (IVMS

communication diagnosis)
HOW TO PERFORM MODE I
Condition GI
I Ignition switch: OFF
I Lighting switch: OFF
I Rear window defogger switch: OFF MA
I Doors: Closed
I Interior lamp switch: AUTO
SEL567U I Driver side map lamp switch: OFF EM
I Passenger side map lamp switch: OFF
I Selector lever: “P” range
LC
H
Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC
H FE
Return ignition switch to “ACC” and press rear window defogger switch
more than 10 times during 10 seconds.
AT
H
Self-diagnostic results indicator lamps should turn on. PD
H
FA
Rear window defogger switch holds OFF.
H
RA
Turn ignition switch “ON” within 5 seconds after the indicator lamps turn on.
BR
H
Indicator lamp turn off.
ST
After a second
H
Mode I is performed. RS
H BT
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
or
Drive the vehicle more than 7 km/h (4 MPH). HA
H
DIAGNOSIS END*
*: Diagnosis ends after self-diagnostic results have been indicated for 10 min- IDX
utes if left unattended.
EL-253
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
On board Diagnosis — Mode I (IVMS
communication diagnosis) (Cont’d)
DESCRIPTION
In this mode, a malfunction code is indicated by the number of flashes from the front map lamps and step
lamps as shown below:
SEL471T
After indicator lamp turns on for 2 seconds then off for 2 seconds, it flashes [cycling ON (0.5 sec.)/OFF (0.5
sec.)] to indicate a malfunction code of the first digit. Then, 1 second after indicator lamp turns off, it again
flashes [cycling ON (0.5 sec.)/OFF (0.5 sec.)] to indicate a malfunction code of the second digit.
For example, the indicator lamp goes on and off for 0.5 seconds twice and after 1.0 seconds, it goes on and
off for 0.5 seconds four times. This indicates malfunction code “24”.
MALFUNCTION CODE TABLE

Code No. Malfunctioning LCU Detected items Diagnostic procedure
Refer to CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC CHART,
24 Malfunctioning communication
Driver door control unit “COMM FAIL” (EL-249).
(LCU01) Refer to CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC CHART,
25 No response from data line A-1
“NO RESPONSE” (EL-250).
Passenger door control “COMM FAIL” (EL-249).
unit (LCU02) Refer to CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC CHART,
Rear RH door control unit “COMM FAIL” (EL-249).
Rear LH door control unit “COMM FAIL” (EL-249).
Driver’s seat control unit “COMM FAIL” (EL-249).
11 No malfunction —
EL-254
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
On board Diagnosis — Mode II (Switch

monitor)
HOW TO PERFORM MODE II
Condition
GI
I Lighting switch: OFF
I Rear window defogger switch: OFF MA
I Doors: Closed
SEL567U I Driver side map lamp switch: OFF EM
LC
H
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
EC
H
Return ignition switch to “ACC” and press rear window defogger switch
FE
more than 10 times during 10 seconds.
AT
H
Self-diagnostic results indicator lamps should turn on.
PD
H
Keep rear window defogger switch pressed, and turn ignition switch “ON” FA
within 5 seconds after the indicator lamps turn on.
RA
H
Indicator lamps turn ON.
BR
H
Mode II can be performed. ST
H
RS
Turn each switch ON and OFF. Note that the indicator lamp and/or buzzer
goes on or off in response to switch position.
BT
H
or
HA
Drive the vehicle more than 7 km/h (4 MPH).
H
DIAGNOSIS END
IDX
EL-255
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
On board Diagnosis — Mode II (Switch
monitor) (Cont’d)
DESCRIPTION
In this mode, when BCM detects the input signal from a switch in IVMS as shown below, the detection is indi-
cated by the front map lamp and front step lamps with buzzer.
SEL960V
SWITCH MONITOR ITEM

I Lighting switch (1st) I Door unlock sensor
I Lighting switch (AUTO) LCU 02 I Passenger power window sub-switch (UP/
I Wiper switch (INT) DOWN)
I Wiper switch (WASH) I Door unlock sensor
I Door switch (driver’s side) LCU 03 I Power window sub-switch (Rear RH) (UP/
I Door switch (passenger side) DOWN)
I Door switch (Rear LH)
I Door switch (Rear RH) I Door unlock sensor
I Rear window defogger switch LCU 04 I Power window sub-switch (Rear LH) (UP/
I Detention switch DOWN)
I Driver’s side seat belt buckle switch I Slide switch (FR/
BCM
I Trunk room lamp switch RR)
I Hood switch I Reclining switch
I Trunk lid key cylinder switch (UNLOCK) Power seat switch (FR/RR)
LCU 05
I Steering tilt switch (UP/DOWN) (Driver’s side) I Front lifter switch
I Steering telescopic switch (FORWARD/ (UP/DOWN)
BACKWARD) I Rear lifter switch
I Auto drive positioner cancel switch (UP/DOWN)
I Seat memory switch-1
I Seat memory switch-2
I Seat set switch
I Multi remote controller switch
I Power window lock switch
I Power window main switches (UP/DOWN)
I Power window automatic switch
LCU 01
I Door lock & unlock switch (LOCK/
UNLOCK)
I Door unlock sensor
EL-256
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
Schematic
POWER SUPPLY, GROUND AND COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL030M
EL-257
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
Wiring Diagram — COMM —

POWER SUPPLY, GROUND AND COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS
TEL132M
EL-258
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
Wiring Diagram — COMM — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL133M
EL-259
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
TEL134M
EL-260
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL135M
EL-261
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
H
H
H
Yes No
SYMPTOM
BASIS
H H
E Repair/Replace according to Select inspection on the basis of F

the self-diagnostic results. each system and symptom.
(EL-249)
H H
NG
EL-253)
OK
H H
FINAL CHECK NG
system.
OK
H
CHECK OUT
NOTICE:
EL-262
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
Control unit Terminals Continuity
q56 - Ground
BCM
113 - Ground
LCU01, LCU02, LCU03
q
14 - Ground Yes
GI
and LCU04
q
14 - Ground
LCU05
q
15 - Ground MA
SEL893U EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL894U
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL895U
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-263
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
Control Ignition switch position
Terminals
unit OFF ACC ON START
104 - Ground
Battery voltage
105 - Ground
Approx. Approx.
q
60 - Ground Battery voltage
BCM 0V 0V
q
68 - Ground Approx. 0V Battery voltage
SEL096V Battery
q
55 - Ground Approx. 0V
voltage
LCU01,
LCU02,
LCU03 q
and
LCU04
LCU05 q
Note:
CONSULT-II (data monitor) may be used to check for the ignition
switch input (ACC, ON, START).
SEL596UA
SEL896U
EL-264
EXIT
IVMS (LAN)
DATA LINES CIRCUIT CHECK
Data lines open circuit check
NOTE: When checking data line circuit, disconnect BCM and all
LCU connectors.
1. Disconnect BCM and LCU connectors. GI
2. Check continuity between BCM and LCU terminals.
Control unit
Terminals
Continuity
MA
LCU BCM
LCU01 q
3 q
70
EM
LCU02 q
3 q
61
LCU03 q
3 q
70 Yes
LC
LCU04 q
3 q
61
LCU05 q
22 q
67
EC
FE
AT
SEL897UB
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL898U
Data lines short circuit check ST

1. Disconnect BCM and all LCU connectors.
2. Check continuity between BCM terminal and body ground.
RS
q
61 - Ground
q
67 - Ground No
BT
q
70 - Ground
HA
SEL899U
3. Check voltage between BCM terminal and body ground.

Terminals Voltage [V]
q
61 - Ground IDX
q
67 - Ground 0
q
70 - Ground
SEL900U
EL-265
EXIT
BCM (Body Control Module)
Schematic
TEL136M
EL-266
EXIT
BCM (Body Control Module)
Schematic (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL137M
EL-267
EXIT
LOCAL CONTROL UNITS (LCUs)
Schematic
DRIVER’S DOOR CONTROL UNIT (LCU01)
TEL138M
EL-268
EXIT
PASSENGER DOOR CONTROL UNIT (LCU02)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL139M
EL-269
EXIT
REAR RH DOOR CONTROL UNIT (LCU03)
TEL825
REAR LH DOOR CONTROL UNIT (LCU04)
TEL141M
EL-270
EXIT
DRIVER’S SEAT CONTROL UNIT (LCU05)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL827
EL-271
EXIT
POWER WINDOW — IVMS

Location
SEL866W
EL-272
EXIT
System Description
OUTLINE
Power window system consists of
I a BCM (Body Control Module)
I four LCUs (Local Control Module) GI
I four power window regulators
BCM is connected to each LCU via DATA LINE A-1 or A-2 and LCUs supply power and ground to each power
window regulator. MA
When ignition switch is in the “ON” position, power window will be operated depending on power window sub/
main switch (which is combined with each LCU) condition.
EM
OPERATIVE CONDITION
I Power windows can be raised or lowered with each sub-switch or the power window main switch located LC
on the driver’s door trim when ignition key is in the “ON” position and power window lock switch on the
driver’s door trim is unlocked.
I When power window lock switch is locked, no windows can be raised or lowered except for driver side EC
window.
I When ignition key is in the “ON” position, to fully open/close the front windows, press down/pull completely
on the automatic switch (main switch/front sub-switch) and release it; it needs not be held. The window FE
will automatically open/close all the way. To stop the window, pull up/press down then release the switch.
Delayed power operation AT

When the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position, the power window will still operate for up to approxi-
mately 45 seconds unless the driver side or passenger side door is opened.
(Power window timer)
PD
Interruption detection function FA

Driver’s door control unit (LCU01)/passenger door control unit (LCU02) monitor the power window regulator
motor operation and the power window position (full closed or other) for front power window by the signals
from encoder and limit switch in front power window regulator (driver’s side/passenger side). RA
When driver’s door control unit (LCU01)/passenger door control unit (LCU02) detect interruption during the
following close operation in the each door,
I automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the “ON” position BR
I automatic close operation during power window timer operation
driver’s door control unit (LCU01)/passenger door control unit (LCU02) control each power window regulator
motor for open and the power window will be lowered about 150 mm (5.91 in). ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-273
EXIT
Schematic
TEL142M
EL-274
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL143M
EL-275
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Cont’d)
TEL144M
EL-276
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL145M
EL-277
EXIT
TEL146M
EL-278
EXIT
CONSULT-II
GI
MA
SEF046TA EM
EC
FE
PBR455D
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL471W
6. Touch “POWER WINDOW”. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL472W
I DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are available for the

power window.
IDX
SEL480W
EL-279
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
H
H
Yes No
SYMPTOM
BASIS
H H
E Repair/Replace according to Perform diagnostic procedure F

the self-diagnostic results. according to the symptom chart
(EL-249) on the next page.
H H
NG
EL-253)
OK
H H
FINAL CHECK NG
system.
OK
H
CHECK OUT
NOTICE:
EL-280
EXIT
PRELIMINARY CHECK
CHECK-IN
H
NG (All) SYMPTOM 1 GI
E
NG (One or more) Do power windows operate using

Does power window operate? E MA
.............................................................. NG SYMPTOM 2
Both sub and main switch E
..............................................................
OK Sub switch
NG SYMPTOM 3 EM
E
..............................................................
NG SYMPTOM 4
Main switch E LC
NG (Except for driver side)
E
H SYMPTOM 5 EC
Does power window lock switch on NG
main switch operate properly? E
FE
H OK
Does power window auto operation NG SYMPTOM 6
function? E
AT
SYMPTOM CHART PD
PROCEDURE Diagnostic procedure
REFERENCE PAGE EL-282 EL-282 EL-283 EL-283 EL-284 EL-285 EL-286 EL-287
FA
(Power window automatic switch check)

(Power window main switch check)
RA
(Power window lock switch check)
(Power window sub-switch check)

(Ignition switch ON signal check)
(Encoder and limit switch check)

(Power window regulator check)
BR
(Front door switch check)

ST
Procedure 1
Procedure 2
Procedure 3
Procedure 4
Procedure 5
Procedure 6
Procedure 7
Procedure 8
RS
SYMPTOM
1 All power window do not operate. X
BT
One or more of the power windows
2 do not operate by turning either sub X HA
or main switch.
One or more of the sub-switches do
3 X
not function.
One or more of the main switches
4 X
on driver’s door trim do not function.
Power window lock switch on main IDX
5 X
switch does not operate properly.
Driver power window automatic
6 X X
operation does not function.
Delayed power timer does not oper-
— X X
ate properly.
EL-281
EXIT
(Ignition switch ON signal check)
CHECK IGNITION SWITCH ON SIGNAL. NG Check the following.

E
IGN ON SW ON BCM
SEL499W
IGN ON SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER

68
and ground.
ON Approx. 12
ACC or OFF 0

SEL556UB
OK
H
Ignition switch ON signal is OK.
(Power window lock switch check)
CHECK POWER WINDOW LOCK NG Replace LCU01.
E
SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL.
CONSULT-II
See “MAIN SW LOCK” in DATA MONI-

TOR mode.
“MAIN SW LOCK” should change from
“OFF” to “ON” when pushing power
SEL518W
window lock switch.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
Check power window lock switch opera-

tion in Switch monitor (Mode II) mode.
OK
H
Power window lock switch is OK.
EL-282
EXIT
[Power window main switch (Driver side, Passenger side, Rear
LH, RH) check]
NG
CHECK DRIVER’S DOOR TRIM POWER E Replace LCU01.
WINDOW MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIG- GI
NAL.
CONSULT-II
MA
See “MAIN SW UP or DOWN” in DATA
MONITOR mode.
“MAIN SW UP or DOWN” should
SEL519W change from “OFF” to “ON” when EM
pushing power window main switches.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD LC
Check power window main switch opera-
(Refer to On board Diagnosis, EL-255.) EC
OK
H
Power window main switch is OK.
FE
AT
[Power window sub-switch (Passenger side, Rear LH, RH)
PD
check]
CHECK POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH NG Replace LCU for malfunc- FA
E
INPUT SIGNAL. tioning portion.
CONSULT-II -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I Passenger: LCU02
RA
See “P/W SW UP or DOWN” in DATA I Rear LH: LCU04
MONITOR mode. I Rear RH: LCU03
“P/W SW UP or DOWN” should change
BR
SEL520W
from “OFF” to “ON” when each sub-
switch is turned ON.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ST
ON BOARD
Check power window sub-switch operation

RS
in Switch monitor (Mode II) mode.
BT
OK
H
Power window sub-switch is OK. HA
IDX
EL-283
EXIT
(Power window regulator check)
OK
POWER WINDOW REGULATOR ACTIVE E Power window regulator is
TEST. OK.
CONSULT-II
See “P/W MOTOR” in ACTIVE TEST

mode.
Perform operation shown on display.
Power window motor should operate.
SEL521W NOTE: If CONSULT-II is not available,
start with diagnostic procedure .
NG
H
NG
CHECK LCU OUTPUT SIGNAL TO E Replace LCU for malfunc-
POWER WINDOW REGULATOR. tioning portion.
Check voltage between LCU connector
terminals q
11 or q
18 and ground.
Terminals
Operation Voltage
! @
Up q
11 Ground Battery
SEL568UA Down q
18 Ground voltage
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-275, 277 or

278.
OK
H
NG
CHECK POWER WINDOW REGULATOR E Replace power window
MOTOR. regulator motor.
1. Disconnect power window regulator
motor connector.
2. Apply 12V DC direct current to motor
and check operation.
Terminals
Operation
! @
q
1 q
3 Upward
Front
q
3 q
1 Downward
q
1 q
2 Downward
Rear
q
2 q
1 Upward
OK
H
power window switch and power window
regulator motor.
SEL867W
EL-284
EXIT
(Power window automatic switch check)
CHECK POWER WINDOW AUTO NG Replace LCU for malfunc-
E
SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. tioning portion.
CONSULT-II I Driver: LCU01 GI
I Passenger: LCU02
See “P/W SW DR-AUT/AS-AUT” and
“MAIN SW AS-AUT” in DATA MONITOR
MA
mode.
“P/W SW DR-AUT/AS-AUT” and “MAIN
SEL949W
SW AS-AUT” should change from “ON”
EM
to “OFF” when completely pushing in
or pulling out each power window
switch.
LC
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
EC
Check power window switch auto opera-
tion in switch monitor (Mode II) mode.
FE
OK
H AT
Check encoder and limit switch. (Refer to
EL-287.)
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-285
EXIT
CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH INPUT OK Door switch is OK.

E
SIGNAL.
CONSULT-II
See “DOOR SW” in DATA MONITOR

mode.
When door is open:
SEL524W DOOR SW ON
When door is closed:
DOOR SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
Check front door switches in Switch moni-

tor (Mode II) mode.
NG
SEL914U
H
CHECK DOOR SWITCH. NG Replace door switch.
E
1. Disconnect door switch connector.
2. Check continuity between terminal and
switch body ground.
Terminals Condition Continuity

Front door q1 - Pressed No
switch Ground Released Yes
OK
H
I Door switch ground condition
I Harness for open or short between door
switch and BCM
EL-286
EXIT
(Encoder and limit switch check)
NG
CHECK DOOR WINDOW SLIDE E Remove obstacles or
MECHANISM repair door window slide
Check the following. mechanism. GI
- Obstacles in window, glass molding, etc.
- Worn or deformed glass molding
- Door sash tilted too far inward or out-
ward MA
- Door window regulator
OK
SEL868W
H
EM
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO LIMIT E Replace LCU for malfunc-
SWITCH tioning portion.
1. Disconnect driver side/front passenger LC
side power window regulator connec-
tors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. EC
3. Check voltage between LCU01/LCU02
connectors terminal q 4 and ground.
FE
OK
H
OK
CHECK LIMIT SWITCH OPERATION E CHECK ENCODER AT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Measure voltage between
2. Connect driver side/front passenger LCU01/LCU02 connectors
side power window regulator connec- terminal q10 and ground
tors. with oscilloscope when PD
3. Turn ignition switch ON. power window is in auto-
4. Check voltage between LCU01/LCU02 matic closing operation.
connectors terminal q 4 and ground dur- If check result is NG,
ing power window closing operation. replace power window FA
regulator for malfunctioning
Terminal No. Condition Voltage (DCV)
portion.
Approx. 15 mm If check result is OK,
(0.59 in) below replace LCU for malfunc-
RA
the full closed Approx. 5
q
4 tioning portion.
position to full
closed position
Other positions Approx. 0 BR
SEL869W
NG
H
RESET LIMIT SWITCH
NG
Replace power window
ST
E
Reset limit switch. Refer to BT section. regulator for malfunctioning
Then check voltage between LCU01/ portion.
LCU02 connectors terminal q 4 and ground RS
during power window closing operation at
least ten times.
Terminal No. Condition Voltage (DCV) BT
Approx. 15 mm
(0.59 in) below
the full closed Approx. 5
q
4
position to full HA
closed position
Other positions Approx. 0
OK
H
NG
CHECK ENCODER E Replace power window IDX
Measure voltage between LCU01/LCU02 regulator for malfunctioning
connectors terminal q
10 and ground with portion.
oscilloscope when power window is in
automatic closing operation.
OK
H
Replace LCU for malfunctioning portion.
EL-287
EXIT
POWER DOOR LOCK — IVMS

Location
SEL870W
EL-288
EXIT
System Description
I to key switch terminal q 3 . GI
Power is supplied to BCM terminal q 69 through key switch terminal q
4 when key switch is in ON position (key
is inserted in the ignition key cylinder).
BCM is connected to LCU01, LCU02, LCU03 and LCU04 as DATA LINE A-1 or A-2. MA
When door switch is in OPEN position, ground is supplied
I to BCM terminal q 32 or q37
I through front LH or RH door switch terminal q 1 .
EM
When door is unlocked, ground is supplied
I to each door LCU terminal q 5
I from terminal q 2 of each door unlock sensor.
LC
When the door is locked with the key, ground is supplied
I to LCU01 or LCU02 terminal q 1 EC
I from terminal q 3 of the key cylinder switch LH or
I from terminal q 1 of the key cylinder switch RH
I through body grounds M14 and M47 . FE
When the door is unlocked with the key, ground is supplied
I to BCM terminal q 31 or q27
I from terminal q 1 of the key cylinder switch LH or AT
I from terminal q 3 of the key cylinder switch RH
I through body grounds M14 and M47 .
When lock/unlock signal is sent to BCM or LCU, BCM sends a lock/unlock signal to LCUs via DATA LINE A-1 PD
or A-2. LCUs then supply power and ground to each door lock actuator.
OPERATION FA
I The lock & unlock switch (SW) on driver’s door trim can lock and unlock all doors.
I With the lock knob on front LH or RH door set to “LOCK”, all doors are locked. (Signals from front door
unlock sensor) RA
I With the door key inserted in the key cylinder on front LH or RH door, turning it to “LOCK”, will lock all
doors; turning it to “UNLOCK” once unlocks the corresponding door; turning it to “UNLOCK” again within
5 seconds after the first unlock operation unlocks all of the other doors. (Signals from front door key cyl- BR
inder switch)
However, if the ignition key is in the ignition key cylinder and one or more of the front doors are open, setting ST
the lock & unlock switch, lock knob, or the door key to “LOCK” locks the doors once but then immediately
unlocks them. (Combination signals from key switch, front LH or RH door switch and front LH or RH door
unlock sensor) — (KEY REMINDER DOOR SYSTEM) RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-289
EXIT
Schematic
TEL148M
EL-290
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL149M
EL-291
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
TEL150M
EL-292
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL151M
EL-293
EXIT
TEL152M
EL-294
EXIT
CONSULT-II
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to Data link connector.
GI
MA
SEF046TA EM
EC
FE
PBR455D
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL471W
6. Touch “DOOR LOCK”. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL472W
I DATA MONITOR, ACTIVE TEST, and SELF-DIAGNOSIS are

available for the power door lock.
IDX
SEL481W
EL-295
EXIT
HOW TO PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
1. Choose “DOOR LOCK” in SELECT TEST ITEM.
2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” of SELECT DIAG MODE.
SEL482W
4. Start self-diagnosis on all door motors. Lock and unlock all

doors by operating door motors automatically.
SEL483W
I When no malfunction is detected.
SEL484W
I When malfunction is detected.

A summary of diagnostic results is given in the following chart.
SEL560W
EL-296
EXIT
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT LIST
Diagnostic result Explanation Diagnostic procedure Reference page
The circuit for the driver side
DOOR LOCK MOTOR-DR door lock actuator/unlock sen-
sor is malfunctioning. GI
The circuit for the passenger Procedure 5
DOOR LOCK MOTOR-AS side door lock actuator/unlock (Door unlock sensor check) EL-307 MA
sensor is malfunctioning.
The circuit for the rear RH side
DOOR LOCK MOTOR-RR/RH door lock actuator/unlock sen- Procedure 6 EL-308 EM
sor is malfunctioning. (Door lock actuator check)
The circuit for the rear LH side

DOOR LOCK MOTOR-RR/LH door lock actuator/unlock sen-
LC
sor is malfunctioning.
NO DTC IS DETECTED/
No malfunction in the above
EC
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE — —
items
REQUIRED.
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-297
EXIT
On board Diagnosis — Mode III (Power door

lock operation)
HOW TO PERFORM MODE III
Condition
I Lighting switch: 1st
I Rear window defogger switch: OFF
I Doors: Closed
SEL567U I Driver side map lamp switch: OFF
H
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
H
Return ignition switch to “ACC” and press rear window defogger switch more
than 10 times during 10 seconds.
H
Self-diagnostic results indicator lamps should turn on.
H
Rear window defogger switch holds off.
H
Turn ignition switch “ON” within 5 seconds after the indicator lamps turn on.
H
Indicator lamps turn off.
After a second
H
Mode III is performed.
H
H
DIAGNOSIS END*1 (Be sure to turn off the lighting switch.)
*1: Diagnosis ends after self-diagnostic results have been indicated for 10
minutes if left unattended.
EL-298
EXIT
On board Diagnosis — Mode III (Power door
lock operation) (Cont’d)
DESCRIPTION
In this mode, a malfunction code is indicated by the number of flashes from the front map lamps and step
lamps as shown below:
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL472T
After indicator lamp turns ON for 2 seconds and then turns OFF, it flashes to indicate a malfunction code. EC
For example, the indicator lamp goes on and off for 0.5 seconds three times. This indicates malfunction code
“3”.
MALFUNCTION CODE TABLE FE
Code No. Detected items Diagnostic procedure Reference page
1 Driver door lock actuator/unlock sensor AT
Procedure 5 (Door unlock sensor check) EL-307
2 Passenger door lock actuator/unlock sensor
3 Rear RH door lock actuator/unlock sensor PD
Procedure 6 (Door lock actuator check) EL-308
4 Rear LH door lock actuator/unlock sensor
9 No malfunction in the above items — — FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-299
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
H
H
Yes No
SYMPTOM
BASIS
H H

H H
NG
EL-253)
OK
H H
FINAL CHECK NG
system.
OK
H
CHECK OUT
NOTICE:
EL-300
EXIT
SYMPTOM CHART
PROCEDURE Self-diagnosis Diagnostic procedure —
REFERENCE PAGE EL-296 EL-298 EL-302 EL-303 EL-304 EL-305 EL-307 EL-308 EL-248
(Door key cylinder switch check)

GI
(Lock & unlock switch check)
(Door unlock sensor check)
(Door lock actuator check)

MA
(Door switch check)

On board diagnosis
Wake-up diagnosis
(Key switch check)
EM
CONSULT-II
Procedure 1
Procedure 2
Procedure 3
Procedure 4
Procedure 5
Procedure 6
(Mode III)
LC
SYMPTOM
Key reminder door system does not
operate properly.
X X X X X X EC
Specific door lock actuator does not
X X X X
operate. FE
Power door lock does not operate
X
with door lock & unlock switch on X X X
power window main switch.
(LCU01) AT
Power door lock does not operate X
with front door key cylinder opera- X X X (LCU01, PD
tion. LCU02)
X
Power door lock does not operate FA
X X X (LCU01,
with front door lock knob switch.
LCU02)
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-301
EXIT
CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH INPUT OK Door switch is OK.

E
SIGNAL.
CONSULT-II

mode.
When door is open:
SEL524W DOOR SW ON
DOOR SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
Check front door switches in Switch moni-

tor (Mode II) mode.
NG
SEL914U
H
E
2. Check continuity between terminal and
switch body ground.

OK
H
I Door switch ground condition
switch and BCM
EL-302
EXIT
[Key switch (Insert) check]
CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. OK Ignition key switch is OK.

E
CONSULT-II
GI
See “IGN KEY SW” in DATA MONITOR
mode.
When key is inserted in ignition key cylin-
MA
der:
IGN KEY SW ON
SEL532W EM
When key is removed from ignition key
cylinder:
IGN KEY SW OFF LC
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER
EC
69
and ground.
Condition of key
FE
Voltage V
switch
Key is inserted. Approx. 12
SEL916V
Key is removed. 0 AT
NG PD
H
NG
CHECK KEY SWITCH.
E
Replace key switch FA
1. Disconnect key switch connector. (insert).
2. Check continuity between key switch
(insert) terminals q 3 and q 4 when key RA
is inserted in ignition key cylinder and
key is removed from ignition key cylin-
der. BR
SEL907U
Condition Continuity
Key is inserted. Yes ST
Key is removed. No
OK RS
H
I 10A fuse [No. 28 , located in fuse block BT
(J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between key
switch and fuse HA
and key switch
IDX
EL-303
EXIT
(Lock & unlock switch check)
OK
CHECK DOOR LOCK & UNLOCK E Lock & unlock switch is
SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. OK.
CONSULT-II
See “DOOR LK SW-LK or UN” in DATA

MONITOR mode.
When lock & unlock switch is turned to
lock:
DOOR LK SW-LK ON
SEL561W When lock & unlock switch is turned to
unlock:
DOOR LK SW-UN ON
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
Check door lock & unlock switch operation

in Switch monitor (Mode II) mode. (Refer
to On board Diagnosis, EL-255.)
NG
H
Replace driver door control unit (LCU01).
EL-304
EXIT
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4-(1)
(Door key cylinder lock switch check)
CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH OK Door key cylinder switch
E
INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK SIGNAL). (lock) is OK.
CONSULT-II
GI
See “KEY CYL LK” in DATA MONITOR

mode.
MA
“KEY CYL LK” should be “ON” when
key inserted in door key cylinder was
SEL537W
turned to lock.
EM
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER
LC
Check voltage between LCU01/02 termi-
nal q
1 and ground.
EC
Key position Voltage V
Neutral/Unlock Approx. 5
Lock 0
FE
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-292 or 293.

AT
NG
H
PD
CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER NG Replace door key cylinder
E
SWITCH. switch.
1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch
FA
connector.
2. Check continuity between door key cyl-
RA
inder switch terminals.
Terminals Key position Continuity

Neutral/ BR
SEL871W LH: q
3 -q
2 No
Unlock
RH: q
1 -q
2
Lock Yes
ST
OK RS
H
I Door key cylinder switch ground circuit BT
I Harness for open or short between LCU
and door key cylinder switch
HA
IDX
SEL909U
EL-305
EXIT
(Door key cylinder unlock switch check)

E
INPUT SIGNAL (UNLOCK SIGNAL). (unlock) is OK.
CONSULT-II
See “KEY CYL UN” in DATA MONITOR

mode.
“KEY CYL UN” should be “ON” when
SEL538W key inserted in door key cylinder was
turned to unlock.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER
Check voltage between BCM terminals q

27
or q
31 and ground.
Terminals Key Voltage

! @ position V
Neutral/ Approx.
LH q
31 Ground Lock 12
Unlock 0
Neutral/ Approx.
RH q
27 Ground Lock 12
Unlock 0
NG
H
E
SWITCH. switch.
SEL952V
connector.
Terminals Key position Continuity

LH: q
1 -q
2 Neutral/Lock No
RH: q
3 -q
2 Unlock Yes
OK
H
I Door key cylinder switch ground circuit
SEL913U
EL-306
EXIT
CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR OK Door unlock sensor is OK.
E
INPUT SIGNAL.
CONSULT-II GI
See “LOCK SIG” in DATA MONITOR
mode. MA
When door is locked:
LOCK SIG LOCK
SEL525W When door is unlocked: EM
LOCK SIG UNLK
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
LC
Check door lock knob operation in Switch
monitor (Mode II) mode.
(Refer to On board Diagnosis, EL-255.) EC
294. FE
NG
SEL025V H AT
NG
CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR. Replace door lock actuator.
E
1. Disconnect door lock actuator connec-
tor. PD
2. Check continuity between door lock
actuator (door unlock sensor) terminals
q2 and q 4 . FA
Locked No RA
Unlocked Yes
OK BR
H
I Harness for open or short between LCU ST
and door unlock sensor
I Ground circuit for door unlock sensor
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-307
EXIT
(Door lock actuator check)
CHECK DOOR LOCK MOTOR OPERA- OK Door lock actuator is OK.

E
TION.
CONSULT-II
See “DR LOCK MTR” in ACTIVE TEST

mode.
Door lock motor should operate.
SEL526W
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
Perform On board Diagnosis Mode III.

(Refer to EL-298.)
Door lock motor should operate.
NG
H
Check voltage between LCU connector NG Replace LCU for malfunc-
E
terminals q
17 or q
12 and body ground. tioning portion.
SEL572UB
Door lock Terminals
Voltage
operation ! @
Lock q
12 Ground Battery
Unlock q
17 Ground voltage

294.
OK
H
CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR. NG Replace door lock actuator.
SEL024V E
1. Disconnect door lock actuator.
2. Apply 12V DC direct current to door
lock actuator and check operation.
Door lock Terminals

operation ! @
Lock q
3 q
1
Unlock q
1 q
3
OK
H
door lock actuator and LCU.
EL-308
EXIT
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM — IVMS

Location
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
SEL944W
EL-309
EXIT
System Description
BCM is connected to LCU01, LCU02, LCU03 and LCU04 as DATA LINE A-1 or A-2.
I to key switch terminal q 3 .
When the key switch is in ON position (key is inserted in ignition key cylinder), power is supplied
I through key switch terminal q 4
When any of the four door switches is in OPEN position, ground is supplied
I to BCM terminal q 32 (q 37 , q
33 , q
28 )
I through door switches body grounds.
When a door is unlocked, each door LCU terminal q 5 receives a ground signal from terminal q 2 of each door
unlock sensor.
Remote controller signal input
I through window antenna
The multi-remote control system controls operation of the
I power door lock
I trunk lid opener
I panic alarm
I hazard and horn reminder
OPERATING PROCEDURE
BCM can receive signals from remote controller when key switch is in OFF position (key is not in cylinder). It
then sends the signals to LCUs as DATA LINE A-1 or A-2.
Power door lock operation

When BCM receives a LOCK signal from remote controller, BCM will then send a LOCK signal
I from its terminals q70 and q61 (DATA LINES A-1 and A-2)
I to each door control unit (LCU) terminal q 3 .
When an UNLOCK signal is sent from remote controller once, driver’s door will be unlocked.
Then, if an UNLOCK signal is sent from remote controller again within 3 seconds, all other doors will be
unlocked. For detailed description, refer to “POWER DOOR LOCK — IVMS” (EL-289).
Hazard and horn reminder

I to multi-remote control relay terminals q 1 ,q3 and q 6 and
I through 15A fuse (No. 64 , located in the fusible link and fuse box)
I to horn relay terminal q 1 .
When BCM receives a LOCK or UNLOCK signal from remote controller, ground is supplied
I to multi-remote control relay terminal q 2
I through BCM terminal q 6 and
I to horn relay terminal q 2
I through BCM terminal q 41 .
Multi-remote control relay and horn relay are now energized, and hazard warning lamps flash and horn sounds
as a reminder.)
Hazard and horn reminder has a horn chirp mode and a non-horn chirp mode.
Operating function of hazard and horn reminder
Horn chirp mode Non-horn chirp mode
Hazard warning lamps Horn Hazard warning lamps Horn
LOCK Twice Once Twice —
UNLOCK Once — — —
EL-310
EXIT
How to change hazard and horn reminder
Horn chirp mode of hazard and horn reminder can be activated or deactivated by pressing LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons of remote controller for more than 2 seconds at the same time. At this time, hazard warning lamps
and horn turn on and off as follows.
Hazard warning lamps flash three times. GI
Horn chirp mode E Non-horn chirp mode
F
Hazard warning lamps flash once and horn sounds once. MA
Trunk lid opener operation EM

I through 20A fuse [No. 26 , located in the fuse block (J/B)] LC
I to trunk lid opener actuator terminal q 1 .
When a TRUNK OPEN signal is sent from remote controller without the ignition key inserted in the ignition
key cylinder, if the trunk lid opener cancel switch is in the ON position, ground is supplied EC
I to trunk lid opener actuator terminal q 2
I through trunk lid cancel switch terminals q 1 and q 2 , and
I through BCM terminal 109 . FE
Then power and ground are supplied, trunk lid opener actuator opens trunk lid.
Panic alarm operation
Power is supplied at all times AT
I to theft warning horn relay terminal q 1 and theft warning lamp relay terminal q 1 .
Theft warning horn relay terminal q 2 and theft warning lamp relay terminal q2 are connected to BCM termi- PD
nal q
15 .
Multi-remote control system activates horn and headlamps intermittently when an ALARM signal is sent from
remote controller to multi-remote control system without the ignition key inserted in the ignition key cylinder. FA
For detailed description, refer to “THEFT WARNING SYSTEM — IVMS” (EL-372).
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-311
EXIT
Schematic
TEL153M
EL-312
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — MULTI —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL154M
EL-313
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — MULTI — (Cont’d)
TEL155M
EL-314
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL156M
EL-315
EXIT
TEL157M
EL-316
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL158M
EL-317
EXIT
TEL159M
EL-318
EXIT
CONSULT-II
GI
MA
SEF046TA EM
EC
FE
PBR455D
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL471W
6. Touch “MULTI-REMOTE CONT SYS”. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL485W
I WORK SUPPORT, DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are

available for the multi-remote control system.
IDX
SEL486W
EL-319
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
H
H
Yes No
SYMPTOM
BASIS
H H

H H
NG
EL-253)
OK
H H
FINAL CHECK NG
system.
OK
H
CHECK OUT
NOTICE:
EL-320
EXIT
Note: I Always check remote controller battery before replacing remote controller.
I The panic alarm operation and trunk open operation of multi-remote control system does not activate
with the ignition key inserted in the ignition key cylinder.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM
GI
I All functions of remote control system do not function.
NG
CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY. Replace battery.
I Refer to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (EL-322).
E MA
OK
H
Without CONSULT-II EM
Enter the identity (ID) code of a different or new remote controller. E Go to q
A below.
(Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure, EL-330.)
H
With CONSULT-II LC
No
Can the new ID code be entered? E Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
(EL-322).
H
Yes EC
Replace with the originally used multi-remote controller.
q
A FE
H
No
Can the new ID code be entered? E Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 (EL-322) AT
and DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 (EL-323).
Yes
H
Replace with the originally used multi-remote controller. PD
I Multi-remote controller does not operate a part of the functions. FA

NG
CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER INPUT SIGNAL. E Replace the multi-remote controller.
I Check remote controller input signal using CONSULT-II (DATA MONI- RA
TOR) or On-board diagnosis (Mode II, refer to EL-255).
OK
H
q
No BR
1 DOOR LOCK OR UNLOCK DOES NOT FUNCTION. E Check “POWER DOOR LOCK” system.
(Pressing Unlock button once normally unlocks front LH door; press-
ing it twice then unlocks all of the other doors.)
I Check if power door lock system functions with door lock & unlock ST
switch or door lock knob switch.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ No Check “Hazard indicator lamp” circuit.
q 2 HAZARD INDICATOR DOES NOT FLASH TWICE WHEN PRESS- E
ING LOCK BUTTON OF REMOTE CONTROLLER. RS
I Check if hazard indicator flashes with hazard switch.
If check is OK, Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4, EL-325.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ No
q Check “Horn” circuit.
3 HORN CHIRP DOES NOT ACTIVATE WHEN PRESSING LOCK E BT
BUTTON OF REMOTE CONTROLLER. (With horn chirp mode)
I Check if horn sounds with horn switch.
If check is OK, Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5, EL-326.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ No HA
q 4 PANIC ALARM (HORN AND HEADLAMP) DOES NOT ACTIVATE E Check “THEFT WARNING” system.
WHEN PANIC ALARM BUTTON IS CONTINUOUSLY PRESSED
FOR MORE THAN 1.5 SECONDS.
I Check if horn and headlamps activate when test is conducted as fol-
lows:
1. Open the driver’s window.
2. Close all doors, hood and trunk lid.
3. Lock doors with the key. Yes
Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 IDX
4. Wait for about 30 seconds to make sure that the lighted “SECU- E
(EL-327).
RITY” warning lamp begins to blink.
5. Open the hood with hood lock opener, then panic alarm should
activate. (The alarm will stop when door is unlocked with the key.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
q 5 TRUNK LID DOES NOT OPEN WHEN TRUNK OPENER BUTTON
IS PRESSED. No Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7
E
I Check if trunk lid opens with trunk lid opener switch. (EL-328).
EL-321
EXIT
CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER BAT-

TERY.
Remove battery and measure voltage
across battery positive and negative
terminals, ! and @.
Measuring terminal Standard

! @ value
SEL672U Battery posi- Battery nega-
tive terminal tive terminal 2.5 - 3.0V
! @
Note:
Remote controller does not function if battery is not set cor-
rectly.
CHECK ANTENNA FEEDER CABLE. NG Replace feeder cable.

E
1. Disconnect feeder cable connector
from BCM.
2. Remove rear pillar garnish and discon-
nect feeder cable connector from rear
window glass antenna. (Feeder cable
connector is the one at bottom left.)
3. Check continuity between the feeder
SEL072V cable connectors.
4. Check continuity between the feeder
cable connector terminal and ground.
OK
H
CHECK REAR WINDOW GLASS NG Repair glass window
E
ANTENNA. antenna. Refer to REAR
1. Remove rear pillar garnish and discon- WINDOW DEFOGGER
nect feeder cable connector from rear “Filament Repair”.
SEL097V window glass antenna.
2. Check continuity between glass
antenna terminal and end of glass
antenna.
Note: When checking continuity, wrap tin
foil around top of the probe. Then press
the foil against the wire with your finger.
OK
H
Antenna of multi-remote control is OK.
SEL122RA
EL-322
EXIT
NG
CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. E
CONSULT-II I Door switch
See “DOOR SW” in DATA MONITOR ponents Inspection” (EL- GI
mode. 329).
When door is open: I Door switch ground con-
DOOR SW ON dition (Front door) or MA
When door is closed: door switch ground cir-
DOOR SW OFF cuit (Rear door)
SEL527W ON BOARD short between BCM and EM
door switch
Check all doors switches in Switch moni-
tor (Mode II) mode. LC

EC
OK
H
NG
CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR E
Check the following. FE
INPUT SIGNAL. I Door unlock sensor
CONSULT-II Refer to “Electrical Com-
ponents Inspection” (EL-
SEL525W See “LOCK SIG” in DATA MONITOR 329). AT
mode. I Door unlock sensor
When door is locked: ground circuit
LOCK SIG LOCK I Harness for open or PD
When door is unlocked: short between LCU and
LOCK SIG UNLK unlock sensor
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
FA
monitor (Mode II) mode. RA
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-316, 317 or BR

SEL505W
318.
OK
H ST
NG
CHECK IGNITION SWITCH “ACC” CIR- E
CUIT. I 7.5A fuse [No. 23 ,
CONSULT-II located in fuse block
(J/B)]
RS
See “IGN ACC SW” in DATA MONITOR I Harness for open or
mode. short between BCM and
When ignition switch is ACC or ON: fuse BT
IGN ACC SW ON
IGN ACC SW OFF HA
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
SEL257V TESTER

60
and ground.
Condition of ignition
Voltage V IDX
switch
ACC or ON Approx. 12
OFF 0
H OK
q
A
EL-323
EXIT
q
A
H
E
CONSULT-II I 10A fuse [No. 28 ,
located in fuse block
See “IGN KEY SW” in DATA MONITOR (J/B)]
mode. I Key switch
When key is inserted in ignition key cylin- Refer to “Electrical Com-
der: ponents Inspection” (EL-
SEL532W
IGN KEY SW ON 329).
cylinder: short between key switch
IGN KEY SW OFF and fuse
TESTER short between BCM and
key switch
69
and ground.
Condition Voltage V
Key is removed 0
SEL916V
OK
H
Check operation parts in multi-remote
control system for function.
EL-324
EXIT
CHECK HAZARD INDICATOR OPERA- Yes Hazard indicator is OK.
E
TION.
CONSULT-II
GI
See “HAZARD” in ACTIVE TEST mode.
Hazard warning lamp should illuminate.
MA
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
SEL528W EM
1. Disconnect control unit connector.
2. Apply ground to BCM terminal q 6 .
Does hazard indicator illuminate?
LC

EC
No
H
Check multi-remote control relay. NG Replace. FE
E
OK
SEL258V
H AT
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR MULTI- NG Check the following.
E
REMOTE CONTROL RELAY. I 10A fuse [No. 13 ,
1. Disconnect multi-remote control relay located in fuse block PD
connector. (J/B)]
2. Check voltage between terminal q 1 and I Harness for open or
ground. short between multi- FA
Battery voltage should exist. remote control relay and
fuse
OK RA
H
CHECK MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL NG Check harness for open or
RELAY CIRCUIT.
E
short.
BR
SEL747UC
1. Disconnect multi-remote control relay
connector.
2. Check voltage between terminals q 3
ST
and q5 .
RS
and q7 .
BT
OK
H
Check harness for open or short between HA
BCM and multi-remote control relay.
SEL748UB
IDX
EL-325
EXIT
CHECK HORN CHIRP OPERATION. Yes Horn chirp operation is OK.
E
CONSULT-II
See “HORN” in ACTIVE TEST mode. Per-

form operation shown on display.
Horn should sound.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
SEL945W 1. Disconnect control unit connector.

2. Apply ground to BCM terminal q 41 .
Does horn sound?
No
H
BCM and horn relay.
SEL258VB
EL-326
EXIT
CHECK MULTI-REMOTE CONTROLLER NG Replace multi-remote con-
E
OPERATION. troller.
CONSULT-II
GI
See “TRUNK BTN-CON” in DATA MONI-
TOR mode.
“TRUNK BTN-CON” should be “ON”
MA
when trunk lid opener button on multi-
remote controller is continuously
SEL530W
pressed for more than 1 second. Note: EM
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- Trunk lid opener cancel switch
ON BOARD should be in ON (activate)
position to perform DIAGNOS-
LC
Check trunk open signal from multi-remote TIC PROCEDURE 6.
controller in Switch monitor (Mode II)
mode.
EC
(Refer to On board Diagnosis, EL-255).
OK FE
H
CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER CIRCUIT. OK Trunk opener operation is
SEL529W CONSULT-II
E
OK.
AT
See “TRUNK OPEN S/V” in ACTIVE

TEST mode.
PD
Trunk lid opener should operate.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
FA
TESTER
RA
Check voltage between BCM connector
terminal 109 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist. BR
SEL917U
NG ST
H
BCM and trunk lid opener cancel switch.
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-327
EXIT
NG
CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUA- E
Replace trunk lid opener
TOR. actuator.
1. Disconnect trunk lid opener actuator
connector.
2. Check to see if trunk lid opens when
12V DC is applied across trunk lid
opener actuator connector terminals q1
and q2 .
SEL578UA
OK
H
I 7.5A fuse [No. 26 , located in fuse block
(J/B)]
I Trunk lid opener cancel switch
I Harness for open or short between fuse
and trunk lid opener actuator
I Harness for open or short between trunk
lid opener actuator and cancel switch
lid opener cancel switch and BCM
EL-328
EXIT

DOOR SWITCHES
Check continuity between terminals and switch body ground when
door switch is pushed and released. GI
Door switch is MA
No
pushed.
Front door switch q
1 - Ground
Door switch is
SEL914U
Yes EM
released.
Door switch is
No
pushed.
Rear door
q
1 -q
2 LC
switches Door switch is
Yes
released.
EC
FE
SEL021V
AT
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR (Door unlock sensor)
Check continuity between terminals when door is locked and
PD
unlocked.
Terminal No. Condition Continuity FA
Door is locked. No
q
4 -q
2
Door is unlocked. Yes RA
BR
SEL025V
KEY SWITCH (Insert) ST

Check continuity between terminals when key is inserted in ignition
key cylinder and key is removed from ignition key cylinder.
RS
Key is inserted. Yes
q
3 -q
4 BT
Key is removed. No
HA
SEL907U
IDX
EL-329
EXIT
ID Code Entry Procedure

PROCEDURE 1 (Without CONSULT-II)
NOTE:
I If a remote controller is lost, the ID code of the lost remote controller must be erased to prevent
unauthorized use. A specific ID code can be erased with CONSULT-II. However, when the ID code
of a lost remote controller is not known, all controller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes
are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new remote controllers must be re-registered.
To erase all ID codes in memory, register one ID code (remote controller) four times. After all ID
codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new remote controllers must be re-regis-
tered.
I When registering an additional remote controller, the existing ID codes in memory may or may not
be erased. If four ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional code is registered, only the
oldest code is erased. If less than four ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional ID code
is registered, the new ID code is added and no ID codes are erased.
Close all doors and lock driver side door.
H
Insert and remove the key from the ignition more than six times within 10 seconds.
(The hazard warning lamp will flash twice.)
H
Turn ignition key switch to “ACC” position.
H
Push any button on the new remote controller once. (The hazard warning lamp will
flash twice.)
At this time, the new ID code is entered and original (previous) ID codes are F
erased.
H
Do you want to enter any additional remote controller ID codes?
A maximum four ID codes may be entered. Any attempt to enter more will be
ignored.
No Yes
H
Unlock and lock with the driver’s lock
knob switch.
H
Open driver side door and remove the key from ignition key cylinder.
H
END.
After entering the identity (ID) code, check the operation of multi-remote con-
trol system.
EL-330
EXIT
ID Code Entry Procedure (Cont’d)
NOTE
I If you need to activate more than two additional new remote controllers, repeat the procedure
“Additional ID code entry” for each new remote controller.
I Entry of maximum four ID codes is allowed. When more than four ID codes are entered, the old-
est ID code will be erased.
I Even if the ID code that is already in the memory is input, the same ID code can be entered. The GI
code is counted as an additional code.
MA
EM
LC
EC
PROCEDURE 2 (With CONSULT-II)
NOTE:
If a remote controller is lost, the ID code of the lost remote controller must be erased to prevent unau- FE
thorized use. When the ID code of a lost remote controller is not known, all controller ID codes should
be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new remote controllers
must be re-registered. AT
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to Data link connector. PD
FA
RA
BR
SEF046TA
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. ST

RS
BT
HA
PBR455D
IDX
SEL471W
EL-331
EXIT
ID Code Entry Procedure (Cont’d)
6. Touch “MULTI-REMOTE CONT SYS”.
SEL485W
7. Touch “WORK SUPPORT”.
SEL486W
8. The items are shown on the figure at left can be set up.
I “REMO CONT ID CONFIR”
I Use this mode to confirm if a remote controller ID code is reg-
istered or not.
I “REMOTE CONT ID REG”
Use this mode to register a remote controller ID code.
NOTE:
Register the ID code when remote controller or smart entrance
control unit is replaced, or when additional remote controller
is required.
SEL946W I “REMO CONT ID ERASUR”
Use this mode to erase a remote controller ID code.
EL-332
EXIT
INTERIOR ILLUMINATION CONTROL — IVMS
System Description
OUTLINE
Interior illumination system turns interior illumination lamps on and off while operating the timer. The system
operates by means of key switch, lighting switch, each door switch, driver side door unlock sensor, and
switches of each lamp. This system is controlled by BCM. GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
SEL073VA
FA
TIMER OPERATION
The timer controls the lighting time of the interior illumination lamps via operation of the driver side door switch, RA
key switch, driver side unlock sensor, and ignition key switch.
Switch Operation
BR
With driver side door closed and key removed from ignition key cylinder, the timer oper-
Driver side door unlock sensor ates when driver side door unlock signal is received. The timer cancels itself when driver
side door lock signal is received. ST
Driver side door switch The timer operates when driver side door is opened and then closed.
Ignition key switch The timer cancels itself when ignition key is in ACC or ON position while it is operating.
RS
With driver side door closed, when key is removed from ignition key cylinder, the timer
Key switch (Insert)
operates.
BT
I For details of turning on/off function of each of the lamps, see the following charts.
BATTERY SAVER HA
When the main illumination switch and personal lamp switch are in AUTO position with ignition key in OFF or
ACC position, if interior illumination lamps are turned on by door switch open signal and remain lit for more
than 30 minutes, the lamps turn off automatically.
IDX
EL-333
EXIT
TURN ON/OFF MODE OF DRIVER SIDE DOOR OPEN/CLOSE
SEL638UB
Note: Illumination lamp lighting is available in both 100% and 35% luminosity modes.
EL-334
EXIT
TURN ON/OFF MODE OF PASSENGER SIDE DOOR OPEN/CLOSE
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
SEL639UA
FA
TURN ON/OFF MODE OF REAR DOOR OPEN/CLOSE RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
SEL641U
EL-335
EXIT
TURN ON/OFF MODE OF EACH SWITCH CONDITION
SEL640U
EL-336
EXIT
Schematic
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL850
EL-337
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —
TEL160M
EL-338
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL161M
EL-339
EXIT
TEL162M
EL-340
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL163M
EL-341
EXIT
TEL164M
EL-342
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL165M
EL-343
EXIT
TEL166M
EL-344
EXIT
CONSULT-II
GI
MA
SEF046TA EM
EC
FE
PBR455D
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL471W
6. Touch “INTERIOR ILLUMINATION”. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL485W
I DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are available for the inte-
rior illumination.
IDX
SEL480W
EL-345
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
H
H
Yes No
SYMPTOM
BASIS
H H

H H
NG
EL-253)
OK
H H
FINAL CHECK NG
system.
OK
H
CHECK OUT
NOTICE:
EL-346
EXIT
WORK FLOW
CHECK SYSTEM OPERATION.
Check illumination lamp control operation. OK
E System is OK.
(Refer to System Description.)
NG
GI
H
CHECK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. MA
Check the following switches input signal.
I Door unlock sensor (Driver side) .......................................................................... Refer to EL-348.
I Door switch ............................................................................................................ Refer to EL-349. EM
I Lighting switch (1st) ............................................................................................... Refer to EL-350. NG
E Repair or replace.
I Key switch (insert) ................................................................................................. Refer to EL-351.
I Ignition key switch (ACC and IGN) ....................................................................... Refer to EL-352. LC
I Interior lamp switch ............................................................................................... Refer to EL-353.
I Personal lamp switch ............................................................................................ Refer to EL-353.
EC
OK
H
CHECK ILLUMINATION LAMPS. FE
Check the following illumination lamps.
(Refer to EL-354.)
I Console lamp AT
NG
I Map lamp E Repair or replace.
I Footwell lamp
I Personal lamp PD
I Ignition key hole illumination
OK FA
H
Check system again.
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-347
EXIT
DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK (DRIVER SIDE)
E
INPUT SIGNAL. (DRIVER SIDE)
CONSULT-II
See “LOCK SIG-DR” in DATA MONITOR

mode.
“LOCK SIG-DR” should be “LOCK”
when lock knob was locked.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
SEL531W
Check driver’s side door lock knob opera-

NG
H
CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR. NG Replace door lock actuator.
E
tor.
SEL026V
q2 and q 4 .
Locked No
Unlocked Yes
OK
H
EL-348
EXIT
DOOR SWITCH CHECK
CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. OK Door switch is OK.
E
CONSULT-II
See “DOOR SW” in DATA MONITOR GI

mode.
When door is open:
DOOR SW ON
MA
DOOR SW OFF
SEL527W
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
EM
ON BOARD
Check all doors switches in Switch moni-

LC
tor (Mode II) mode.
EC
NG FE
H
NG
SEL914U
CHECK DOOR SWITCH.
E
Replace door switch. AT
2. Check continuity between terminals or
switch body ground. PD
Front door q1 - Pressed No FA
Rear door Pressed No
q
1 -q
switch
2
Released Yes RA
OK BR
H
SEL021V
I Door switch ground condition (Front
ST
door) or door switch ground circuit (Rear
door)
RS
switch and BCM
BT
HA
IDX
EL-349
EXIT
LIGHTING SWITCH (1ST) CHECK
CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIG- NG Check the following.

E
NAL. I 7.5A fuse [No. 22 ,
(J/B)]
See “HD/LMP 1ST SW” in DATA MONI- I Tail lamp relay
TOR mode. I Harness for open or
When lighting switch is in 1ST or 2ND: short between fuse and
SEL500W
HD/LMP 1ST SW ON BCM
When lighting switch is OFF: I Harness for open or
HD/LMP 1ST SW OFF short between tail lamp
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- relay and fuse
ON BOARD
Check lighting switch in Switch monitor

(Mode II) mode.
OK
H
Lighting switch (1st) is OK.
EL-350
EXIT
KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK
CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. OK Key switch is OK.

E
CONSULT-II
GI
See “IGN KEY SW” in DATA MONITOR
mode.
When key is inserted in ignition key cylin- MA
der:
IGN KEY SW ON
SEL532W When key is removed from ignition key EM
cylinder:
IGN KEY SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- LC
TESTER

69 EC
and ground.
Condition of key
FE
Voltage V
switch
SEL916V
Key is removed 0 AT
NG
PD
H FA
CHECK KEY SWITCH. NG Replace key switch
E
1. Disconnect key switch connector. (insert).
2. Check continuity between key switch RA
(insert) terminals q 3 and q 4 when key
is inserted in ignition key cylinder and
key is removed from ignition key cylin- BR
SEL907U der.
Condition Continuity ST
Key is inserted Yes
Key is removed No
RS
OK
H BT
I 10A fuse [No. 28 , located in fuse block
(J/B)] HA
I Harness for open or short between key
switch and fuse
and key switch
IDX
EL-351
EXIT
IGNITION KEY SWITCH (ACC AND IGN) INPUT SIGNAL
CHECK
CHECK ACC AND IGN INPUT SIGNAL. NG Check the following.
E
See “IGN ON SW” and “IGN ACC SW” in (J/B)]
DATA MONITOR mode. I 7.5A fuse [No. 32 ,
When ignition switch is ON: located in the fuse block
IGN ON SW ON (J/B)]
IGN ACC SW ON I Harness for open or
SEL533W
When ignition switch is ACC: short between fuse and
IGN ON SW OFF BCM
IGN ACC SW ON
IGN ON SW OFF
IGN ACC SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER

60
or q
68 and ground.
SEL642UA Termi- Ignition switch position

nals OFF ACC ON START
q60 - Approx. Approx.
Battery voltage
Ground 0V 0V
q68 -
Approx. 0V Battery voltage
Ground
OK
H
ACC and IGN input signal is OK.
EL-352
EXIT
INTERIOR LAMP AND PERSONAL LAMP SWITCH
CHECK
CHECK LAMP SWITCHES INPUT SIG- NG Check the following.

NAL.
E
I Lamp switch GI
1. Disconnect BCM connector. I Lamp switch ground cir-
2. Check continuity between BCM termi- cuit
nals and ground. I Harness for open or
MA
Note: To perform this procedure, turn both short between BCM and
map lamp switches to OFF. lamp switch
SEL643UA EM
Continu-
Switch Terminals Condition
ity
LC
ON Yes
q21 -
Ground AUTO/
No
Interior lamp
OFF EC
OFF Yes
q25 -
Ground AUTO/
ON
No FE
Rear per- FULL Yes
q45 -
sonal lamp
LH/RH
Ground HALF/
No
AT
AUTO

PD
OK
H
Lamp switches are OK.
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-353
EXIT
ILLUMINATION LAMP CHECK
Check illumination lamp bulb. NG Replace bulb.
E
OK
H
Check 10A fuse [No. 27 located in the NG Replace fuse.
E
fuse block (J/B)].
OK
H
CHECK ILLUMINATION LAMP OPERA- NG Check the following.
SEL534W E
TION. I Harness for open or
1. Turn each lamp switch to the following short between fuse and
conditions. illumination lamp
Map lamp LH/RH switch: OFF I Harness for open or
Interior lamp switch: AUTO short between illumina-
Rear personal lamp LH/RH switch: OFF tion lamp and BCM
CONSULT-II
See “FR PERSONAL LAMP (Front map

lamp)”, “FOOT LAMP (Footwell lamp)”,
“CONSOLE LAMP”, “RR PERSONAL
LAMP” or “KEY RING ILLUM” in ACTIVE
SEL644UA
TEST mode.
Illumination lamp should illuminate.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------

3. Apply ground to each terminal of BCM
connector.
Does illumination lamp turn on?
Illumination lamp Terminals
Console lamp q
2
Footwell lamp q
13
Front map lamp LH q

40
Front map lamp RH q

44
Rear personal lamp RH q

47
Rear personal lamp LH q

51
Ignition key hole illumi-

110
nation

342.
OK
H
Illumination lamps and circuit is OK.
EL-354
EXIT
STEP LAMP — IVMS

Locations
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
SEL942W
EL-355
EXIT
STEP LAMP — IVMS
System Description
I to BCM terminal 105
I to all step lamps terminal q 1
I through 10A fuse [No. 27 , located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Ground is supplied to terminal q14 of LCU01 and LCU02 through body grounds M14 and M47 .
Ground is also supplied to terminal q
14 of LCU03 and LCU04 through body grounds B105 and B118 or B22 and
B35 .
OPERATING PROCEDURE
When any door switch is in OPEN position, ground is supplied
I to BCM terminal q 32 , q
37 , q
33 , or q
28
I through driver side, passenger side, rear LH or RH door switch.
Then BCM sends a signal to the LCU to turn on step lamp. With ground supplied, step lamp turns on.
EL-356
EXIT
STEP LAMP — IVMS
Schematic
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL858
EL-357
EXIT
STEP LAMP — IVMS
Wiring Diagram — STEP/L —
TEL167M
EL-358
EXIT
STEP LAMP — IVMS
Wiring Diagram — STEP/L — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL168M
EL-359
EXIT
STEP LAMP — IVMS
TEL169M
EL-360
EXIT
STEP LAMP — IVMS
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL170M
EL-361
EXIT
STEP LAMP — IVMS
TEL171M
EL-362
EXIT
STEP LAMP — IVMS
CONSULT-II
GI
MA
SEF046TA EM
EC
FE
PBR455D
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL471W
6. Touch “STEP LAMP”. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL487W
I DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are available for the step
lamp.
IDX
SEL480W
EL-363
EXIT
STEP LAMP — IVMS
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
H
H
Yes No
SYMPTOM
BASIS
H H
E Repair/Replace according to Perform diagnostic procedure on F

the self-diagnostic results. next page.
(EL-249)
H H
NG
EL-253)
OK
H H
FINAL CHECK NG
system.
OK
H
CHECK OUT
NOTICE:
EL-364
EXIT
STEP LAMP — IVMS
SYMPTOM: Step lamp does not illuminate/does not go off
when door is opened/closed.
CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. NG Check the following.

CONSULT-II
E
I Door switch
GI
I Door switch ground con-
See “DOOR SW” in DATA MONITOR dition (Front door) or
mode. door switch ground cir-
MA
When door is open: cuit (Rear door)
DOOR SW ON I Harness for open or
SEL527W EM
When door is closed: short between door
DOOR SW OFF switch and BCM
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- LC
ON BOARD
Check all doors switches in Switch moni- EC

tor (Mode II) mode.
FE
OK
SEL673UD
H AT
Check step lamp bulb. NG Replace bulb.
E
OK PD
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
1. Disconnect step lamp connector.
E
I 10A fuse [No. 27 ,
FA
2. Check voltage between step lamp ter- located in the fuse block
minal q1 and ground. (J/B)]
Battery voltage should exist. I Harness for open or
RA
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-361 or 362. short between fuse and
step lamp
OK BR
H
step lamp and LCU. ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-365
EXIT
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION — IVMS
System Description
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION
I to tail lamp relay terminals q 1 and q 6
I through 15A fuse [No. 63 , located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box].
Ground is supplied
I to the lighting switch terminal q 5
When the lighting switch is turned to 1ST or 2ND position, ground is supplied
BCM is connected to LCU03 and LCU04 as DATA LINE A-1 or A-2.
Rear power window switch illuminations are combined with LCUs.
When lighting switch is turned to 1ST or 2ND position, BCM sends a signal to turn on rear power window switch
illuminations.
EL-366
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — SW/ILL —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL172M
EL-367
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — SW/ILL — (Cont’d)
TEL173M
EL-368
EXIT
CONSULT-II
GI
MA
SEF046TA EM
EC
FE
PBR455D
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL471W
6. Touch “ILLUM LAMP”. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL487W
I DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are available for the rear
power window switch illumination.
IDX
SEL480W
EL-369
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
H
H
Yes No
F
H H
NG
E Repair/Replace according to the Check lighting switch input sig- E
self-diagnostic results. (EL-249) nal using CONSULT-II in “Data
Monitor” mode or On board
diagnosis Mode II (switch moni-
tor). (Refer to On board REPAIR/
Diagnosis, EL-255.) REPLACE
OK
H H
NG NG
IVMS COMMUNICATION DIAG- Check power window switch illu- E
NOSIS (EL-247 or EL-253) mination bulb using CONSULT-II
in “Active Test” mode.
OK
OK
F
H H
FINAL CHECK NG
OK
H
CHECK OUT
NOTICE:
EL-370
EXIT
THEFT WARNING SYSTEM — IVMS
Component Parts Harness Connector Location
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
SEL948W
EL-371
EXIT
System Description
DESCRIPTION
1. Setting the theft warning system
Disarmed phase
When the vehicle is being driven or when doors or trunk lid is open, the theft warning system is set in the
disarmed phase on the assumption that the owner is inside or near the vehicle.
Pre-armed phase and armed phase
The theft warning system turns into the “pre-armed” phase when hood, trunk lid and all doors are closed and
locked by key or multi-remote controller. (The security indicator lamp illuminates for 30 seconds.)
After about 30 seconds, the system automatically shifts into the “armed” phase (the system is set).
2. Canceling the set theft warning system
When the following (a) or (b) operation is performed, the armed phase is canceled.
(a) Unlock the doors with the key or multi-remote controller.
(b) Open the trunk lid with the key or multi-remote controller. When the trunk lid is closed after opening the
trunk lid with the key or multi-remote controller, the system returns to the armed phase.
3. Activating the alarm operation of the theft warning system
Make sure the system is in the armed phase.
When the following operation (a), (b) or (c) is performed, the system sounds the horns and flashes the head-
lamps for about 50 seconds.
(a) Engine hood or any door is opened before unlocking door with key or multi-remote controller.
(b) Door is unlocked without using key or multi-remote controller.
(c) Trunk lid is opened without using key or multi-remote controller.
POWER SUPPLY
I to security indicator lamp terminal q 1 .
I to BCM terminal 105 .
With the ignition switch in the ON position, power is supplied
INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM

The operation of the theft warning system is controlled by the doors, hood and trunk lid.
To activate the theft warning system, BCM must receive signals indicating the doors, hood and trunk lid are
closed and the doors are locked.
When a door is open, BCM terminal q 28 , q
32 , q
33 or q
37 receives a ground signal from each door switch.
When a door is unlocked, each door LCU terminal q 5 receives a ground signal from terminal q
2 of each door
unlock sensor.
When the hood is open, BCM terminal q 20 receives a ground signal
I from terminal q 1 of the hood switch
When the trunk lid is open, BCM terminal q 19 receives a ground signal
I from terminal q 1 of the trunk room lamp switch
I through body grounds T12 , B22 and B35 .
When the doors are locked with key or multi-remote controller and none of the described conditions exist, the
theft warning system will automatically shift to armed phase.
EL-372
EXIT
THEFT WARNING SYSTEM ACTIVATION (With key or remote controller used to lock doors)
If the key is used to lock doors, LCU01 or LCU02 terminal q 1 receives a ground signal
I from terminal q 3 of the front door key cylinder switch (Driver side) or
I from terminal q 1 of the front door key cylinder switch (Passenger side)
I through body grounds M14 and M47 GI
If this signal or lock signal from remote controller is received by BCM, the theft warning system will activate
automatically.
Once the theft warning system has been activated, BCM terminal q 65 supplies ground to terminal q
2 of the MA
security indicator lamp.
The security lamp will illuminate for approximately 30 seconds and then blink.
Now the theft warning system is in armed phase. EM
THEFT WARNING SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION
The theft warning system is triggered by LC
I opening a door
I opening the trunk lid
I opening the hood EC
I unlocking door without using the key or multi-remote controller.
Once the theft warning system is in armed phase, if BCM receives a ground signal at terminal q 28 , q
32 , q
33 , q
37
(door switch), q19 (trunk room lamp switch) or q20 (hood switch), or LCU receives a ground signal at terminal FE
q5 (door unlock sensor) the theft warning system will be triggered. The headlamps flash and the horn sounds
intermittently.
Power is supplied at all times AT
I through 7.5A fuse (No. 14 , located in fuse and fusible link box)
I to theft warning lamp relay terminal q 1 and
I to theft warning horn relay terminal q 1 . PD
When the theft warning system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
I from terminal q 15 of BCM
I to theft warning lamp relay terminal q 2 and FA
I to theft warning horn relay terminal q 2 .
The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after 2 or 3 minutes but will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again.
RA
THEFT WARNING SYSTEM DEACTIVATION BR

To deactivate the theft warning system, a door or the trunk lid must be unlocked with the key or remote con-
troller.
When the key is used to unlock a door, BCM terminal q 31 or q27 receives a ground signal ST
I from terminal q 1 of the front door key cylinder switch (Driver side) or
I from terminal q 3 of the front door key cylinder switch (Passenger side).
When the key is used to unlock the trunk lid, BCM terminal q 29 receives a ground signal from terminal q
1 of RS
the trunk lid key cylinder switch.
When the BCM receives either one of these signals or unlock signal from remote controller, the theft warning
system is deactivated. (Disarmed phase) BT
PANIC ALARM OPERATION
Multi-remote control system may or may not operate theft warning system (horn and headlamps) as required.
HA
When the multi-remote control system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently.
I from BCM terminal q 15
I to theft warning lamp relay terminal q 2 and
I to theft warning horn relay terminal q 2 .
The headlamp flashes and the horn sounds intermittently. IDX
The alarm automatically turns off after 30 seconds or when smart entrance control unit receives any signal
from multi-remote controller.
EL-373
EXIT
Schematic
TEL174M
EL-374
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — THEFT —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL175M
EL-375
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — THEFT — (Cont’d)
TEL176M
EL-376
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL177M
EL-377
EXIT
TEL178M
EL-378
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL179M
EL-379
EXIT
TEL180M
EL-380
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL181M
EL-381
EXIT
TEL182M
EL-382
EXIT
CONSULT-II
GI
MA
SEF046TA EM
EC
FE
PBR455D
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL471W
6. Touch “THEFT WARNING SYSTEM”. ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL487W
I DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are available for the theft
warning system.
IDX
SEL480W
EL-383
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
H
H
Yes No
SYMPTOM
BASIS
H H

H H
NG
EL-253)
OK
H H
FINAL CHECK NG
system.
OK
H
CHECK OUT
NOTICE:
EL-384
EXIT
PRECAUTIONS FOR INFINITI COMMUNICATOR (IVCS)
The purpose of INFINITI Communicator is to increase security for the vehicle owner by providing a conve-
nient way to contact the most appropriate emergency assistance provider during an emergency.
Improper operation of the system may result in a police response.
The theft warning system also activates INFINITI Communicator. For details, refer to INFINITI Communicator GI
(IVCS), EL-462.
PRELIMINARY CHECK MA
The system operation is canceled by turning ignition switch to “ACC” at any step between START and ARMED
in the following flow chart.
NOTE: Before performing PRELIMINARY CHECK, disconnect IVCS unit connectors not to operate EM
INFINITI communicator.
System phase START LC
Note: Before starting operation check, open front windows.
H EC
E DISARMED Turn ignition switch “OFF” and pull out key from key cylinder.
Close all doors, hood and trunk lid.
FE
H H
PRE-ARMED Lock doors using key or multi-remote controller. NG SYMPTOM 1
E AT
“SECURITY” indicator lamp will illuminate for 30 seconds.
H OK
H
ARMED Security indicator lamp will start to blink.
PD
H H
ALARM Unlock any door without key or multi-remote controller, or open
FA
hood or trunk without key.
............................................................................................................
NG RA
The theft warning system will be in alarm phase. E SYMPTOM 2
............................................................................................................
Alarm (horn and headlamp) will operate. NG
E SYMPTOM 3 BR
H OK
H
DISARMED NG
Unlock any door or open trunk lid using key or multi-remote con-
E
SYMPTOM 4 ST
troller.
Alarm (horn and headlamp) will stop.
OK
RS
H
System is OK.
BT
After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart on next page.
HA
IDX
EL-385
*1: Make sure the system is in the armed phase.
X : Applicable
SYMPTOM CHART
Symptom numbers in the symptom chart correspond with those of preliminary check.
Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform preliminary check, EL-385.
SYMPTOM
REFERENCE PAGE
PROCEDURE
4
1
does not turn “ON”.
Theft warning indicator
Theft warning Theft warning *1 Theft warning Theft warning
system cannot be alarm does not system does not system cannot
canceled by .... activate. alarm when ... be set by ....
trol
Multi-remote con-
Trunk lid key
Door outside key
Headlamp alarm
Horn alarm
remote controller
using key or multi-
unlocked without
Any door is
opened.
Any door is
trol
Multi-remote con-
Door outside key
All items

Preliminary check EL-385
X
—
Power supply circuit check for BCM EL-264

Diagnostic Procedure 1
(Door, hood and trunk room EL-387
X
lamp switch check)
EL-386
Diagnostic Procedure 2 EL-390
X
(Security indicator lamp check)
Diagnostic Procedure 3
Diagnostic procedure
X EL-391
X

X
X
(Door key cylinder switch check)

X
(Trunk lid key cylinder switch check)

X
(Theft warning horn alarm check)

X
(Headlamp alarm check)
Check “MULTI-REMOTE EL-321

X
CONTROL” system.
—
(LCU01,
(LCU01,
(LCU01,
LCU02)
LCU02)
02, 03,
04)
WAKE-UP DIAGNOSES EL-248

X
EXIT
EXIT
(Door switch check)
CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. OK Door switch is OK, go to

E
CONSULT-II hood switch check.
GI
mode.
When door is open:
MA
DOOR SW ON
SEL527W EM
DOOR SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD LC
Check all door switches in Switch monitor
(Mode II) mode. EC
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-376. FE

NG
SEL914U
H AT
E
2. Check continuity between terminals or PD
switch body ground.

FA
Rear door Pressed No RA
q
1 -q
2
switch Released Yes
BR
SEL021V OK
H
Check the following. ST
I Door switch ground condition (Front
door) or door switch ground circuit (Rear
door) RS
switch and BCM
BT
HA
IDX
EL-387
EXIT
(Hood switch check)
CHECK HOOD SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL. OK Hood switch is OK, go to
E
CONSULT-II trunk room lamp switch
check.
See “HOOD SWITCH” in DATA MONITOR
mode.
When hood is open:
HOOD SWITCH ON
When hood is closed:
SEL535W HOOD SWITCH OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
Check hood switch in Switch monitor

(Mode II) mode. (Refer to On board
Diagnosis, EL-255.)
NG
H
Check hood switch and hood fitting condi- NG Adjust installation of hood
SEL929U E
tion. switch or hood.
OK
H
CHECK HOOD SWITCH. NG Replace hood switch.
E
1. Disconnect hood switch connector.
2. Check continuity between hood switch
terminals.

Pushed No
q
1 -q
2
Released Yes
OK
H
I Hood switch ground circuit
and hood switch
EL-388
EXIT
(Trunk room lamp switch check)
CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH OK Trunk room lamp switch is
E
INPUT SIGNAL. OK.
CONSULT-II GI
See “TRUNK SWITCH” in DATA MONI-
TOR mode. MA
When trunk lid is open:
TRUNK SWITCH ON
SEL536W When trunk lid is closed: EM
TRUNK SWITCH OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD LC
Check trunk room lamp switch in Switch

EC

FE
NG
SEL930U
AT
H
CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH. NG Replace trunk room lamp
1. Disconnect trunk room lamp switch
E
switch.
PD
connector.
2. Check continuity between trunk room
FA
lamp switch terminals.
Terminals Condition Continuity RA

Closed No
q
1 -q
2
Open Yes
BR
OK
H
ST
I Trunk room lamp switch ground circuit
and trunk room lamp switch
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-389
EXIT
(Security indicator lamp check)
INDICATOR LAMP ACTIVE TEST OK Security indicator lamp is

E
CONSULT-II OK.
See “INDICATOR LAMP” in ACTIVE TEST

mode.
SEL580W
Indicator lamp should illuminate.
Note: If CONSULT-II is not available, skip
this procedure and go to the next
procedure.
NG
H
CHECK INDICATOR LAMP. NG Replace indicator lamp.
E
OK
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR NG Check the following.
SEL931U E
INDICATOR LAMP. I 10A fuse [No. 28 ,
1. Disconnect security lamp connector. located in fuse block
2. Check voltage between indicator lamp (J/B)]
terminal q
1 and ground. I Harness for open or
Battery voltage should exist. short between security
indicator lamp and fuse
OK
H
security indicator lamp and BCM.
EL-390
EXIT
E
INPUT SIGNAL.
CONSULT-II GI
See “LOCK SIG” in DATA MONITOR
mode. MA
When door is locked:
LOCK SIG LOCK
SEL525W When door is unlocked: EM
LOCK SIG UNLK
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
LC
(Refer to On board Diagnoses, EL-255.) EC
380. FE
NG
SEL025V H AT
NG
CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR. Replace door lock actuator.
E
tor. PD
q2 and q 4 . FA
Locked No RA
Unlocked Yes
OK BR
H
I Harness for open or short between LCU ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-391
EXIT
(Door key cylinder lock switch check)
E
INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK SIGNAL). (lock) is OK.
CONSULT-II
See “KEY CYL LK” in DATA MONITOR

mode.
“KEY CYL LK” should be “ON” when
SEL537W
turned to lock.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER
Check voltage between LCU01/02 termi-

nal q
1 and ground.
Key position Voltage V

Neutral/Unlock Approx. 5
Lock 0
NG
H
E
SWITCH. switch.
connector.
SEL871W Terminals Key position Continuity

Neutral/
LH: q
3 -q
2 No
Unlock
RH: q
1 -q
2
Lock Yes
OK
H
SEL909U
EL-392
EXIT
(Door key cylinder unlock switch check)
E
INPUT SIGNAL (UNLOCK SIGNAL). (unlock) is OK.
CONSULT-II
GI
See “KEY CYL UN” in DATA MONITOR

mode.
MA
“KEY CYL UN” should be “ON” when
SEL538W
turned to unlock.
EM
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER
LC
27
or q
31 and ground.
EC
Terminals Key Voltage

FE
! @ position V
Neutral/ Approx.
LH q
31 Ground Lock 12 AT
Unlock 0
Neutral/ Approx.
RH q
27 Ground Lock 12 PD
Unlock 0
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-375. FA

NG
RA
H
E
SWITCH. switch. BR
SEL952V 1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch
connector.
2. Check continuity between door key cyl- ST
Terminals Key position Continuity RS

LH: q
1 -q
2 Neutral/Lock No
RH: q
3 -q
2 Unlock Yes
BT
OK HA
H
IDX
SEL913U
EL-393
EXIT
(Trunk lid key unlock signal check)
CHECK TRUNK LID KEY CYLINDER OK Trunk lid key unlock switch
E
SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (UNLOCK SIG- is OK.
NAL).
CONSULT-II
See “TRUNK UNLK SW” in DATA MONI-

TOR mode.
When key in key cylinder is at “NEUTRAL”
SEL539W
position,
TRUNK UNLK SW OFF
When key is “UNLOCK” position,
TRUNK UNLK SW ON
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
Check trunk lid key cylinder switch in

Switch monitor (Mode II) mode. (Refer to
On board Diagnosis, EL-255.)

SEL932U
NG
H
CHECK TRUNK LID KEY CYLINDER NG Replace trunk lid key cylin-
E
SWITCH (UNLOCK SWITCH). der switch.
1. Disconnect trunk lid key cylinder switch
connector.
2. Check continuity between trunk lid key
cylinder switch terminals.

Neutral No
q
1 -q
2
Unlocked Yes
OK
H
I Trunk lid key cylinder switch ground cir-
cuit
lid key cylinder switch and BCM
EL-394
EXIT
(Theft warning horn alarm check)
CHECK THEFT WARNING HORN Yes Horn alarm is OK.
E
ALARM OPERATION.
CONSULT-II
GI
See “ALARM RELAY” in ACTIVE TEST

mode.
MA
Theft warning horn alarm should oper-
SEL540W
ate.
EM
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
LC
2. Apply ground to BCM terminal q
15 .
EC
Does horn alarm activate?

No
H
SEL933U Check theft warning horn relay. NG Replace.
AT
E
OK
PD
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR THEFT NG Check the following.
E FA
WARNING HORN RELAY. I 7.5A fuse [No. 14 ,
1. Disconnect theft warning horn relay located in the fuse block
connector. (J/B)] RA
ground. short between theft
Battery voltage should exist. warning horn relay and BR
SEL755UA fuse
OK
ST
H
CHECK THEFT WARNING HORN RELAY NG Check harness for open or
E
CIRCUIT. short. RS
1. Disconnect theft warning horn relay
connector.
2. Check voltage between terminals q 3 BT
and q5 .
3. Check voltage between terminals q 6 HA
and q7 .
SEL756UA
OK
H
Check harness for open or short between IDX
theft warning horn relay and BCM.
EL-395
EXIT
(Theft warning headlamp alarm check)
Yes
CHECK THEFT WARNING HEADLAMP E
Headlamp alarm is OK.
ALARM OPERATION.
CONSULT-II
See “ALARM RELAY” in ACTIVE TEST

mode.
Theft warning headlamp alarm should
operate.
SEL540W
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------

2. Apply ground to BCM terminal q
15 .
Does headlamp alarm activate?
No
H
No
Does headlamp come on when turning E
Check headlamp system.
lighting switch “ON”? Refer to “HEADLAMP”.
SEL933U
Yes
H
NG
Check theft warning lamp relay. E
Replace.
OK
H
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR THEFT E
WARNING LAMP RELAY. I 7.5A fuse [No. 14 ,
1. Disconnect theft warning lamp relay located in the fuse block
connector. (J/B)]
SEL757UC ground. short between theft
Battery voltage should exist. warning lamp relay and
fuse
OK
H
NG
CHECK THEFT WARNING LAMP RELAY E
Check harness for open or
CIRCUIT. short.
1. Disconnect theft warning lamp relay
connector.
2. Turn lighting switch to 2nd position.
and q5 .
SEL758UC
and q7 .
OK
H
theft warning lamp relay and BCM.
EL-396
EXIT
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER — IVMS

Location
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL065X
IDX
EL-397
EXIT
System Description
OPERATIVE CONDITION
The drive position and mirror can be set in 2 ways, manually and automatically.
Manual operation
The driver’s seat can be adjusted for sliding, reclining, front cushion height, rear cushion height, and lumbar
support with the LH power seat switches. The steering column can be adjusted for tilt and reach (telescopic)
with the steering switch. The manual operation can be adjusted with the IGN key in any position.
Automatic operation
The driver’s seat and steering column are adjusted to the proper positions for the driver automatically, in 3
different ways: MEMORY AUTOMATIC SET, AUTOMATIC EXITING SETTING and AUTOMATIC SET
RETURN. (Automatic Drive Positioner = ADP)
CONDITIONS INHIBITING AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Automatic memory setting procedures are suspended under any of the following conditions:
(a) When vehicle speed is more than 7 km/h (4 MPH).
(b) When driver’s side power seat switch, tilt or telescopic steering switch is turned on.
(c) When any two of the switches (set switch and memory switches 1 and 2) are turned ON.
(d) When cancel switch is turned on.
(e) When selector lever is in any position other than “P”.
(f) When ignition switch is turned to “START” position.
(Operation resumes when ignition switch is returned to “ON”.)
(g) When any of the following malfunctions are detected:
I Steering tilt lock detection
(Steering tilt lock is sensed when tilt sensor signal value does not change for a certain period of time.)
I Steering tilt/telescopic sensor failure detection
(Sensor failure is sensed when sensor output is less than 0.1 volts or greater than 4.9 volts.)
I Detention switch abnormality detection
[Detention switch failure is sensed when detention switch remains off for at least 2 seconds at a vehicle
speed of greater than 7 km/h (4 MPH).]
FAIL-SAFE SYSTEM
Output failure
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, if any of the parts (indicated in the following chart) move more
than the specified amount within a period “T2” when no “ON” input is sent from any of the switches (indicated
in the following chart), or an output from the automatic drive positioner is not produced, an output failure is
sensed. Motor operation will be suspended automatically, and all automatic operations will be ineffective. (In
this case, the motor will not operate manually.)
OPERATED PORTION T2 Allowable measurement
Seat sliding Approx. 2.5 sec. Within 6 mm (0.24 in)
Seat reclining Same as above Change angle within 1°
Steering tilt Same as above Change angle within 1°
Absolving
I When moving selector lever back to “P” position after having moved it to any position except “P”, fail-safe
operation will be canceled.
I If self-diagnosis is performed using CONSULT-II, fail-safe operation will be canceled.
EL-398
EXIT
INITIALIZATION
After reconnecting battery cable, perform initialization procedure A or B. If initialization has not been performed,
automatic drive positioner will not operate.
PROCEDURE A
(1) Insert key in the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is in “OFF” position.) GI
(2) Open , close , open driver side door. (Do not perform with the door switch operation.)
(3) End
PROCEDURE B MA
(1) Drive the vehicle at more than 30 km/h (19 MPH).
(2) End
EM
MEMORY AUTOMATIC SET
Two drive positions can be retained in the memory. Press memory switch to set driver’s seat to preset posi-
tion. LC
(1) PROCEDURE FOR STORING MEMORY
Adjust the position of driver’s seat, steering column with manual set operations.
EC
Ignition switch “ON”.
H FE
Indicator LEDs
(1) Indicator LED for which driver’s seat positions are already retained in memory illuminates
Touch set switch. for 5 seconds. AT
(2) Indicator LED for which driver’s seat positions are not entered in memory illuminates for
0.5 seconds.
PD
Within 5 seconds.
H
Press memory switch for which driv- Indicator LEDs FA
er’s seat positions are to be entered (1) To modify driver’s seat positions, press memory switch.
in memory for more than 0.5 sec- Indicator LED will then go out for 0.5 seconds and then illuminate for 5 seconds.
onds. (2 driver’s seat positions can (2) To enter driver’s seat positions in blank memory, indicator LED illuminates for 5 seconds
RA
be memorized.) after memory switch is pressed.
BR
H
END OF MEMORY SETTING ST
NOTE: (1) When memory switch for which driver’s seat positions are already retained in memory is pressed, new seat positions will
be retained in memory in place of the previously set positions.
(2) Drive position is erased from the memory when battery cable is disconnected. After connecting battery cable, perform ini- RS
tialization procedures.
BT
HA
IDX
EL-399
EXIT
(2) SELECTING THE MEMORIZED POSITION
PROCEDURE-A PROCEDURE-B
Turn ignition switch “ON” and press desired memory switch for Open driver’s door and withdraw key from ignition key cylinder.
more than 0.3 seconds. (Indicator LED illuminates.) Then press desired memory switch for more than 0.3 seconds.
(Indicator LED illuminates.) (See NOTE 2.)
(See NOTE 1.)

Within 1 minute
H
Insert key into ignition key cylinder. (Memory indicator illuminates.)
H H
H
(See NOTE 3.)
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will move to the memorized posi-
tion. (During adjustments, indicator LED flashes, then illuminates for 5
seconds after adjustment.)
NOTES: (1) Do not keep cancel switch pressed as it will not operate.
(2) Automatic exiting setting will be performed.
(3) The driver’s seat position and steering adjustment (see the following Table) operate simultaneously in the order of prior-
ity.
The order of priority Operated portion

1 Seat sliding
2 Steering telescopic
3 Steering tilt
4 Seat reclining
5 Seat front lifting
6 Seat rear lifting
EL-400
EXIT
AUTOMATIC EXITING SETTING
For ease of entry and exit, move driver’s seat to “exiting” position.
“Exiting” positions:
Driver’s seat ... Slides about 40 mm (1.57 in) rear from normal sitting position.
Remove ignition key from ignition key Open driver’s door while ignition key Turn ignition switch from “ACC” to GI
cylinder. is inserted. “OFF” with driver’s door opened.
MA
E F
EM
H
The seat will slide backward, the
steering column tilts up and moves LC
away simultaneously.
EC
AUTOMATIC SET RETURN
With driver’s seat set to the “exiting” position, operating one of the following procedures moves it to the posi- FE
tion previously retained in memory.
Insert ignition key. Close driver’s door while ignition key Turn ignition switch from “ACC” to
is inserted. “ON”.
AT
After 0.45
seconds PD
E F
H FA
Driver’s seat and steering column
return to the original position. (The
seat and steering column will move RA
simultaneously.)
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-401
EXIT
Schematic
TEL033M
EL-402
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL183M
EL-403
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — (Cont’d)
TEL184M
EL-404
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL185M
EL-405
EXIT
TEL186M
EL-406
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL187M
EL-407
EXIT
TEL025B
EL-408
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL026B
EL-409
EXIT
CONSULT-II
SEF046TA

PBR455D
SEL471W
6. Touch “AUTO DRIVE POSITIONER”.
SEL472W
I DATA MONITOR, ACTIVE TEST, and SELF-DIAGNOSIS are

available for the automatic drive positioner.
SEL481W
EL-410
EXIT
HOW TO PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
1. Choose “AUTO DRIVE POSITIONER” in SELECT TEST
ITEM.
2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” of SELECT DIAG MODE.
3. Touch “START”. GI
MA
SEL488W EM
4. Seats and steering automatically move, and self-diagnosis will
start. LC
5. Within 15 seconds after seat and steering come to a stop, drive
the vehicle at speeds greater than 7 km/h (4 MPH) to diagnose
the vehicle speed sensor. EC
6. After completing self-diagnosis, diagnostic results appear on
the display.
FE
SEL541W
AT
I When no malfunction is detected.
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL484W
I When malfunction is detected. ST

A summary of diagnostic results is given in the following chart.
RS
BT
HA
SEL542W
7. Erase the diagnostic results memory.

a. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
b. Touch “IVMS”.
c. Touch “AUTO DRIVE POSITIONER”. IDX
d. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
e. Touch “START”.
f. Touch “ERASE”.
EL-411
EXIT
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT LIST
Diagnostic item Explanation Diagnostic procedure Reference page
Normal
NO DTC IS DETECTED/FURTHER
The automatic drive positioner system is in — —
TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.
good order.
Condition: While the seat slide is moving
backward for 2.5 seconds, then forward for PROCEDURE 5
2.5 seconds. (Sliding sensor check) EL-424
SEAT SLIDE
If the number of seat slide sensor pulses PROCEDURE 11 EL-430
changes 2 times or less, the seat slide is (Sliding motor check)
determined to be malfunctioning.
Condition: While the seat is reclining forward
for 2.5 seconds, then backward for 2.5 sec- PROCEDURE 6
onds. (Reclining sensor check) EL-425
SEAT RECLINING
If the number of seat reclining sensor pulses PROCEDURE 12 EL-431
changes 2 times or less, the seat reclining (Reclining motor check)
device is determined to be malfunctioning.
Condition: While the lifter’s front section is
moving down for 2.5 seconds, then up for
PROCEDURE 7
2.5 seconds.
[Lifting sensor (front) check] EL-426
SEAT LIFTER-FR If the number of sensor pulses (located in
PROCEDURE 13 EL-432
the front section of the seat lifter) changes 2
[Lifting motor (front) check]
times or less, the front seat lifter is deter-
mined to be malfunctioning.
Condition: While the lifter’s rear section is
moving down for 2.5 seconds, then up for
PROCEDURE 8
2.5 seconds.
[Lifting sensor (rear) check] EL-427
SEAT LIFTER-RR If the number of sensor pulses (located in
PROCEDURE 14 EL-433
the rear section of the seat lifter) changes 2
[Lifting motor (rear) check]
times or less, the rear seat lifter is deter-
Condition: While steering telesco is moving
forward for 1 second, then backward for 1 PROCEDURE 4
second. (Telescopic sensor check) EL-423
STEERING TELESCO
If telesco sensor output changes 0.2 volts or PROCEDURE 10 EL-429
less, the steering telesco section is deter- (Telescopic motor check)
Condition: While the steering wheel is tilting
PROCEDURE 3
up for 1 second, then down for 1 second.
(Tilt sensor check) EL-422
STEERING TILT If tilt sensor output changes 0.2 volts or
PROCEDURE 9 EL-428
less, the steering tilt device is determined to
(Tilt motor check)
be malfunctioning.
If the vehicle speed sensor output of less
than 7 km/h (4 MPH) is detected within 15
PROCEDURE 19
seconds after completing self-diagnosis on
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (Vehicle speed sensor EL-438
the seat and steering systems, the vehicle
check)
speed sensor is determined to be malfunc-
tioning.
If a vehicle speed of greater than 7 km/h (4
DETENT SW MPH) is detected while the A/T selector PROCEDURE 19
EL-438
[PAST INPUT FAIL] lever is set to “P”, the detent switch input (Detent switch check)
system is determined to be malfunctioning.
EL-412
EXIT
Diagnostic item Explanation Diagnostic procedure Reference page
When neither manual input nor ADP output
signal is produced, if the seat slides greater
SEAT SLIDE than 6 mm (0.24 in) within 2.5 seconds after
— — GI
[PAST OUTPUT FAIL] the seat slide sensor receives an input
signal, the seat slide output system is deter-
When neither manual input nor ADP output
MA
signal is produced, if the seat reclines
SEAT RECLINING greater than 1° within 2.5 seconds after the
— — EM
[PAST OUTPUT FAIL] seat reclining sensor receives an input
signal, the seat reclining output system is
determined to be malfunctioning. LC
When neither manual input signal nor ADP
output signal is produced, if the steering
STEERING TILT wheel tilts greater than 1° within 2.5 sec- EC
— —
[PAST OUTPUT FAIL] onds after the steering tilt sensor receives
an input signal, the steering tilt output sys-
tem is determined to be malfunctioning. FE
If a voltage greater than 4.9 volts (in relation
to the sensor power source of 5 volts) or
TELESCO SEN PROCEDURE 4 AT
less than 0.1 volts is detected across the EL-423
[PAST] (Telescopic sensor check)
telesco sensor, the telesco sensor system is
determined to be malfunctioning. PD
If a voltage greater than 4.9 volts (in relation
to the sensor power source of 5 volts) or
TILT SEN PROCEDURE 3
less than 0.1 volts is detected across the EL-422 FA
[PAST] (Tilt sensor check)
steering tilt sensor, the tilt sensor system is
determined to be malfunctioning.
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-413
EXIT
On board Diagnosis — Mode IV (Automatic

drive positioner operation)
HOW TO PERFORM MODE IV
Condition
H
SEL263V Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Within 5 seconds
H
Push memory set switch and two memory switches at the same time for more
than 2 seconds.
H
Mode V should be performed.
— Two indicator lamps should go on. (At the same time, driver’s seat and
steering column move automatically.)
H
As soon as the indicator lamps go on and off by turns, start engine.
Within 15 seconds
H
Drive the vehicle more than 7 km/h (4 MPH) and stop.
Do not stop engine.
H
If a circuit malfunctions, a malfunction code should be indicated.*1
H
or
Touch front driver’s side power seat switch or ADP steering switch.
H
DIAGNOSIS END*2
*1: If no malfunction is indicated, Mode IV will end after the vehicle speed sensor diagnosis is performed.
*2: Diagnosis ends after self-diagnostic results have been indicated for 10 minutes if left unattended.
EL-414
EXIT
On board Diagnosis — Mode IV (Automatic
drive positioner operation) (Cont’d)
MALFUNCTION CODE TABLE
In this mode, a malfunction code is indicated by the number of flashes from the automatic drive positioner
indicator lamps (indicator lamp 1, indicator lamp 2) as shown below.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL015VA ST
Code Detected Reference Code Detected Reference RS

Diagnostic procedure Diagnostic procedure
No. items page No. items page
PROCEDURE 5 PROCEDURE 4 BT
Seat slid- (Sliding sensor check) EL-424 Steering (Telescopic sensor check) EL-423
1 7
ing PROCEDURE 11 EL-430 telescopic PROCEDURE 10 EL-429
(Sliding motor check) (Telescopic motor check) HA
PROCEDURE 6 PROCEDURE 3
Seat (Reclining sensor check) EL-425 (Tilt sensor check) EL-422
2 8 Steering tilt
reclining PROCEDURE 12 EL-431 PROCEDURE 9 EL-428
(Reclining motor check) (Tilt motor check)
PROCEDURE 7 IDX
Vehicle
Seat lifting [Lifting sensor (front) check] EL-426 PROCEDURE 19
3 9 speed sen- EL-438
front PROCEDURE 13 EL-432 (Vehicle speed sensor check)
sor
PROCEDURE 8
Seat lifting [Lifting sensor (rear) check] EL-427
4
rear PROCEDURE 14 EL-433
EL-415
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
H
H
Yes No
SYMPTOM
BASIS
H H

H H
NG
EL-253)
OK
H H
FINAL CHECK NG
system.
OK
H
CHECK OUT
NOTICE:
EL-416
EXIT
PRELIMINARY CHECK
NG (Both operation)
Are automatic operation E No seat system functions oper- E SYMPTOM 1
and manual operation ate.
effected? ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No steering system functions
OK operate. E SYMPTOM 2 GI
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Some of the seat system func-
tions do not operate. E
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- SYMPTOM 3 MA
Some of the steering system
functions do not operate.
E
SYMPTOM 4 EM
E
No functions operate during auto- E SYMPTOM 5 LC
matic operation and some/all
functions do not operate during
manual operation.
EC
Some
NG (Automatic functions
operation)*2 Inoperative E Some of the seat system func- E SYMPTOM 6
functions
E
tions do not operate.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FE
Some of the steering system
functions do not operate. E Problem may be
due to mechanical AT
tilt/telescopic
mechanism failure.
All functions
PD
E No automatic operation functions E SYMPTOM 7
operate.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Only storing memory function FA
does not operate. E SYMPTOM 8
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Memorized position set (proce-
dure B), automatic exiting and RA
automatic set return functions do E Perform initializa-
not operate. tion*1
BR
NG (Manual operation)
E Seat system E SYMPTOM 9
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ST
Steering system
E SYMPTOM 10
RS
H
NG
Can be cancellation performed during E SYMPTOM 11
automatic operation?
BT
H OK
NG
Does memory indicator light up? E SYMPTOM 12
HA
H OK
INSPECTION END
*1: After reconnecting battery cable, perform initialization procedure A or B.

If initialization has not been performed, automatic drive positioner will not operate.
PROCEDURE A
IDX
(1) Insert key in the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is in “OFF” position.)
(2) Open , close , open driver side door. (Do not perform with the door switch operation.)
(3) End
PROCEDURE B
(1) Drive the vehicle at more than 30 km/h (19 MPH).
(2) End
*2: If only seat slide operates during automatic exit setting, the problem may be due to mechanical tilt mechanism failure. (In this
case, all other automatic operation items do not operate.)
After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart on next page.
EL-417
EXIT
Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform preliminary check, EL-417. Symptom numbers in the
symptom chart correspond with those of preliminary check.
SYMPTOM CHART
PROCEDURE Self-diagno- Diagnostic procedure
sis
EL-414
(Power supply and ground circuit EL-420
(Power supply and ground circuit EL-420
EL-422
EL-423
EL-424
EL-425
EL-426
EL-427
EL-428
EL-429
EL-411
REFERENCE PAGE
[Lifting sensor (front) check]
[Lifting sensor (rear) check]

(Telescopic sensor check)
(Telescopic motor check)

(Reclining sensor check)
for tilt/telescopic motor)
(Sliding sensor check)

On board diagnosis
(Tilt sensor check)
(Tilt motor check)

CONSULT-II
for LCU05)
(Mode V)
SYMPTOM
1 No seat system functions operate. X
2 No steering system functions oper- X X X X X
ate.
Sliding X X
Some of the seat sys- Reclining X X
tem functions do not
3 operate during Lifting X X
automatic/manual (Front)
operation. Lifting
(Rear) X X
Some of the steering
system functions do not Tilt X X X
4 operate during
automatic/manual Telescopic X X X
operation.
No functions operate during auto-
5 matic operation, and some/all func-
tions do not operate during manual
operation.
Sliding X X X
Some of the seat sys- Reclining X X X
6 tem functions do not Lifting
operate during auto- (Front) X X X
matic operation.
Lifting X X X
(Rear)
No automatic operation functions
7 operate. X X X X
Drive position cannot be retained in

8 the memory.
Sliding
Reclining
Does not Lifting
operate dur- (Front)
9 ing manual Seat
operation. Lifting
(Operates (Rear)
during auto- Lumber
matic opera- support
tion.)
Tilt
10 Steering
Telescopic
Automatic operation cannot be can-
11 celed.
12 Memory indicator does not light up.
X: Applicable
EL-418
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 11 EL-430
X
(Sliding motor check)
X
(Reclining motor check)
X

X
X
(Lifting limit switch check)

X
X
Diagnostic procedure
(Tilt/telescopic switch check)
EL-419
X
X
X
X
(Power seat switch check)

X
(Cancel switch check)

(ACC, ON
(IGN ON
START
signal)
signal)
(Key, detention, door switch and EL-438

X
X
vehicle speed sensor check)

X
(Seat memory switch check)

X
(Memory indicator check)

X
(Lumber support check)
Wake-up Diagnosis for LCU05 EL-248

X
X
X
IDX
HA
BT
RS
ST
BR
RA
FA
PD
AT
FE
EC
LC
EM
MA
GI
EXIT
EXIT
(Power supply and ground circuit for LCU05)
Check voltage between LCU05 terminal q
16 and ground.
(Refer to wiring diagram in EL-407.)
Terminals
OFF ACC ON START
q
SEL981U If NG, check the following.
I 40A fusible link (letter h, located in the fuse, fusible and relay
box)
I Circuit breaker-2
I Harness for open or short between circuit breaker-2 and
LCU05
I Harness for open or short between fuse and circuit breaker-2

Check continuity between LCU05 terminal q
14 and ground.
q
14 - Ground Yes
SEL982U
(Power supply and ground circuit for tilt/telescopic
motor)
Check voltage between BCM terminal 104 and ground.
Terminals
OFF ACC ON START
SEL983U 104 - Ground Battery voltage

I 40A fusible link (letter h, located in the fuse, fusible and relay
box)
I Circuit breaker-2
I Harness for open or short between circuit breaker-2 and BCM
I Harness for open or short between fuse and circuit braker-2
EL-420
EXIT
Check continuity between BCM terminal 114 and ground.
114 - Ground Yes
GI
MA
SEL984U EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-421
EXIT
(Tilt sensor check)
CHECK TILT SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL. OK Tilt sensor is OK.

E
CONSULT-II
See “TILT SEN” in DATA MONITOR

mode.
Steering column in the uppermost posi-
tion:
SEL543W Approx. 2V
Steering column in the lowermost position:
Approx. 4V
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER

46
and q
53 .
Steering column position Voltage V
Uppermost Approx. 2
Lowermost Approx. 4
SEL986U
NG
H
CHECK TILT SENSOR OPEN CIRCUIT. NG Repair harness.
E
1. Disconnect BCM connector and tilt sen-
sor connector.
2. Check harness continuity between BCM
connector and tilt sensor connector.
Terminals
Continuity
BCM Tilt sensor
q
54 q
1
q
46 q
2 Yes
q
53 q
3
OK
H
CHECK TILT SENSOR SHORT CIRCUIT. NG Repair harness.
E
connector terminals and ground.
SEL987U
q
54 - ground
q
46 - ground No
q
53 - ground
OK
H
Replace tilt sensor.
SEL988U
EL-422
EXIT
(Telescopic sensor check)
OK
CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR INPUT E
Telescopic sensor is OK.
SIGNAL. GI
CONSULT-II
See “TELESCO SEN” in DATA MONITOR MA

mode.
Steering column in the extreme front end
position:
SEL544W
Approx. 4.5V
EM
Steering column in the extreme rear end
position:
Approx. 0.5V LC
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER
EC
53
and q
62 .
FE
Steering column position Voltage
Extreme front end Approx. 4.5V
SEL990U
Extreme rear end Approx. 0.5V AT
NG PD
H
CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR OPEN NG Repair harness. FA
E
CIRCUIT.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and tele-
scopic sensor connector. RA
2. Check harness continuity between BCM
connector and telescopic sensor con-
nector. BR
Terminals
Telescopic Continuity
BCM
sensor ST
q
53 q
1
q
62 q
2 Yes
q
54 q
3
RS
OK BT
H
CHECK TELESCOPIC SENSOR SHORT
NG
E
Repair harness. HA
CIRCUIT.
SEL991U
connector terminals and ground.
q
53 - ground IDX
q
62 - ground No
q
54 - ground
OK
H
Replace telescopic sensor.
SEL992U
EL-423
EXIT
(Sliding sensor check)
OK
CHECK SLIDING SENSOR INPUT SIG- E Sliding sensor is OK.
NAL.
Measure voltage between LCU05 terminal
q
20 and ground with oscilloscope when
power seat slide is operated.
NG
H
NG
CHECK SLIDING SENSOR OPEN CIR- E Repair harness.
CUIT.
1. Disconnect LCU05 connector and slid-
ing motor connector.
LCU05 connector and sliding motor
connector.
Terminals
Slide motor Continuity
LCU05
(Sliding sensor)
SEL993U q
20 q20
Yes
q
32 q32
OK
H
NG
CHECK SLIDING SENSOR SHORT CIR- E Repair harness.
CUIT.
Check harness continuity between LCU05
connector and ground.
q
20 - ground
No
q
32 - ground
OK
H
Replace sliding sensor.
SEL994U
SEL995U
EL-424
EXIT
(Reclining sensor check)
OK
CHECK RECLINING SENSOR INPUT E Reclining sensor is OK.
SIGNAL. GI
q
30 and ground with oscilloscope when
power seat reclining is operated. MA
NG EM
H
NG
CHECK RECLINING SENSOR OPEN Repair harness.
CIRCUIT.
E LC
1. Disconnect LCU05 connector and
reclining motor connector.
2. Check harness continuity between EC
LCU05 connector and reclining motor
connector.
Terminals
FE
Reclining motor Continuity
LCU05
(Sliding sensor)
q
30 q30
AT
SEL996U Yes
q
32 q32
PD
OK
H
NG FA
CHECK RECLINING SENSOR SHORT E Repair harness.
CIRCUIT.
connector and ground. RA
q
30 - ground BR
No
q
32 - ground
OK ST
H
Replace reclining sensor.
RS
BT
HA
SEL997U
IDX
SEL998U
EL-425
EXIT
[Lifting sensor (front) check]
OK
CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) E Lifting sensor (front) is OK.
INPUT SIGNAL.
q21 and ground with oscilloscope when
power seat lifting (front) is operated.
NG
H
NG
CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) E Repair harness.
OPEN CIRCUIT.
1. Disconnect LCU05 connector and lifting
device connector.
LCU05 connector and lifting device con-
nector.
Terminals
Lifting device Continuity
LCU05
(Sliding sensor)
SEL999U q
21 q
21
Yes
q
32 q
32
OK
H
NG
CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) E Repair harness.
SHORT CIRCUIT.
connector and ground.
q
21 - ground
No
q
32 - ground
OK
H
Replace lifting sensor (front).
SEL001V
SEL961U
EL-426
EXIT
[Lifting sensor (rear) check]
OK
CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) E Lifting sensor (rear) is OK.
INPUT SIGNAL. GI
q31 and ground with oscilloscope when
power seat lifting (rear) is operated. MA
NG EM
H
NG
CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) Repair harness.
OPEN CIRCUIT.
E LC
1. Disconnect LCU05 connector and lifting
device connector.
2. Check harness continuity between EC
LCU05 connector and lifting device con-
nector.
Terminals
FE
Lifting device Continuity
LCU05
(Sliding sensor)
q
31 q
31
AT
SEL962U Yes
q
32 q
33
PD
OK
H
NG FA
CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) E Repair harness.
SHORT CIRCUIT.
connector and ground. RA
q
31 - Ground BR
No
q
32 - Ground
OK ST
H
Replace lifting sensor (rear).
RS
BT
HA
SEL963U
IDX
SEL964U
EL-427
EXIT
(Tilt motor check)
TILT MOTOR ACTIVE TEST OK Tilt motor is OK.

E
CONSULT-II
See “TILT MOTOR” in ACTIVE TEST

mode.
SEL545W
Tilt motor should operate.
Note: If CONSULT-II is not available,
start with diagnostic procedure
.
NG
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO TILT NG Replace BCM.
E
MOTOR.
terminals 102 or 103 and ground.
SEL966U
Condition Terminals Voltage
of tilt
! @ V
switch
Approx.
Up 103 Ground
12
Approx.
Down 102 Ground
12
OK
H
SEL967U CHECK TILT MOTOR. NG Replace tilt motor.
E
1. Disconnect tilt motor connector.
Terminals
Operation
! @
q
1 q
2 Up
q
2 q
1 Down
OK
H
Check harness for operation between
BCM and tilt motor.
EL-428
EXIT
(Telescopic motor check)
TELESCOPIC MOTOR ACTIVE TEST OK Telescopic motor is OK. GI

E
CONSULT-II
See “TELESCO MOTOR” in ACTIVE MA

TEST mode.
SEL546W
Telescopic motor should operate. EM
.
LC
NG
EC
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO TELE- NG Replace BCM.
SCOPIC MOTOR.
E FE
terminals 101 or 107 and ground.
SEL969U
AT
Condition
Terminals
of tele- Voltage
scopic
! @
V PD
switch
Approx.
Forward 101 Ground
12
Approx.
FA
Backward 107 Ground
12
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-406. RA

OK
BR
SEL970U H
CHECK TELESCOPIC MOTOR. NG Replace telescopic motor.
E
1. Disconnect telescopic motor connector. ST
RS
Terminals
Operation
! @ BT
q
1 q
2 Forward
q
2 q
1 Upward
HA
OK
H
BCM and telescopic motor.
IDX
EL-429
EXIT
(Sliding motor check)
SLIDING SLIDE ACTIVE TEST OK Sliding motor is OK.

E
CONSULT-II
See “SEAT SLIDE” in ACTIVE TEST

mode.
SEL547W
Sliding motor should operate.
.
NG
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO SLIDING NG Replace LCU05.
E
MOTOR.
Check voltage between LCU05 connector
terminals q
1 or q
8 and ground.
SEL972U

of sliding
! @ V
switch
Approx.
Forward q
1 Ground
12
Approx.
Backward q
8 Ground
12
OK
SEL973U H
CHECK SLIDING MOTOR. NG Replace sliding motor.
E
1. Disconnect sliding motor connector.
Terminals
Operation
! @
q
1 q
8 Forward
q
8 q
1 Backward
OK
H
LCU05 and sliding motor.
EL-430
EXIT
(Reclining motor check)
RECLINING MOTOR ACTIVE TEST OK Reclining motor is OK. GI

E
CONSULT-II
See “SEAT RECLINING” in ACTIVE TEST MA

mode.
SEL548W
Reclining motor should operate. EM
.
LC
NG
EC
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO RECLIN- NG Replace LCU05.
ING MOTOR.
E FE
terminals q
2 or q
9 and ground.
SEL975U
AT
of reclin-
! @ V
ing switch PD
Approx.
Forward q
2 Ground
12
Approx.
Backward q
9 Ground
12
FA
RA
OK
H BR
SEL976U CHECK RECLINING MOTOR. NG Replace reclining motor.
E
1. Disconnect reclining motor connector.
2. Apply 12V DC direct current to motor ST
Terminals
Operation
RS
! @
q
2 q
9 Forward
q
9 q
2 Backward BT
OK
H
HA
LCU05 and reclining motor.
IDX
EL-431
EXIT
[Lifting motor (Front) check]
LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) ACTIVE OK Lifting motor (front) is OK.

E
TEST
CONSULT-II
See “SEAT LIFTER FR” in ACTIVE TEST

mode.
SEL549W
Lifting motor (front) should operate.
.
NG
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO LIFTING NG Replace LCU05.
E
MOTOR (FRONT).
SEL978U terminals q
11 or q
10 and ground.
Condition
Terminals
of lifting Voltage
switch V
! @
(front)
Approx.
Up q
11 Ground
12
Approx.
Down q
10 Ground
12
OK
SEL979U
H
CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT). NG Replace lifting motor
E
1. Disconnect lifting device connector. (front).
Terminals
Operation
! @
q
11 q
10 Up
q
10 q
11 Down
OK
H
LCU05 and lifting motor (front).
EL-432
EXIT
[Lifting motor (Rear) check]
LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) ACTIVE TEST OK Lifting motor (rear) is OK. GI

E
CONSULT-II
See “SEAT LIFTER RR” in ACTIVE TEST MA

mode.
SEL550W
Lifting motor (rear) should operate. EM
.
LC
NG
EC
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO LIFTING NG Replace LCU05.
MOTOR (REAR).
E FE
terminals q
6 or q
4 and ground.
SEL002V
AT
Condition
Terminals
of lifting Voltage
switch
! @
V PD
(rear)
Approx.
Up q
6 Ground
12 FA
Approx.
Down q
4 Ground
12
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-409. RA

OK
BR
SEL003V
H
CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR). NG Replace lifting motor (rear).
1. Disconnect lifting device connector.
E ST
RS
Terminals
Operation
! @
q
6 q
4 Up BT
q
4 q
6 Down
OK HA
H
LCU05 and lifting motor (rear).
IDX
EL-433
EXIT
(Lifting limit switch check)
CHECK LIMIT SWITCH. NG Replace limit switch.

E
1. Disconnect lifting device connector.
2. Check continuity between lifting device
(limit switch) terminals.
Condition of
SEL004V Terminals Continuity
seat lifting
Fully up No
12 - q
q 14 Except the
Yes
above
Front
Fully down No
q
3 -q
14 Except the
Yes
above
Fully up No
q
5 -q
15 Except the
Yes
above
Rear
Fully down No
q
13 - q
15 Except the
Yes
above
SEL005V
OK
H
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR LIMIT NG Repair harness.
E
SWITCH.
Check continuity between lifting device
terminal q 14 (for limit switch front) or q
15 (for
limit switch rear) and ground.
OK
H
LCU05 and limit switch.
EL-434
EXIT
(Tilt/telescopic switch check)
CHECK TILT/TELESCOPIC SWITCH OK Tilt/telescopic switch is OK.

E
INPUT SIGNAL. GI
CONSULT-II
See “TELESCO SW - FR/RR, TILT SW - MA

UP/DOWN” in DATA MONITOR mode.
These switches should change from
SEL551W “OFF” to “ON” when switch is oper- EM
ated.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD LC
Check tilt/telescopic switch operation is
switch monitor (Mode II) mode. EC
(Refer to On board diagnosis EL-255.)

NG
SEL007V
AT
H
CHECK TILT/TELESCOPIC SWITCH. NG Replace ADP steering
1. Disconnect ADP steering switch con-
E
switch.
PD
nector.
2. Check continuity between ADP steering
switch terminals.
FA
Terminal
Switch Condition
q
2 q
3 q4 q 5 q
6 RA
Up q q
Tilt
Down q q
Forward q q BR
Telescopic
Backward q q
OK ST
H
RS
I Ground circuit for ADP steering switch
and ADP steering switch BT
HA
IDX
EL-435
EXIT
(Power seat switch check)
CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH INPUT OK Power seat switch is OK.

E
SIGNAL.
CONSULT-II
See “SLIDE SW, RECLN SW, LIFT FR,

RR SW” in DATA MONITOR mode.
SEL552W “OFF” to “ON” when switch is oper-
ated.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
Check each power seat switch operation

in switch monitor (Mode II) mode.
NG
SEL008V
H
CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH. NG Replace power seat
E
1. Disconnect power seat switch connec- switch.
tor.
2. Check continuity between power seat
switch terminals.
Con- Terminals
Switch
dition q
15 q
17 q
18 q19 q
23 q
24 q
25 q
26 q
27
For-
q q
Slid- ward
ing Back-
q q
ward
For-
q q
Reclin- ward
ing Back-
q q
ward
Lifting Up q q
(Front) Down q q
Lifting Up q q
(Rear) Down q q
OK
H
I Ground circuit for power seat switch
LCU05 and power seat switch
EL-436
EXIT
(Cancel switch check)
CHECK CANCEL SWITCH INPUT SIG- OK Cancel switch is OK.

E
NAL. GI
CONSULT-II
See “CANCEL SW” in DATA MONITOR MA

mode.
When cancel switch is ON:
SEL553W CANCEL SW ON EM
When cancel switch is OFF:
CANCEL SW OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- LC
ON BOARD
Check cancel switch in switch monitor EC

(Mode II) mode.
(Refer to On board Diagnosis EL-255.)
FE
SEL066X
NG AT
H
CHECK CANCEL SWITCH. NG Replace ADP steering
PD
E
1. Disconnect ADP steering switch con- switch.
nector.
2. Check continuity between ADP steering
FA
switch terminals.
Cancel switch
RA
condition
ON Yes
1 -q
q 3 BR
OFF No
OK
ST
H
I Ground circuit for ADP steering switch RS
and ADP steering switch
BT
HA
IDX
EL-437
EXIT
(Key, detention, door switch and vehicle speed sensor
check)

E
CONSULT-II I 10A fuse [No. 28 ,
located in fuse block
See “IGN KEY SW” in DATA MONITOR (J/B)]
mode. I Key switch
When key is inserted in ignition key cylin- I Harness for open or
SEL532W der: short between key switch
IGN KEY SW ON and fuse
cylinder: short between BCM and
IGN KEY SW OFF key switch
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
TESTER

69
and ground.
Condition Voltage V
SEL916V Key is inserted. Approx. 12
Key is removed. 0
OK
H
CHECK IGNITION SWITCH INPUT SIG- NG Check the following.
E
NAL (ACC, ON AND START). I 7.5A fuse [No. 23
(J/B)]
See “IGN ACC SW, IGN ON SW, IGN I 7.5A fuse [No. 32
START SW” in DATA MONITOR mode. located in the fuse block
SEL555W
These switches should change from (J/B)]
“OFF” to “ON” when ignition key I 7.5A fuse [No. 34
switch is turned to each position. located in the fuse block
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- (J/B)]
TESTER I Harness for open or
short between BCM and
Check voltage between BCM terminals fuse
and ground.
Terminals Ignition key switch position

! @ OFF ACC ON START
Approx. Battery volt- Approx.
q
60 Ground
SEL029V 0V age 0V
q
68 Ground Approx. 0V Battery voltage
Battery
q
55 Ground Approx. 0V
voltage
OK
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
EL-438
EXIT
q
A
H
NG
CHECK DETENTION SWITCH INPUT E Check the following.
SIGNAL. I Detention switch
CONSULT-II I Harness for open or GI
short
See “DETENT SW” in DATA MONITOR
mode. MA
“DETENT SW” should be “ON” when
setting A/T selector lever in “P” posi-
tion.
SEL554W ------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- EM
ON BOARD
Check detention switch operation in switch LC

(Refer to On board Diagnoses, EL-255.)
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-404. EC

OK
H
CHECK DRIVER DOOR SWITCH INPUT
NG
FE
E
SIGNAL. I Driver door switch
CONSULT-II I Driver door switch
SEL556W
ground condition AT
See “DOOR SW DR” in DATA MONITOR I Harness for open or
mode. short between driver
When driver’s door is open: door switch and BCM
DOOR SW-DR ON
PD
When driver’s door is closed:
DOOR SW-DR OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- FA
ON BOARD
Check driver’s door switch operation in

Switch monitor (Mode II) mode. RA
(Refer to On board Diagnoses EL-255.)
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-404. BR

SEL681UA
OK
H
No ST
CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR. E Check speedometer and
Does speedometer operate normally? vehicle speed sensor cir-
cuit.
Yes Refer to EL-108. RS
H
NG
CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR E Replace BCM. BT
PULL UP VOLTAGE.
q
49 and ground. HA
OK
H
NG
Check harness for open or short between E Repair harness. IDX
BCM terminal q49 and combination meter
terminal q
16 .
OK
H
INSPECTION END
EL-439
EXIT
(Seat memory switch check)
CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INPUT OK Seat memory switch is OK.

E
SIGNAL.
CONSULT-II
See “SET SW, MEMORY SW-1, 2” in

DATA MONITOR mode.
SEL557W “OFF” to “ON” when switch is oper-
ated.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
ON BOARD
Check each seat memory switch operation

in Switch monitor (Mode II) mode.
NG
SEL067X
H
CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH. NG Replace seat memory
E
1. Disconnect seat memory switch con- switch.
nector.
2. Check continuity between seat memory
switch terminals.
Terminals
Switch
q
1 q
2 q3 q
4
Memory-1 q q
Memory-2 q q
Set q q
OK
H
I Ground circuit for seat memory switch
and seat memory switch
EL-440
EXIT
DIAGNOSES PROCEDURE 21
(Memory indicator check)
INDICATOR ACTIVE TEST OK Indicator lamp is OK. GI

E
CONSULT-II
See “MEMORY SW INDCTR” in ACTIVE MA

TEST mode.
SEL558W
Indicator lamp should illuminate. EM
skip this procedure and go to the
next procedure.
LC
NG
H EC
CHECK INDICATOR LAMP. NG Replace seat memory
E
switch (indicator lamp).
OK FE
H
SEL068X CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR NG Check the following. AT

E
INDICATOR LAMP. I 7.5A fuse [No. 14
1. Disconnect seat memory switch con- located in the fuse block
nector. (J/B)] PD
2. Check voltage between seat memory I Harness for open or
switch terminal q
5 and ground. short between fuse and
Battery voltage should exist. indicator lamp
FA

RA
OK
H
Check harness for open or short between BR
BCM and seat memory switch.
ST
(Lumbar support check) RS
Power lumbar support moves neither for- 1. Power supply circuit for power lumbar 1. Verify battery voltage is present at ter- BT
ward nor backward. support switch minal q16 of power seat switch.
2. Ground circuit 2. Check ground circuit for power seat
switch terminal q14 . HA
3. Lumbar support motor 3. Check lumbar support motor.
4. Lumbar support motor circuit 4. Check harness for open or short
between lumbar support motor and
power seat switch.
Power lumbar support does not move for- 1. Lumbar support switch 1. Check power seat switch.
ward or backward.
IDX
EL-441
EXIT
IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)

Location
SEL950W
NOTE:
If customer reports a “No Start” condition, request ALL KEYS to be brought to the Dealer is case of
a NATS malfunction.
EL-442
EXIT
System Description
IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) has the following immobilizer functions:
I Since only IVIS (NATS) ignition keys, whose ID nos. have been registered into the ECM and IMMU of IVIS
(NATS), allow the engine to run, operation of a stolen vehicle without a IVIS (NATS) registered key is pre-
vented by IVIS (NATS). GI
That is to say, IVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key
of IVIS (NATS).
I All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs (except for card plate key) have been IVIS (NATS) registered. MA
If requested by the vehicle owner, a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the IVIS (NATS) com-
ponents.
I The security indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” position. Therefore, IVIS (NATS) EM
warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system.
I When IVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition key is in the “ON”
position. LC
I IVIS (NATS) trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other IVIS (NATS) igni-
tion key IDs must be carried out using CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II IVIS (NATS) software.
When IVIS (NATS) initialization has been completed, the ID of the inserted ignition key is automatically EC
IVIS (NATS) registered. Then, if necessary, additional registration of other IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs
can be carried out.
Regarding the procedures of IVIS (NATS) initialization and IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer FE
to CONSULT-II operation manual, IVIS/NVIS.
I When servicing a malfunction of the IVIS (NATS) (indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator
Lamp) or registering another IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID no., it is necessary to re-register original AT
key identification. Therefore, be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner.
PD
System Composition
The immobilizer function of the IVIS (NATS) consists of the following:
I IVIS (NATS) ignition key FA
I IVIS (NATS) antenna amp. located in the ignition key cylinder
I IVIS (NATS) immobilizer control unit (IMMU)
I Engine control module (ECM) RA
I Security indicator
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL030VA
HA
IDX
EL-443
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — NATS —
TEL188M
EL-444
EXIT
CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to Data link connector for CONSULT-
II. GI
MA
SEF046TA EM
3. Insert IVIS (NATS) program card into CONSULT-II.
: Program card LC
IVIS (NATS)
5. Touch “START”. EC
FE
PBR455D
AT
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure. PD
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual, IVIS/NVIS.
FA
RA
BR
SEL291W
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-445
EXIT
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Description
MODE
C/U INITIALIZATION When replacing any of the following three components, C/U initialization is necessary.
[IVIS (NATS) ignition key/IMMU/ECM]
SELF-FUNCTION CHECK ECM checks its own IVIS (NATS) communication interface by itself.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Detected items (screen terms) are as shown in the chart below.
NOTE:
When any initialization is performed, all ID numbers previously registered will be erased and all IVIS
(NATS) ignition keys must be registered again. The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key.
The system will show “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” or “LOCK MODE” as a self-diagnostic result on the
CONSULT-II screen.
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
SEL953W
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART

Detected items (Screen terms) Description Reference page
IMMU ECM received the signal from IMMU that IMMU is malfunctioning. EL-450
ECM ECM is malfunctioning. EL-450
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU Communication impossible between ECM and IMMU. EL-451
IMMU can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID verification
DIFFERENCE OF KEY EL-453
between key ID and IMMU is NG.
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY IMMU cannot receive the key ID signal. EL-454
The result of ID verification between IMMU and ECM is NG. System ini-
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM EL-455
tialization is required.
Noise (interference) interfered into IVIS (NATS) communication lines dur-
ELECTRONIC/MINGLE NOISE EL-456
ing communicating.
DON’T ERASE BEFORE CHECK- Engine trouble data and IVIS (NATS) trouble data have been detected in
EL-447
ING ENG DIAG ECM.
When the starting operation is carried out 5 or more times consecutively
under the following conditions, IVIS (NATS) will shift the mode to one
LOCK MODE which prevents the engine from being started. EL-458
I unregistered ignition key is used
I IMMU or ECM malfunctioning
EL-446
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
CHECK IN
H GI
Listen to customer complaints or request. (Get symptoms)
NOTE:
If customer reports a “No Start” condition, request ALL
KEYS to be brought to the Dealer in case of a NATS mal- MA
function.
KEY SERVICE REQUEST (Additional key ID registration)

TROUBLE
H
EM
H
Verify the security indicator. INITIALIZATION
H
(Refer to CONSULT-II operation
manual IVIS/NVIS.)
LC
Using the CONSULT-II program card for IVIS (NATS) check the
E “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” with CONSULT-II. F
EC
H H
Self-diagnostic results referring to IVIS (NATS), but no informa- Self-diagnostic results referring to IVIS (NATS) and “DON’T FE
tion about engine self-diagnostic results is displayed on CON- ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG” are displayed on
SULT-II. CONSULT-II.
(This means that engine trouble data has been detected in
H ECM.) AT
H H
Repair IVIS (NATS). Turn ignition switch “OFF”. PD
(If necessary, carry out “SELF-FUNCTION CHECK” or “C/U INI-
TIALIZATION” with CONSULT-II.)
H H FA
Turn ignition switch “ON”. Repair IVIS (NATS) according to self-diagnostic results referring
to IVIS (NATS).
(If necessary, carry out “SELF-FUNCTION CHECK” or “C/U INI-
TIALIZATION” with CONSULT-II.)
RA
H H
Erase the IVIS (NATS) “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” by using CON-
SULT-II. (Touch “ERASE”)
Do not erase the IVIS (NATS) “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” by
using CONSULT-II.
BR
H H
Start the engine. Check the engine “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” with CONSULT-II by ST
using the CONSULT-II generic program card. F
(Engine diagnostic software included)
H H
RS
NG
Verify no lighting up of the security indicator. Repair engine control system (Refer to EC section.) when self-
diagnostic results except “NATS MALFUNCTION” are detected.
OK When only “NATS MALFUNCTION” is detected, erase the self- BT
diagnostic results and go to the next step.
H H
NG
CHECK OUT Start the engine. Does the engine start properly? HA
OK
H H
Perform running test with CONSULT-II in engine “SELF-DIAG Erase the IVIS (NATS) and engine “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” by
RESULTS” mode. using the CONSULT-II program card for IVIS (NATS) and
generic program card.
IDX
H H
NG Verify “NO DTC” displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Start the engine.
OK
H
CHECK OUT
EL-447
EXIT
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1
(Self-diagnosis related item)
Displayed “SELF-DIAG DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- SYSTEM REFERENCE PART NO.
SYMPTOM RESULTS” on CONSULT-II DURE (Malfunctioning OF ILLUSTRATION ON
screen. (Reference page) part or mode) NEXT PAGE
PROCEDURE 1
I Security indicator lighting IMMU IMMU A
(EL-450)
up*
I Engine will start. PROCEDURE 2
ECM ECM B
(EL-450)
Open circuit in battery volt-

C1
age line of IMMU circuit
Open circuit in ignition line

C2
of IMMU circuit
Open circuit in ground line

C3
of IMMU circuit
Open circuit in communica-

tion line between IMMU and C4
ECM
PROCEDURE 3 Short circuit between IMMU
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
(EL-451) and ECM communication C4
line and battery voltage line
Short circuit between IMMU

and ECM communication C4
line and ground line
Open circuit in power

source line of ANT/AMP cir- E3
cuit
I Security indicator lighting
up* ECM B
I Engine hard to start
IMMU A
PROCEDURE 4 Unregistered key D

DIFFERENCE OF KEY
(EL-453) IMMU A
Communication line
between ANT/AMP and E1
IMMU:
Open circuit or short circuit
of battery voltage line or E2
short circuit of ground line
Open circuit in power

PROCEDURE 5 source line of ANT/AMP cir- E3
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
(EL-454) cuit
Open circuit in ground line

E4
of ANT/AMP circuit
Malfunction of key ID chip E5
IMMU A
Antenna amp. E6
*: When IVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position.
EL-448
EXIT
Displayed “SELF-DIAG DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- SYSTEM REFERENCE PART NO.
SYMPTOM RESULTS” on CONSULT-II DURE (Malfunctioning OF ILLUSTRATION ON
screen. (Reference page) part or mode) NEXT PAGE
System initialisation has not

PROCEDURE 6 F
yet been completed.
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM
(EL-455) GI
I Security indicator lighting ECM F
up* ELECTRONIC/MINGLE PROCEDURE 7 Noise interference in com-
I Engine hard to start —
NOISE (EL-456) munication line MA
PROCEDURE 9
LOCK MODE LOCK MODE D
(EL-458)
I MIL staying ON Engine trouble data and

EM
DON’T ERASE BEFORE WORK FLOW
I Security indicator lighting IVIS (NATS) trouble data —
CHECKING ENG DIAG (EL-447)
up* have been detected in ECM
LC
*: When IVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position.
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 EC

(Non self-diagnosis related item)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYSTEM
SYMPTOM
(Reference page) (Malfunctioning part or mode) FE
Security ind.
PROCEDURE 8
Open circuit between Fuse and IVIS (NATS) AT
Security ind. does not light up. IMMU
(EL-457)
Continuation of initialization mode
IVIS (NATS) IMMU PD
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM

FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL033VA
IDX
EL-449
EXIT
Self-diagnostic results:
“IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “IMMU” displayed on CON-

SULT-II screen.
Ref. part No.* A.
Yes
SEL951W H
Replace IMMU.
H
Perform initialisation with CONSULT-II.
For the operation of initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation
manual IVIS/NVIS”.
* Ref. part No.: reference part No. of Diagnostic System Diagram on EL-449.
“ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ECM” displayed on CON-

SULT-II screen.
Ref. part No. B.
SEL952W H
Replace ECM.
H
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For the operation of initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation
EL-450
EXIT
“CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
GI
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS “CHAIN OF ECM-
IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II MA
screen.
OK
SEL954W EM
H
Check voltage between terminal q
4 of NG Check the following:
IMMU and ground with CONSULT-II or
E
I 7.5A fuse (No. 57 ,
LC
tester. located in the fuse, fus-
Voltage: Battery voltage ible link and relay box)
EC
OK
IMMU connector FE
Ref. part No. C1
SEL867UA H
AT
Check voltage between terminal q
3 of NG Check the following:
E
IMMU and ground with CONSULT-II or I 7.5A fuse [No. 32 ,
PD
tester. located in the fuse block
Voltage: Battery voltage (J/B)]
I Harness for open or FA
OK
IMMU connector
Ref. part No. C2 RA
H
Check harness continuity between IMMU NG Repair harness.
BR
SEL868UA E
terminal q
8 or q
9 and ground. Ref. part No. C3
ST
OK
H
RS
Check harness continuity between the fol- NG Communication line is
E
lowing ECM terminals and IMMU termi- open circuit.
nals. Repair harness or connec-
BT
ECM 102 and IMMU q 6 tors.
ECM 103 and IMMU q 5 Ref. part No. C4
HA
SEL869UA
OK
H
q
A
IDX
SEL260V
EL-451
EXIT
q
A
H
NG
CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE CIR- E Communication line is
CUIT. short-circuited with battery
1. Disconnect ECM connector and IMMU voltage line or ignition
connector. switch ON line.
2. Check voltage between the following Repair harness or connec-
terminals and ground. tors.
ECM 102 , ECM 103 , IMMU q 5 and Ref. part No. C4
IMMU q 6
SEL261V Voltage: 0V
OK
H
NG
Check continuity between the following E Communication line is
terminals and ground. short-circuited with ground
ECM 102 , ECM 103 , IMMU q 5 and line.
IMMU q 6 Repair harness or connec-
Continuity should not exist. tors.
Ref. part No. C4
OK
H
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR IVIS E IVIS (NATS) antenna amp.
SEL262V (NATS) ANTENNA AMP. +5V line is short-circuited
1. Connect IMMU connector and IVIS with battery voltage line or
(NATS) antenna amp. connector. ground line.
2. Check voltage between IVIS (NATS) Repair harness or connec-
antenna amp. terminal q 1 and ground tors.
(Power supply from IVIS (NATS) IMMU Ref. part No. E3
terminal q2 ) with analogue tester.
Before turning ignition switch “ON”
Voltage: 0V
Just after turning ignition switch “ON”
Pointer of tester should move.
OK
H
SEL903VB SELF-FUNCTION CHECK
1. Connect ECM connector and
disconnect IMMU connector.
3. Touch “SELF-FUNCTION
CHECK” on CONSULT-II
“SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
(See next page.)

H
NG
Touch “START”. ECM will then E ECM is malfunctioning.
check its communication interface Replace ECM.
by itself. Ref. part No. B
SEL955W OK
H
(See next page.)
Perform initialisa-
tion with CON-
SULT-II.
H For the operation of
q
B
initialization, refer
to “CONSULT-II
operation manual
IVIS/NVIS”.
SEL714W
EL-452
EXIT
q
B
H
IMMU is malfunctioning. GI
Replace IMMU.
Ref. part No. A
MA
H
Perform initialization with CON- EM
SULT-II.
For the operation of initialization,
refer to “CONSULT-II operation LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
“DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
FA
RESULTS “DIFFERENCE OF
KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II RA
screen.
OK
Initialization BR
SEL956W H with CON-
Perform initialization with CON- SULT-II IMMU is malfunc-
SULT-II. incomplete or tioning. ST
Re-register all NATS ignition key failed
E Replace IMMU.
IDs. Ref. part No. A
refer to “CONSULT-II operation RS
Initialization BT
completed
H
Start engine.
HA
SEL566W H H
END Perform initializa-
(Ignition key ID was unregistered.) tion with CON-
Ref. part No. D SULT-II.
For the operation
of initialization, IDX
refer to “CON-
SULT-II operation
EL-453
EXIT
“CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC Perform initializa-

RESULTS “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” tion with CON-
displayed on CONSULT-II screen. SULT-II.
For the operation of
OK initialization, refer
to “CONSULT-II
operation manual
SEL957W IVIS/NVIS”.
G
H
Start
CHECK IVIS (NATS) IGNITION KEY ID OK Ignition key ID chip was
CHIP. E malfunctioning.
Start engine with another registered IVIS Replace the ignition key.
(NATS) ignition key. Ref. part No. E5
Start NG
H
NG
CHECK IVIS (NATS) ANTENNA AMP. E Reinstall IVIS (NATS)
INSTALLATION. antenna amp. correctly.
Refer to “How to Replace IVIS (NATS)
Antenna Amp.” in EL-459.
SEL903VB OK
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR IVIS
(NATS) ANTENNA AMP.
1. Connect IMMU connector and IVIS
(NATS) antenna amp. connector.
2. Check voltage between IVIS (NATS)
antenna amp. terminal q 1 and ground
(Power supply from IVIS (NATS) IMMU
terminal q2 ) with analogue tester.
Before turning ignition switch “ON”
Voltage: 0V
Just after turning ignition switch “ON” NG
E
short between for open or
SEL904VB OK short between IMMU and
IVIS (NATS) antenna amp.
H
NG If harness is OK, replace
CHECK SIGNAL LINE 1 BETWEEN E IMMU, perform initialisation
IMMU AND IVIS (NATS) ANTENNA AMP. with CONSULT-II.
Check voltage between IVIS (NATS) For the initialisation
antenna amp. terminal q 2 and ground with procedure, refer to “CON-
analogue tester. Before turning ignition SULT-II operation manual
switch “ON” IVIS/NVIS”.
Voltage: 0V
Just after turning ignition switch “ON” G
OK
SEL905VB H
CHECK SIGNAL LINE 2 BETWEEN NG
IMMU AND IVIS (NATS) ANTENNA AMP.
Check voltage between IVIS (NATS)
antenna amp. terminal q 3 and ground with
analogue tester. Before turning ignition
switch “ON”
Voltage: 4.5 - 5V
Just after turning ignition switch “ON”
OK
H
q
A
EL-454
EXIT
q
A
H
NG
CHECK ANTENNA AMP. GROUND LINE Check harness for open or
CIRCUIT.
E
short between IMMU and
GI
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. IVIS (NATS) antenna amp.
2. Check continuity between IVIS (NATS) If harness is OK, replace
antenna amp. terminal q 4 and ground. IMMU. MA
(Signal from IVIS (NATS) IMMU termi- After replacing IMMU, per-
nal q
10 ) form initialization with
SEL906VB Continuity should exist. CONSULT-II. For the ini- EM
tialization procedure, refer
OK to “CONSULT-II operation
manual IVIS/NVIS”. LC
H
IVIS (NATS) antenna amp. is malfunction-
ing. EC
When replacing the amp. hold on to amp.
body. Take care not to pull on amp. har-
ness. FE
AT
PD
“ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
FA
* “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM”:
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC Registered ID of IMMU is in
RESULTS “ID DISCORD, IMM- discord with that of ECM.
ECM*” displayed on CONSULT-II RA
screen.
Initialization BR
SEL958W H with CON-
Perform initialization with CON- SULT-II ECM is malfunc-
SULT-II. incomplete or tioning. ST
Re-register all IVIS (NATS) ignition failed
E Replace ECM.
key IDs. Ref. part No. F
refer to “CONSULT-II operation RS
Initialization BT
completed
H
Start engine.
HA
SEL566W H H
END Perform initializa-
Ref. part No. F tion with CON-
SULT-II.
For the operation
of initialization, IDX
refer to “CON-
SULT-II operation
EL-455
EXIT
“ELECTRONIC/MINGLE NOISE” displayed on CONSULT-II
screen
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ELECTRONIC/MINGLE

F
NOISE” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
SEL959W Turn off or remove any possible noise sources.
H
Touch “ERASE” on CONSULT-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
screen.
H
Start engine. NG
OK
H
END
EL-456
EXIT
“SECURITY IND. DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
Check 10A fuse [No. 28 , located in the NG Replace fuse.
E
fuse block (J/B)].
GI
OK
H
IVIS (NATS) INITIALIZATION MA
1) Install the 10A fuse.
2) Perform initialization with CON-
SULT-II. EM
For the operation of
initialization, refer to “CON-
SULT-II operation manual IVIS/
NVIS”.
LC
H EC
H
FE
Start engine and turn ignition switch
“OFF”.
AT
H
OK PD
Check the security ind. lighting. END
E
NG
H
FA
NG
Check voltage between security ind. con- E
nector terminal q
1 and ground. short between fuse and
Voltage: Battery voltage security ind.
RA
OK
H BR
NG
SEL931U CHECK INDICATOR LAMP. E
Repair harness.
OK
ST
H
NG
CHECK IVIS (NATS) IMMU FUNCTION. IVIS (NATS) IMMU is mal-
1. Connect IVIS (NATS) IMMU connector.
E
functioning. Replace IVIS
RS
2. Disconnect security ind. connector. (NATS) IMMU.
3. Check continuity between IVIS (NATS)
IMMU terminal q11 and ground. BT
H
Continuity should exist intermit-
tently. Perform initializa-
tion with CON- HA
OK SULT-II.
SEL505UF For the operation of
initialization, refer
to “CONSULT-II
operation manual
IVIS/NVIS”.
IDX
H
security indicator and IVIS (NATS) IMMU.
EL-457
EXIT
“LOCK MODE” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
RESULTS “LOCK MODE” is dis-
played on CONSULT-II screen.
H
Yes
SEL960W 1. Turn the ignition switch to OFF posi- System is OK.
E
tion. (Now the system is
2. Turn the ignition key switch to ON posi- escaped from “LOCK
tion with a registered key. MODE”.)
(Do not start engine.) Wait for 5 sec-
onds.
3. Return the key to the OFF position.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of
three cycles).
5. Start the engine.
Can the engine start?
No
H
SEL566W NG
CHECK IVIS (NATS) ANTENNA AMP. E
Reinstall IVIS (NATS)
INSTALLATION. antenna amp. correctly.
Refer to “How to Replace IVIS (NATS)
Antenna Amp.” in EL-459.
OK
H
PERFORM INITIALISATION Yes System is OK.
E
Perform initialisation with CONSULT-II.
For the initialisation procedure, refer to
“CONSULT-II operation manual IVIS/
NVIS”.
Can the system be initialized?
Note: If the initialisation is incompleted or
failed, CONSULT-II shows mes-
sage on the screen.
No
H
Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5,
EL-454 to check “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY”.
EL-458
EXIT
How to Replace IVIS (NATS) Antenna Amp.

NOTE:
I If IVIS (NATS) antenna amp. is not installed correctly, IVIS
(NATS) system will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG
RESULTS on CONSULT-II screen will show “LOCK MODE”
or “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY”.
GI
I Initialization is not necessary only when IVIS (NATS)
antenna amp. is replaced with a new one.
MA
SEL239VA EM
INSTALLATION
LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL238VA
I After inserting the IVIS (NATS) antenna amp. into the ignition PD
key cylinder, check if the IVIS (NATS) antenna amp. is set in
the latched position as shown in the above illustration.
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-459
EXIT
INTEGRATED HOMELINK TRANSMITTER
Wiring Diagram — TRNSMT —
TEL189M
EL-460
EXIT
INTEGRATED HOMELINK TRANSMITTER
Trouble Diagnoses
SYMPTOM: Transmitter does not activate receiver.
Before conducting the procedure given below, make sure that sys- GI
tem receiver (garage door opener, etc.) operates with original,
hand-held transmitter. If NG, receiver or hand-held transmitter is at
fault, not vehicle related. MA
OK
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. E Check transmitter with Tool*.
SEL442U 2. Does red light (LED) of transmitter EM
illuminate when any button is OK NG
pressed? H H
Receiver Replace
NG or hand- transmitter LC
held trans- with sunvi-
mitter fault, sor assem-
not vehicle bly.
related. EC
H
NG
POWER SUPPLY CHECK. E Check the fol- FE
1. Disconnect transmitter connector. lowing.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I 10A fuse
3. Check voltage between terminal q 1 [No. 27 ,
SEL635U
and body ground. located in AT
Voltage: Battery voltage the fuse
block (J/B)]
OK I Harness for
open or PD
short
between
fuse and
transmitter FA
H
NG
GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK. E Repair har- RA
Check continuity between terminal q
2 ness.
and body ground.
BR
SEL636U OK
H
Replace transmitter with sunvisor
assembly. ST
*For details, refer to Technical Service Bulletin. RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-461
EXIT
INFINITI COMMUNICATOR (IVCS)
Precaution
CAUTION:
I Use CONSULT-II to set the system “Demonstration mode” if INFINITI Communicator needs to be
activated during service procedures. (For details of the demonstration mode, refer to EL-490.)
I Make sure to turn the demonstration mode OFF before returning the vehicle to the owner.
I In the demonstration mode, no service from the Communicator Response Center is available.
Therefore, even if the customer encounters an emergency, no service will be dispatched.
I If the theft warning system is activated for more than 7 seconds, INFINITI Communicator will dial
to the Communicator Response Center automatically. The operator will contact the customer to
confirm whether the vehicle has been stolen or not.
I When “Mayday” emergency dialing is activated (if the system is not in the demonstration mode),
the Communicator Response Center operator will come online. If there is no emergency, the
operator will ask the occupant for the user password (option). Failure to provide the correct pass-
word results in a police response.
I IVCS unit memory includes VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) and other such vehicle specific
data. Therefore, the IVCS unit cannot be transferred to another vehicle. When the IVCS unit is
replaced, the new unit must be set up and programmed. The INFINITI Communicator system auto-
matically contacts the Communicator Response Center the first time the vehicle is started after a
phone number has been changed or a module (IVCS unit) is replaced. The VIN will be written in
the memory of the new unit by transmitting data from the Communicator Response Center. For
details, refer to “System Setting”, EL-492.
I Before servicing the vehicle, confirm that the VIN memorized by the IVCS unit is the same as the
VIN on the vehicle’s identification plate.
Communicator Response Center Telephone

Number for Technicians
The Communicator Response Center telephone number for technicians is 1-888-427-4812.
Whenever an INFINITI dealer technician dials the above number, the following information will be required by
the Communicator Response Center operator.
I Customer name
I Unit ID number of old IVCS unit (For details, refer to EL-478.)
I Unit ID number of new IVCS unit
I VIN
I Dealer name and code (For security purposes)
I Dealer contact person (technician)
I Dealer phone and fax numbers
EL-462
EXIT

Location
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
SEL647V
EL-463
EXIT
System Description
OUTLINE
INFINITI Communicator system uses the Global Positioning System (GPS), cellular phone technology and the
Communicator Response Center to provide the following functions.
I One touch “Information” dialing
I One touch “Mayday” emergency dialing
I Automatic air bag inflation notification
I Stolen vehicle tracking
I Alarm notification
I Remote door unlock
There are limitations to the INFINITI Communicator system. To understand the system, read SYSTEM LIMI-
TATIONS (EL-465) thoroughly.
SYSTEM COMPOSITION
I The INFINITI Communicator system is controlled by the IVCS (In Vehicle Communication System) unit.
System status (“Mayday”-emergency dialing, or re-dialing, etc.) is displayed by the indicators in the IVCS
switch.
I The INFINITI Communicator system can only make calls to the Communicator Response Center and
receive calls from the center, unless the customer chooses to have the optional handset install.
SEL527V
EL-464
EXIT
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
Service area
Depending on the cellular provider chosen, service is provided in the 48 contiguous states. Service is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii, Canada, or Mexico. The Communicator Response Center will not be able to locate
the customer’s vehicle outside of the continental United States. GI
Inoperative if cellular phone is inactive or inoperative
INFINITI Communicator will be inoperative if the customer does not have an active account with cellular
provider, since INFINITI Communicator relies on the cellular network. When the INFINITI Communicator sys- MA
tem is outside of cellular service, the “NO SERVICE” indicator will illuminate. If you try to activate INFINITI
Communicator, the REQUEST will be cancelled. Cellular phone transmission may become temporarily
disabled, or interrupted by environmental factors like tunnels, bridges, or tall buildings. In such cases, INFINITI EM
Communicator will re-dial up to four times. After several failed attempts, the system will quit dialing and return
to normal mode.
Inoperative if the system is in the demonstration mode
LC
The INFINITI Communicator system remains in the demonstration mode until the setup procedures are com-
pleted. If the system is activated in this mode, the Communicator Response Center will recognize this opera- EC
tion as a demonstration and will not provide any service. The system can be changed to the demonstration
mode by using CONSULT-II to check the system operation. Do not forget to turn off the demonstration mode
after confirmation. FE
Battery
Since INFINITI Communicator is powered by the vehicle’s battery, if the battery is removed, damaged or
discharged, the system will not work. AT
Inoperative if cellular system is busy
When INFINITI Communicator tries to contact the Communicator Response Center, but the cellular network
is busy, the system attempts to re-dial for up to two hours. This time varies greatly depending on the cellular
PD
network and cellular signal strength. The system resets to ready when the system completes the re-dialing
attempts.
FA
Roaming
If the customer’s cellular provider does not have a roaming agreement with the provider where the vehicle
locates, it may not be possible to use the lines of a different cellular provider. Therefore, it is impossible that RA
INFINITI Communicator will contact the Communicator Response Center.
Special cellular features
Some cellular carriers offer custom phone numbers that are assigned a Personal Identification Number (PIN). BR
The cellular phone user is required to enter the PIN anytime a phone call is made. The INFINITI Communi-
cator system is not compatible with the PIN feature. A PIN requirement on the cellular phone will cause the
INFINITI Communicator system to be inoperative. ST
Other special features such as call waiting, voice mail, call forwarding, etc. can interfere with INFINITI Com-
municator system operation.
Cellular airwave interference RS
At times someone other than the Communicator Response Center operator may be heard. This is caused by
Cellular Airwave Interference and is not caused by an INFINITI Communicator system malfunction.
Possibility of positioning capability degraded
BT
Vehicle positioning is accomplished using the GPS (Global Positioning System). If the signal from the GPS
satellite is obstructed by a tunnel or building, positioning capability may be degraded or lost. In this case, the HA
last valid position obtained before the obstruction is transmitted to the Communicator Response Center. The
precision is also influenced by the location of GPS satellites.
Once the battery cable is disconnected, it will take about 5 minutes to determine the vehicle location. This is
because the memory related to GPS is lost when the battery cable is disconnected.
OPERATION IDX
One touch “Information” dialing
I If the vehicle becomes disabled due to problems such as engine trouble, press the “Information” switch to
connect to the Communicator Response Center and receive the desired service.
I When the indicator lamp on the switch lights up, it means that the system has started to contact the Com-
municator Response Center. (Voice communication with Communicator Response Center operator is not
available while DATA is being transmitted even if the indicator lamp is lit.)
I When the indicator lamp blinks, it means that the system is preparing for cellular connection or attempt-
ing to re-dial.
EL-465
EXIT
One touch “Mayday” emergency dialing
I When an emergency occurs, press the “Mayday” emergency switch to connect to the Communicator
Response Center. With this report, the Communicator Response Center recognizes that an emergency
has occurred and provides necessary service.
I The operator will request a password (if the customer chooses to establish a password). If the wrong
password or if no password is provided, the Communicator Response Center will assume the customer
is in a duress situation and dispatch police.
I When no voice reply is heard from the vehicle or the sound heard indicates an emergency situation, the
Communicator Response Center will have the police rush to the scene.
I Other operations are the same as service dialing.
Automatic air bag inflation notification
I When an air bag inflates, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit sends the air bag inflation signal to the IVCS
unit, and the system automatically dials the Communicator Response Center to report the occurrence of
an accident.
Stolen vehicle tracking
I When a vehicle is stolen, the owner can contact the Communicator Response Center to attempt to locate
the stolen vehicle. The Communicator Response Center will activate the stolen vehicle tracking to locate
the vehicle. If the Communicator Response Center successfully locates the vehicle, they will contact the
police to provide the location.
I The vehicle location data is calculated using GPS.
I The vehicle ignition switch must be turned to the ON position to obtain the vehicle location. (This is because
the system is in the sleep mode when the ignition switch is OFF.)
I Once this function starts up, regardless of the ignition switch position, the system keeps transmitting the
vehicle location until the cancel signal is transmitted from the Communicator Response Center.
I While this function is operating, the operator can covertly monitor what is happening inside the vehicle
through the hands-free microphone.
Alarm notification
I When theft warning system sounds an alarm for more than 7 seconds because of improper access, the
alarm signal is transmitted from the rear LH passenger door control unit (LCU04) to the IVCS unit, and
the system executes automatic dialing to the Communicator Response Center.
If the alarm is reset before 7 seconds has elapsed, the INFINITI Communicator will not place a call to the
Communicator Response Center.
I This function operates regardless of ignition switch position.
I While this function is operating, the operator can covertly monitor what is happening inside the vehicle
through the hands-free microphone.
Remote door unlock
I When the door is locked with the key inside the vehicle, the door can be unlocked by contacting the Com-
municator Response Center (Proof that the person calling is the owner must be received by the Commu-
nicator Response Center.)
I When the ignition key is in the “OFF” position, the system is in the sleep mode. Therefore, driver’s outside
handle must be pulled to wake up the system.
I To perform remote door unlock, call the Communicator Response Center and follow the operator’s instruc-
tions.
NOTE:
I When the system contacts the Communicator Response Center, data including the vehicle loca-
tion is transmitted to the Communicator Response Center.
I Communication with the Communicator Response Center is not completed until the completion
signal is transmitted from the Communicator Response Center. (Any calls to the Communicator
Response Center can only be terminated by Communicator Response Center.)
I Functions other than alarm notification and remote door unlock operate while the ignition switch
is ON and only for three minutes after the switch is turned OFF.
I Once a call to the Communicator Response Center is made, the communication continues regard-
less of the ignition key switch position.
I All the voice communication with the Communicator Response Center is made through the hands-
free telephone.
I When the INFINITI Communicator system is activated, the handset does not function.
EL-466
EXIT
DATA TRANSMITTING
When contact to the Communicator Response Center is made, vehicle sends electrical data including type of
activation (i.e., emergency call or alarm notification), vehicle location, time, etc.
SLEEP/WAKE UP CONTROL GI
3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF, the system goes into the SLEEP MODE to save battery power
supply. Communication with Communicator Response Center is not available in the SLEEP MODE.
To wake up the system, perform either of the following operations. MA
I Turn Ignition switch ON.
I Pull driver side outside door handle for more than 10 seconds. (Operation for door unlock function)
EM
INDICATOR LAMPS OPERATION
The system status is displayed as below by the indicator lamps. LC
Indicator Condition Description
Blinks.
System is trying to acquire an available cellu- EC
lar channel by “Mayday” switch operation.
MAYDAY System is connected to a cellular channel
Lights up.
and is communicating information to the
FE
(See NOTE.)
SEL532V Blinks.
System is trying to acquire an available cellu- AT
lar channel by “Information” switch operation.
INFORMA-
TION System is connected to a cellular channel
Lights up.
and is communicating information to the PD
(See NOTE.)
REDIAL
Lights up. Re-dialing FA
Blinks. Waiting for re-dial
Out of CELLULAR PHONE service area or
NO SERVICE Lights up.
signal is too weak.
RA
NOTE:
I When connection to Communicator Response Center by re-dial ends in failure, all the indicators BR
are turned off.
I All indicators illuminate for up to 30 seconds or more when ignition switch is turned from OFF to
ON and the system performs a self check. ST
I If both of MAYDAY and INFORMATION indicators do not turn off 30 seconds or more after the igni-
tion switch is turned to ON, the system is malfunctioning.
RS
AUTOMATIC RE-DIAL/AUTO RESET TO READY
I When INFINITI Communicator tries to contact the Communicator Response Center, but the cellular net- BT
work is busy, the system attempts to dial for up to 2 hours. This time varies greatly depending on the cel-
lular network and cellular signal strength. The system resets to ready when the system completes the
dialing attempts. The vehicle owner can press the button again if he or she still needs to contact the Com-
HA
municator Response Center.
I INFINITI Communicator automatically redials if communication between the vehicle owner and Commu-
nicator Response Center is lost for some reason.
I The only way for a transmission to be officially terminated is for the Communicator Response Center to
send an end transmission signal, which turns off the indicator in the switch. (Communication with Com- IDX
municator Response Center can not be terminated by the occupant.)
I If the vehicle owner start the engine during a call, the conversation may be interrupted. When this hap-
pens the system may try to resume transmission once after the engine has been started.
EL-467
EXIT
GPS (Global Positioning System)
GPS is the global positioning system developed and operated by
the US Department of Defense. GPS satellites (NAVSTAR) trans-
mit radio waves and orbit around the earth at an altitude of approxi-
mately 21,000 km (13,000 miles).
GPS receiver calculates the three-dimensional position of the
vehicle (latitude, longitude, and altitude from the sea level) by the
time difference of the radio wave arriving from more than four GPS
satellites (three-dimensional positioning).
When the radio wave is received from only three GPS satellites, the
SEL526V two-dimensional position (latitude and longitude) is calculated,
using the altitude from the sea level data calculated by using four
GPS satellites (two-dimensional positioning).
Positioning capability is degraded in the following cases.

I In two-dimensional positioning, when the vehicle’s altitude
from the sea level changes, the precision becomes lower.
I The location detection performance can have an error of about
100 m (300 ft) even in three-dimensional positioning with high
precision. Because the precision is influenced by the location
of GPS satellites used for positioning, the location detection
performance may drop depending on the location of GPS sat-
ellites.
I When the radio wave from GPS satellites cannot be received,
for example, when the vehicle is in a tunnel, in a parking lot
inside building, under an elevated superhighway or near strong
power lines, the location may not be detected. Turbulent/
electric weather conditions may also affect positioning perfor-
mance. If something is placed on the antenna, the radio wave
from GPS satellites may not be received.
HANDSET (OPTION)
NOTE:
I If an optional handset is installed, INFINITI Communicator can
be used as a normal cellular phone.
I If INFINITI Communicator is activated when INFINITI Commu-
nicator system’s cellular phone is in use, the current phone
transmission will be cut and INFINITI Communicator will dial
the Communicator Response Center. The cellular handset will
be disabled, and communication with the Communicator
Response Center operator will be carried out through the
SEL652V hands-free microphone.
I After communication with Communicator Response Center is
finished, the handset last number memory will be erased.
I While INFINITI Communicator is activated, the handset
becomes inoperative and all communication with the operator
is accomplished via the hands-free phone. When an activation
is terminated, the handset will be unlocked.
EL-468
EXIT
TEL SWITCH
When any of the TEL switches is pressed, the TEL switch which is
combined with the multiplex transmitting unit sends operational
commands to the IVCS unit. TEL switch has following three func-
tions. GI
I Volume adjust
I Placing re-dial call
I Placing memorized call (The telephone numbers are stored in MA
the handset. A maximum of 6 memories are operative.)
SEL588VA SEND/END switch operation EM

I When a call is received, press SEND/END switch to permit
conversation.
I At the completion of the conversation, press the SEND/END LC
switch to terminate the call.
I To re-dial the last phone number, press SEND/END switch.
EC
MEMORY switch operation
I A maximum of 6 telephone numbers which stored in the FE
memory of the handset can be dialed by MEMORY switch
operation.
I The last phone number is erased if the ignition switch is turned AT
off or if the INFINITI Communicator system has been activated.
I For the procedure to input telephone numbers, refer to the
handset operation manual. PD
I To select memory 1 to 6, push MEMORY switch A or B. Every
push on the switch changes the memory as follows.
SWITCH A: Memory 1 , 2 , 3 , OFF FA
SWITCH B: Memory 4 , 5 , 6 , OFF
After selecting memory, push SEND/END switch to make a
call. RA
VOLUME switch
Voice volume from the front RH speaker can be adjusted by using BR
the VOLUME switch.
NOTE:
Memory switches are not functional unless handset is
ST
installed.
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-469
EXIT
Schematic
TEL147M
EL-470
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — IVCS —
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL190M
EL-471
EXIT
Wiring Diagram — IVCS — (Cont’d)
TEL191M
EL-472
EXIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
TEL192M
EL-473
EXIT
TEL193M
EL-474
EXIT
CONSULT-II
GI
MA
SEF046TA EM
3. Insert UEN99A program card into CONSULT-II.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. LC
EC
FE
PBR455D
AT
6. Touch “IVCS”.
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEL961W
7. Perform each diagnostic item according to the item application ST

chart as follows:
RS
BT
HA
SEL439W
8. When CONSULT-II inspection is terminated, follow the proce-

dure shown below.
a. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM”
appears, then turn ignition switch to the OFF position. IDX
b. Turn off CONSULT-II.
c. Disconnect CONSULT-II DDL connector.
NOTE: If the DDL connector is disconnected before turning
ignition switch to “OFF” position, INFINITI communica-
tor may not operate properly.
EL-475
EXIT
APPLICATION ITEMS
Reference
Mode Description
page
SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays the result of self-diagnosis. EL-477
Two modes, “GPS MONITOR” and “SWITCH MONITOR” can be selected in this
mode.
DATA MONITOR I Displays current data related to GPS in “GPS MONITOR” mode. EL-478
I Displays IVCS switch and outside door handle switch condition in “SWITCH
MONITOR” mode.
In this mode, “Remote door unlock function” can be checked using CONSULT-II.
FUNCTION CHECK Door can be unlocked according to the commands to the door LCU by the IVCS EL-486
unit. This check verifies communication circuit between LCU and IVCS unit.
Displays the following data registered in the IVCS unit. In this mode the data can-
not be re-written.
REGISTERED DATA I Unit ID EL-478
I Cellular phone number
I VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)
In this mode, the system can be set up in the demonstration mode to confirm sys-
EL-490
tem operation.
Various data related to both the Communicator Response Center contract and cel-
CONFIGURATION lular provider can be written/updated in this mode.
(See Note.) I Phone number
EL-492
I NAM (Number Assignment Module)
I Stolen vehicle tracking setting (Default should always be on.)
I Alarm notification setting (Default should always be on.)
ECU PART NUMBER Displays the part number of the IVCS unit. —
Note: Data must not be rewritten without prior approval from the customer.
EL-476
EXIT
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” MODE
How to perform self-diagnosis
1. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
GI
MA
SEL440W EM
3. If no failure is detected, CONSULT-II will show “NO FAILURE”.
LC
EC
FE
SEL441W
AT
I If trouble codes are displayed with “TIME = 0”, repair/replace
the system according to “SYMPTOM CHART 1 (SELF-DIAG- PD
NOSIS ITEM)”, EL-480.
I In this case, both “MAYDAY” and “INFORMATION” indicator
lamps illuminate for more than 30 seconds while the ignition FA
switch is in the ON position.
Note:
The time data in CONSULT-II “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode
RA
displays the number of ignition switch cycles without the
same malfunctioning occurring. BR
SEL442W
I If trouble codes are displayed with “TIME = 1 or greater”, it ST

means that the trouble code is historical data. So no further
diagnosis is required.
Note: RS
If trouble codes are displayed with “TIME = 1 or greater” even
though the INFINITI Communicator has never been serviced.
Intermittent incidents may occur. Check the system, refer to BT
“Trouble Diagnoses for Intermittent Incident”, EL-489.
I If the system does not detect any trouble, the IVCS indicators
will turn off after bulb check (self-diagnosis) is completed while HA
SEL443W the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Note:
I The trouble codes cannot be erased by CONSULT-II.
I After 50 ignition cycles, the trouble codes are no longer
displayed in the CONSULT-II “ SELF-DIAG RESULTS” IDX
mode.
I The IVCS unit does not count the ignition switch cycles
unless the ignition switch is OFF for more than 3 minutes
between each ignition switch cycle.
EL-477
EXIT
“DATA MONITOR” MODE
How to perform data monitor
SEL444W
Data monitor item chart

Mode Monitor item Description
AVAILABLE GPS The number of GPS satellites captured by GPS antenna
DATE Date of Greenwich mean time
GMT TIME Greenwich mean time (Different from local time)
GPS MONITOR LAT. Latitude
LONG. Longitude
Index of precision (an index of location status of GPS satellites. The
DOP
smaller the value is, the higher the positioning precision is.)
MAYDAY “MAYDAY” emergency switch condition
SWITCH MONITOR INFORMATION “INFORMATION” switch condition
DR HANDLE Driver side outside door handle switch condition
“REGISTERED DATA” MODE

Item Description
ID number of the IVCS unit. ID number is unique to
UNIT ID
each unit and differs for each unit.
CELLULAR PHONE # —
Vehicle Identification Number. When the IVCS unit is
replaced, VIN # is written in the memory of the
VIN #
replaced unit by transmitting data from the Communi-
cator Response Center.
SEL445W
Note: No data can be changed in this CONSULT-II mode.
EL-478
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
Check in
GI
H
Verify to customer complaint. MA
H EM
Ask the customer if the service contract with cellular provider and/or Communicator Response Center has been
completed. (If not, the system is in the demonstration mode and regular service is not available. Complete a ser-
vice contract and carry out initial setting.) LC
H EC
Ask the customer if the cellular phone has PIN, 3-way calling or call waiting feature. (These features will cause
the system to fail. If any of these special cellular features are activated, ask the customer to cancel the features
by contacting their cellular provider.) FE
H AT
Turn ignition switch to ON position and check the indicators (“MAYDAY”, “INFORMATION”, “REDIAL” and “NO
SERVICE”) operation. For details, refer to “PRELIMINARY CHECK” in EL-480.
E F
Do both “MAYDAY” and “INFORMATION” indicator lamps remain illuminated after bulb check (self-diag- PD
nosis) is completed? (This shows the system is malfunctioning relating to self-diagnosis item.)
Yes (Both of the indicator lamps No (Bulb check OK and FA

remain illuminated.) indicator lamps go off or
do not illuminate.)
H
RA
Perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II. (For
details refer to “How to Perform Self-Diagnosis”,
EL-477.) BR
H H
ST
Go to “SYMPTOM CHART 1 (CONSULT-II SELF- Go to “SYMPTOM CHART 2 (BASED ON
DIAGNOSIS ITEM)”, EL-480. SYMPTOM)”, EL-481.
RS
FINAL CHECK H FINAL CHECK H

BT
Turn ignition switch to ON position and check IVCS If necessary, confirm the system operation in the
indicators operation. For details, refer to “PRELIMI- demonstration mode. (Refer to “SYSTEM OPERA- NG
NG
NARY CHECK” in EL-480. TION CHECK” in “Demonstration Mode”, EL-490.) HA
If both “MAYDAY” and “SERVICE” indicator
OK
lamps turn off after bulb check (self-diagnosis) is
completed, the system is OK.
OK
H H
Check out.
IDX
WARNING:
I Whenever possible, set the system to “Demonstration mode” if INFINITI Communicator system
needs to be activated during service procedures. (For details of the demonstration mode, refer to
EL-490.)
I If you activate the INFINITI Communicator system (when the system is not in the demonstration
mode), the Communicator Response Center operator may dispatch police.
EL-479
EXIT
PRELIMINARY CHECK
2. Check “MAYDAY”, “INFORMATION”, “REDIAL” and “NO SER-
VICE” indicator lamps operation.
SEL532V
I If no failure is detected, indicator lamps will turn off after the

bulb check (self-diagnosis) is terminated for about 30 seconds
or more.
NOTE:
I Bulb check (self-diagnosis) is not performed unless the ignition
switch has been turned off for at least 3 minutes.
I Bulb check is not performed during contact with Communica-
tor Response Center.
SEL516V
I If the system detects problems, both “MAYDAY” and “INFOR-

MATION” indicator lamps remain illuminated. Perform self-di-
agnosis using CONSULT-II and repair or replace the system.
Refer to “How to Perform Self-diagnosis”, EL-477.
SEL517V
NOTE:
For details of indicator lamps operation, refer to “INDICATOR
LAMPS OPERATION”, EL-467.
SYMPTOM CHART 1 (CONSULT-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS ITEM)
Detected items
Description Service procedure
(Screen items)
CONNECTION ERROR Go to GPS ANTENNA CHECK,
Connection error between GPS antenna and IVCS unit.
[GPS ANTENNA] EL-487.
CELLULAR PHONE Communication error between CPU in the IVCS unit and
Replace IVCS unit.
[TWB ERROR] transceiver
MEMORY ERROR Inner memory error of the IVCS unit Replace IVCS unit.
Go to AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SEN-
CONNECTION ERROR Connection error between air bag diagnosis sensor unit
SOR COMMUNICATION CHECK,
[AIR BAG] and IVCS unit.
EL-487.
Connection error between door switch control unit
CONNECTION ERROR [IVMS or (LCU04) and IVCS unit. Go to IVMS (LAN) COMMUNICA-
S/ENT] If this error occurs, alarm notification and auto door TION CHECK, EL-488.
unlock may not operate.
NOTE: After replacing IVCS unit, set up the replaced IVCS unit. Refer to “System Setting (When IVCS
Unit is Replaced.)” in EL-492.
EL-480
EXIT
SYMPTOM CHART 2 (BASED ON SYMPTOM)
Before referencing this chart, confirm the operation of the indicator lamps. Refer to “PRELIMINARY CHECK”
in EL-480. If the indicators show the system is malfunctioning, perform the self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II.
Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure Reference page
“MAYDAY”, “INFORMATION”, “RE-DIAL”,
GI
1. Power supply and ground circuit for IVCS unit check EL-482
“NO SERVICE” indicator lamps do not illu-
minate when ignition switch is turned to ON
position. (Bulb check is NG.)
2. Indicator lamps check EL-483 MA
1. IVCS switch check EL-484
Mayday/Information call does not operate. 2. INFINITI Communicator operation check in demonstration EM
EL-490
mode
1. Driver’s outside door handle switch check EL-485 LC
Remote door unlocking function does not 2. Remote door unlock function check EL-486
operate. 3. INFINITI Communicator operation check in demonstration
EL-490 EC
mode
1. Stolen vehicle tracking setting check
EL-486
Stolen vehicle tracking function does not (Check whether the function is disabled or not.) FE
operate. 2. INFINITI Communicator operation check in demonstration
EL-490
mode
AT
1. Alarm notification setting check
EL-486
(Check whether the function is disabled or not.)
Alarm notification function does not operate.
2. INFINITI Communicator operation check in demonstration PD
EL-490
mode
Hands free telephone cannot be operated FA
by using steering switch.
1. Telephone steering switch check EL-488
(Cellular phone operates properly by using
optional handset.) RA
No sounds related to the telephone are
heard from Front RH speaker. (If the audio 1. Check harness for open or short between IVCS unit and
— BR
does not operate properly, check the audio radio.
system.)
The “NO SERVICE” indicator lamp is not
1. Make sure the vehicle is in an area with cellular service. — ST
turned off. (Even if a contract with telephone
carrier has not been made, the indicator
2. Check cellular phone antenna feeder cable connection. —
lamp remains illuminated.) RS
1. Check hand set connector connection. —
Cellular phone does not operate properly.
2. Check hand set. —
BT
1. Check harness for open or short between IVCS unit and
No sound is transmitted to the other party —
microphone.
by hands free telephone.
2. Replace microphone. (IVCS switch assembly) — HA
IDX
EL-481
EXIT
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR IVCS
UNIT CHECK
Main power supply circuit check
Terminal Ignition switch
(+) (−) OFF ACC ON
q
18 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage
q
2 Ground 0V 0V Battery voltage
If NG, check the following:

I 15A fuse [No. 58 , located in fuse and fusible link box]
I Harness for open or short between fuse and IVCS unit
SEL976V

q
17 - Ground Yes
SEL519VA
EL-482
EXIT
INDICATOR LAMPS CHECK
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR INDICA- No Check the following.

E
TOR LAMPS. I 10A fuse [No. 27 ,
Check voltage between IVCS switch ter- located in fuse block GI
minal q
1 and ground. (J/B)]
Does battery voltage exist? I Harness for open or
short between fuse and MA
Yes
IVCS switch
SEL583VA EM
H
CHECK INDICATOR LAMPS. NG Replace IVCS switch
E
1. Disconnect IVCS unit connector (Con- assembly. LC
trol unit connector).
2. Apply ground to IVCS switch each ter-
minal and check illumination. EC
Indicator Terminal
Redial q
8 FE
No service q
9
Mayday q
10
q
SEL584V
Information 11
AT
OK
H
PD
indicators and IVCS unit.
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-483
EXIT
IVCS SWITCH CHECK
CHECK IVCS SWITCH INPUT OK IVCS switch is OK.

E
SIGNAL.
2. Select “SWITCH MONITOR” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode.
3. Check each switch signal.
When MAYDAY/INFORMATION switch
is pushed:
SEL468W MAYDAY/INFORMATION ON
When MAYDAY/INFORMATION switch
is released:
MAYDAY/INFORMATION OFF
NOTE:
When CONSULT-II “Data mode” is
operating, INFINITI Communicator does
not dial to Communicator Response
Center when the switches are operated.
NG
H
SEL521V OK
CHECK IVCS SWITCH. Check the following:
E
1. Disconnect IVCS switch. I IVCS switch ground cir-
2. Check continuity between IVCS switch cuit
terminals. I Harness for open or
short between IVCS
switch and IVCS unit.
Mayday switch
Yes
is turned ON.
q
6 -q
3
Mayday switch
No
is OFF.
Information
switch is turned Yes
q
7 -q
3 ON.
Information
No
switch is OFF.
NG
H
Replace IVCS switch assembly.
EL-484
EXIT
DRIVER’S OUTSIDE DOOR HANDLE SWITCH CHECK
CHECK OUTSIDE DOOR OK Driver’s door outside

E
HANDLE SWITCH INPUT SIG- handle switch is OK.
NAL. GI
2. Select “SWITCH MONITOR” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode. MA
3. Check the switch operation.
When driver side outside door handle is
SEL468W pulled: EM
DR HANDLE ON
When driver side outside door handle is
released: LC
DR HANDLE OFF
NOTE:
When CONSULT-II “Data mode” is EC
operating, INFINITI Communicator do
not dial to Communicator Response
Center when the switches are operated.
FE
NG
SEL653V
AT
H
CHECK OUTSIDE DOOR HANDLE OK Check the following.
E
SWITCH. I Outside door handle PD
1. Disconnect driver side door key cylinder switch ground circuit
switch connector. (outside door handle I Harness for open or
switch connector is combined with the short between outside FA
key cylinder switch.) door handle switch and
2. Check continuity between the door key IVCS unit.
cylinder switch terminal q
1 and q 2 . RA
Outside door handle

switch condition
Continuity BR
Pulled Yes
Released No
ST
NG
H
Replace outside door handle switch. RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-485
EXIT
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION CHECK
(CONSULT-II “FUNCTION CHECK” MODE)
Description
“Remote door unlock function” can be checked using CONSULT-
II. Driver side door can be unlocked according to the commands to
the door LCU by the IVCS unit.
Note:
Before performing the function check, confirm that power
door lock system operates properly.
How to perform function check.

1. Lock the doors with door lock/unlock switch on driver’s door
trim.
2. Touch “FUNCTION CHECK”.
3. Touch “DOOR UNLOCK”.
SEL450W
4. Touch “START”. Then driver side door will be unlocked.

I If the door cannot be unlocked using CONSULT-II, check har-
ness for open or short between rear LH door control unit
(LCU04) terminal q 2 and IVCS unit terminal q
32 .
SEL451W
STOLEN VEHICLE TRACKING/ALARM NOTIFICATION

SETTING CHECK (CONSULT-II “CONFIGURATION”
MODE)
NG
CHECK SYSTEM SETTING. E If either setting is “OFF”,
contact the Communicator
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Response Center at 1-888-
2. Select “VHCL TRACKING” or “ALARM 427-4812 to verify the sys-
NOTIFICATION” in “CONFIGURATION” tem setting.
mode. NOTE:
3. Check the function setting. Whenever dialing the
SEL452W I “ON” shows the function is activated. above number, some
I “OFF” shows the function is deactivated. information about the
Does the system setting comply with vehicle is required by the
the customer’s contract? operator. For details,
refer to EL-462.
NOTE:
Setting of “VEHICLE TRACKING” must
be ON at any time.
OK
H
System setting is OK.
EL-486
EXIT
GPS ANTENNA CHECK
CHECK VOLTAGE FOR GPS ANTENNA. No Replace IVCS unit.

E
1. Disconnect GPS feeder cable connec-
tor from IVCS unit. GI
3. Check voltage at IVCS unit GPS feeder
cable terminal. MA
Does approx. 5V exist?
SEL666V Yes EM
H
Replace GPS antenna.
LC
EC
FE
AT
AIR BAG DIAGNOSES SENSOR UNIT COMMUNICATION
CHECK PD
AIR BAG OPERATION CHECK No Check supplemental FA

E
Turn ignition switch ON and check air bag restraint system. Refer to
warning lamp operation. (For details, refer RS section in the Service
to RS section.) manual. RA
Does air bag warning lamp operate
properly?
BR
MRS037A Yes
H
Check harness connector connection ST
between air bag diagnosis sensor unit and
IVCS unit.
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-487
EXIT
IVMS (LAN) COMMUNICATION CHECK
CHECK IVMS OPERATION. No Check IVMS (LAN), refer
E
Check the system related rear LH door to “IVMS (LAN)” in the Ser-
control unit (LCU04) operation (e.g.: vice manual.
power door lock, power window).
Do the systems operate properly?
Yes
H
rear LH door control unit (LCU04) terminal
q9 and IVCS unit terminal q 33 .
TELEPHONE STEERING SWITCH CHECK

CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR STEER- No Check the following.
E
ING SWITCH. I 10A fuse (No. 64 ,
Does horn work? located in fuse and fus-
ible link box)
Yes
I Horn relay
short
H
CHECK STEERING SWITCH SUB HAR- NG Replace or repair the har-
E
NESS. ness.
1. Remove driver’s air bag module. For
removal procedure, refer to RS section.
2. Check steering switch sub-harness for
open or short and ground screw.
For details of the harness circuit, refer
to “STEERING SWITCH”, EL-44.
OK
H
telephone steering switch and IVCS unit.
If the circuit is OK, replace telephone
steering switch.
EL-488
EXIT
Trouble Diagnoses for Intermittent Incident

DESCRIPTION
An intermittent incident may be occurring if all of the following conditions exist.
I Both “MAYDAY” emergency and “INFORMATION” indicators have shown that the system is malfunction-
ing. GI
I CONSULT-II self-diagnosis result screen indicates a trouble code with “TIME = 1 or greater”.
I The INFINITI Communicator system has not been previously serviced.
To find out the cause of a problem, follow the procedures shown below. MA
EM
Confirm the trouble code using CONSULT-II, for details refer to EL-477.
If CONSULT-II shows any trouble code with “TIME = 1 or greater” even though the INFINITI Communicator system has never
been serviced, it may be an intermittent problem.
LC
Trouble code: Trouble code Trouble code: Trouble code:
“CELLULAR “CONNECTION “CONNECTION “CONNECTION
PHONE [TWB ERROR ERROR [AIR BAG]” ERROR [IVMS or EC
ERROR]” or [GPS ANTENNA]” S/ENT]”
“MEMORY
ERROR”
H FE
Replace IVCS unit.
H
AT
Gently apply a slight vibration to GPS antenna and feeder cable connec-
tors with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Do both “MAYDAY” and “INFORMATION” indicator lamps illuminate? PD
Yes No
H H
Repair or replace There is a possibility that the GPS antenna FA
malfunctioning parts. connector has been disconnected with the igni-
tion switch in the ON position. Further diagno-
sis may not be required.
RA
H
Perform self-diagnosis of AIR BAG in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” mode using CONSULT-II. For details, refer
to RS section. BR
Does CONSULT-II show any trouble code?
Yes No
H H ST
Repair or replace Perform self-diagnosis of AIR BAG in “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” mode
malfunctioning parts using CONSULT-II. For details, refer to RS section.
with following RS Does CONSULT-II show any trouble code?
section.
RS
Yes No
H H
Problem has been already solved. So no fur- Check connector terminals between IVCS unit BT
ther diagnosis is required. and air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to
“How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Ter-
minals” (GI section). HA
H
Perform self-diagnosis of IVMS in “IVMS COMM DIAGNOSIS” mode using CONSULT-II. For details, refer to “CONSULT-II” in
“IVMS (LAN)”, EL-247.
Does CONSULT-II show any past trouble code?
NOTE: If IVMS (LAN) has been serviced ever, system may have already repaired.
IDX
Yes No
H H
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts with fol- Check connector terminals between IVCS unit terminal q 33 and Rear LH
lowing IVMS (LAN). Refer to EL-249. door control unit terminal q
9 . Refer to “How to Check Enlarged Contact
Spring of Terminals” (GI section).
NOTE:
Enlarged spring contact of terminals may be cause of intermittent problem for “CONNECTION ERROR [AIR
BAG]/[IVMS or S/ENT]”. When you inspect terminals for enlarged contact, refer to “How to Check Enlarged
Contact Spring of Terminals” in GI section.
EL-489
EXIT
Demonstration Mode
DESCRIPTION
By setting up the system in the demonstration mode, automatic
dialing operation can be confirmed by “MAYDAY” emergency and
“INFORMATION” switch operation.
Automatic dialing in this mode is connected to the demonstration
center of Communicator Response Center, and is different from the
normal service.
When the contract with Communicator Response Center is not
concluded, all the INFINITI Communicator operations are con-
nected to the demonstration center.
Connection to Communicator Response Center in this mode will
not be charged by Communicator Response Center nor will the call
be handled as an emergency.
SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK

1. Touch “CONFIGURATION”.
SEL453W
2. Touch “DEMO MODE”.
SEL454W
3. Touch “ON”. Now, the system is in demonstration mode. (To

return to normal mode, touch “OFF”.)
SEL455W
EL-490
EXIT
Demonstration Mode (Cont’d)
4. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM”
appears, then turn off CONSULT-II.
5. Turn ignition switch to the OFF position.
6. Disconnect CONSULT-II DDL connector.
8. Touch the “MAYDAY” or “INFORMATION” switches. Then the GI
system will call the demonstration center.
MA
SEL528V EM
9. Check INFINITI Communicator operation.
I If contact with Communicator Response Center is successful, LC
system is OK.
NOTE:
During the system contact to Communicator Response Cen- EC
ter in demonstration mode, “REDIAL” and “NO SERVICE” indi-
cators blink alternately.
FE
SEL529V
AT
I If “NO SERVICE” indicator illuminates and the contact to Com-
municator Response Center is unsuccessful, retry from other PD
location where the cellular connection seems good. (e.g.;
move the vehicle outside of the workshop and retry.)
NOTE: FA
If “NO SERVICE” indicator frequently illuminates from a loca-
tion where the cellular connection seems good, check the con-
nection of the feeder cable for the cellular phone antenna.
RA
BR
SEL530V
I If “REDIAL” indicator lamp illuminates and the contact to Com- ST

municator Response Center is unsuccessful, the cellular net-
work is busy or there are no open cellular channels. The sys-
tem will redial automatically. RS
NOTE:
If redial fails several times, confirm whether the roaming
agreement of customer’s cellular provider at the vehicle loca- BT
tion is available or not.
HA
SEL531V
Warning:
I Make sure to turn the demonstration mode OFF before
returning the vehicle to the owner.
I In the demonstration mode, any service from Communica- IDX
tor Response Center is not available. Therefore, even if
the customer encounters an emergency, no service will be
dispatched.
EL-491
EXIT
System Setting (When IVCS unit is replaced)

DESCRIPTION
When the IVCS unit is replaced, carry out the following data settings.
I Phone setup — Data setting regarding NAM (Number Assignment Module)
I Phone number — Phone number setting
NOTE:
I Data must not be updated without prior approval from the customer.
I NAM and phone number can be programmed by using optional handset. For details, refer to the
handset operation manual.
I The IVCS unit does not permit updating of NAM more than 15 times.
WORK FLOW
Confirm the contract items (contents) to be set with the customer/Communicator Response Center.
I At the time of IVCS unit replacement Phone number
I NAM (Number Assignment Module) update
and phone number updated
H H
Input phone number. Refer to “Phone number setting” in EL-493.
H
Input NAM. Refer to “Phone set up” in EL-494.
H
Confirmt the setting of “Stolen vehicle tracking” and “Alarm
notification”. Refer to EL-495.
H H
Dialing to Communicator Response Center
1. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears, then turn ignition switch to the OFF position.
2. Turn off CONSULT-II.
3. Disconnect CONSULT-II DDL connector.
5. The INFINITI Communicator system automatically dials the Communicator Response Center.
NOTE: Whenever the phone number is updated or IVCS unit is replaced, auto dialing to Communicator Response
Center is executed after the ignition switch is turned ON.
6. Verify that Communicator Response Center operator comes on line.
NOTE: Do not leave the vehicle before the Communicator Response Center operator comes on line. If the Communi-
cator Response Center operator comes on line and no one responds, the Communicator Response Center
operator will assume a duress situation and dispatch police to the vehicle location.
7. Tell the Communicator Response Center operator why unit was replaced or data was updated. (After that, follow the opera-
tor’s instructions.)
H
END
NOTE:
I If a Communicator Response Center operator does not come on line even though the system
activates, the system may not be properly configured. Call the Communicator Response Center at
1-888-427-4812 to verify the configuration information.
I Whenever dialing the above number, information about the vehicle is required by the operator. For
details, refer to EL-462.
I Never release the vehicle to the customer unless INFINITI Communicator system operation is veri-
fied by a Communicator Response Center operator coming on line.
EL-492
EXIT
(Cont’d)
PHONE NUMBER SETTING
2. Touch “PHONE NUMBER”.
GI
MA
SEL456W EM
3. Touch “WRITE” or “REWRITE”.
I If no phone number is previously memorized, the display LC
shows “This unit has no cellular phone number programmed”.
EC
FE
SEL715W
AT
I If the phone number is previously memorized, the display
shows the current phone number. PD
I To erase the phone number, touch “ERASE”.
FA
RA
BR
SEL458W
4. Input new phone number. ST

5. Touch “ENTER”.
RS
BT
HA
SEL459W
6. Touch “OK”.
7. Carry out the next system setting or contact Communicator
Response Center and information them that data has been
updated or the IVCS unit has been replaced. For details, refer IDX
to EL-492.
NOTE: Whenever the phone number is updated or the IVCS
unit is replaced, the INFINITI Communicator system
automatically contacts the Communicator Response
Center the first time the vehicle is started.
SEL460W
EL-493
EXIT
(Cont’d)
PHONE SET UP
2. Touch “PHONE SET UP”.
SEL461W
3. Touch “WRITE” or “REWRITE”.

I If no data is previously memorized, the display shows “This
unit has no required data programmed”.
SEL716W
I If NAM (Number Assignment Module) data is previously

memorized, the display shows the current NAM data.
I To erase the NAM, touch “ERASE”.
SEL465W
4. Input new NAM data.

I SYS ID (Carrier system ID number) — Available number: 0 to
32765
I GR ID (Group ID mark) — Available number: 0 to 15
I OVERLOAD CLASS (Access overload class) — Available
number: 0 to 15
I SECURITY CODE (User security code)
I UNLOCK CODE
I INIT PAGE CH (Initial paging channel)
NOTE: If an unavailable number is input as “SYS ID”, “GR ID”
SEL464W
or “OVERLOAD CLASS”, CONSULT-II may be locked.
In such cases, disconnect the vehicle battery cable
once and then setup the system again.
5. Touch “ENTER”.
EL-494
EXIT
(Cont’d)
6. Touch “OK”.
7. Carry out the next system setting or contact Communicator
Response Center and inform them that data has been updated
or IVCS unit has been replaced. For details, refer to EL-492. GI
NOTE: Whenever the phone number is updated or the IVCS
unit is replaced, the INFINITI Communicator system
automatically contacts the Communicator Response MA
Center the first time the vehicle is stared.
SEL462W EM
STOLEN VEHICLE TRACKING/ALARM NOTIFICATION
SETTING CHECK LC
2. Touch “VEHICLE TRACKING” or “ALARM NOTIFICATION”.
EC
FE
SEL466W
AT
3. This function should always be “ON” (function activate.)
NOTE: PD
I If either setting is “OFF”, contact the Communicator
Response Center at 1-888-427-4812 to verify the system
setting. FA
I Whenever dialing the above number, information about
the vehicle is required by the operator. For details, refer to
EL-462.
RA
BR
SEL467W
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-495
EXIT
LOCATION OF ELECTRICAL UNITS
Engine Compartment
CEL050M
EL-496
EXIT
Luggage Compartment
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL051M
EL-497
EXIT
Passenger Compartment
CEL052M
EL-498
EXIT
Passenger Compartment (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
CEL920
HA
IDX
EL-499
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline
CEL440-B
EL-500
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
How to Read Harness Layout
Example:
G2 E1 B/6 : ASCD ACTUATOR

GI
Connector color / Cavity
Connector number
MA
Grid reference
EM
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
I Main Harness
I Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) LC
I Body Harness and Tail Harness
I Body No. 2 Harness
EC
To use the grid reference
1) Find the desired connector number on the connector list.
2) Find the grid reference.
FE
3) On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row.
4) Find the connector number in the crossing zone. AT
5) Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
CONNECTOR SYMBOL PD
Main symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated in the below.
Water proof type Standard type FA

Connector type
Male Female Male Female
I Cavity: Less than 4 RA
I Relay connector
I Cavity: From 5 to 8
BR
I Cavity: More than 9
— —
ST
I Ground terminal etc.
—
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-501
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness
CEL053M
EL-502
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL054M
EL-503
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
CEL055M
EL-504
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
Instrument Harness
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL056M
EL-505
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness
CEL057M
EL-506
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL058M
EL-507
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
CEL059M
EL-508
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL060M
EL-509
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness and Tail Harness
CEL061M
EL-510
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness and Tail Harness (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL062M
EL-511
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body No. 2 Harness
CEL063M
EL-512
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body No. 2 Harness (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL064M
EL-513
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Harness
CEL014A
EL-514
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
Room Lamp Harness
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL065M
EL-515
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
Air Bag Harness
CEL455
EL-516
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
DRIVER SIDE Front Door Harness
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
CEL066M
PASSENGER SIDE RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL067M
EL-517
EXIT
HARNESS LAYOUT
LH SIDE Rear Door Harness
CEL458
RH SIDE
CEL459
EL-518
EXIT
SPLICE LOCATION
How to Read Splice Location

I “GT2”, “T4” etc., which are shown in the wiring diagram, refer
to wiring harness splice points. These points are located in
shaded areas “ ”, “ ”, etc. in illustrations under the title
“SPLICE LOCATION”. GI
I Wiring harness splice points are subject to change without
prior notice.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
CEL460
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-519
EXIT
SPLICE LOCATION
Engine Room Harness
CEL068M
EL-520
EXIT
SPLICE LOCATION
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL069M
EL-521
EXIT
SPLICE LOCATION
Main Harness
CEL070M
EL-522
EXIT
SPLICE LOCATION
Instrument Harness
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL071M
EL-523
EXIT
SPLICE LOCATION
CEL011M
EL-524
EXIT
SPLICE LOCATION
Engine Harness
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL466
EL-525
EXIT
SPLICE LOCATION
Body Harness and Tail Harness
CEL072M
EL-526
EXIT
SPLICE LOCATION
Body No. 2 Harness
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL073M
EL-527
EXIT
SPLICE LOCATION
Room Lamp Harness
CEL074M
EL-528
EXIT
SPLICE LOCATION
DRIVER SIDE Front Door Harness
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
PD
FA
CEL075M
PASSENGER SIDE RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
CEL076M
EL-529
EXIT
SPLICE LOCATION
LH SIDE Rear Door Harness
CEL612
RH SIDE
CEL615
EL-530
EXIT
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
Headlamp
Item Wattage W
High/Low 55/35 (H1/D2R)
GI
Exterior Lamp
Item Wattage W
MA
Front fog lamp 55
Front combination lamp
EM
Turn signal/Parking lamp 27/8
Rear combination lamp
Turn signal lamp 21
LC
Stop/Tail lamp 21/5
Tail lamp 5 EC
Back-up lamp 18
License lamp 5 FE
High-mounted stop lamp 18
AT
Interior Lamp
Item Wattage W PD
Front map lamp 8
Rear personal lamp 8
FA
Vanity mirror lamp 1.4
Step lamp 2.7
RA
Footwell lamp 3.4
Trunk room lamp 3.4
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-531
EXIT
WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (Cell codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code
stands for.
Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find
the location (page number) of each wiring diagram.
Code Section Wiring Diagram Name Code Section Wiring Diagram Name
AAC/V EC IACV-AAC Valve F/PUMP EC Fuel Pump
A/C HA Air Conditioner Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater
FRO2LH EC
ACTIVE FA Active Damper Suspension System (Front HO2S) (Left Bank)
AP/SEN EC Absolute Pressure Sensor Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater

FRO2RH EC
(Front HO2S) (Right Bank)
Automatic Speed Control Device
ASCD EL Fuel Injection System Function
(ASCD) FUELLH EC
(Left Bank)
A/T AT A/T
Fuel Injection System Function
AT/IND EL A/T Indicator Lamp FUELRH EC
(Right Bank)
AT/C EC A/T Control H/AIM EL Headlamp Aiming Control System
AUDIO EL Audio H/LAMP EL Headlamp
AUT/DP EL Automatic Drive Positioner — IVMS HORN EL Horn
BACK/L EL Back-up Lamp HSEAT EL Heated Seat
BYPS/V EC Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve IATS EC Intake Air Temperature Sensor
EVAP Canister Purge Control Valve/ IGN/SG EC Ignition Signal
CANI/V EC
Solenoid Valve
ILL EL Illumination
CHARGE EL Charging System
I/MIRR EL Inside Mirror
CHIME EL Warning Chime
INJECT EC Injector
CIGAR EL Cigarette Lighter
Vanity Mirror and Trunk Room
CKPS EC Crank Shaft Position Sensor (OBD) INT/L EL
Lamps
CLOCK EL Clock Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid
IVC-L EC
CMPS EC Camshaft Position Sensor Valve LH
IVMS — Communication Check, Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid
COMM EL IVC-R EC
Power Supply & Ground Valve RH
COOL/F EC Cooling Fan Control IVCS EL Infiniti Communicator (IVCS)
DEF EL Rear Window Defogger Intake Valve Timing Control Position
IVCS-L EC
Sensor LH
D/LOCK EL Power Door Lock — IVMS
Intake Valve Timing Control Position
Headlamp - With Daytime Light Sys- IVCS-R EC
DTRL EL Sensor RH
tem
KS EC Knock Sensor
Engine Coolant Temperature
ECTS EC
Sensor LOAD EC Load Signal
EGRC1 EC EGR Function MAFS EC Mass Air Flow Sensor
EGRC/V EC EGRC-Solenoid Valve Main Power Supply and Ground Cir-
MAIN EC
cuit
EGR/TS EC EGR Temperature Sensor
Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp.,
Electric Controlled Power Steering METER EL
EPS ST Oil and Fuel Gauges
System
MIL/DL EC MIL and Data Link Connectors
F/FOG EL Front Fog Lamp
MIRROR EL Door Mirror
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater
FO2H-L EC
(Left Bank) Multi-remote Control System —
MULTI EL
IVMS
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater
FO2H-R EC
(Right Bank) NATS EL NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System)
FPCM EC Fuel Pump Control Module P/ANT EL Power Antenna
EL-532
EXIT
WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (Cell codes)
Code Section Wiring Diagram Name Code Section Wiring Diagram Name
EVAP Canister Purge Control Sole- STPS EC Secondary Throttle Position Sensor
PGC/V EC
noid Valve Power Window Switch Illumination
SW/ILL EL
PHONE EL Telephone — IVMS
GI
PNP/SW EC Park/Neutral Position Switch SW/V EC MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve
POWER EL Power Supply Routing Parking, License, Tail and Stop
TAIL/L EL
Lamps MA
EVAP Control System Pressure Sen-
PRE/SE EC
sor T/CLOS EL Trunk Closure
PST/SW EC Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch TCS EC Traction Control System EM
REMOTE EL Audio (Remote Control Switch) TCS BR Traction Control System
ROOM/L EL Interior Room Lamp — IVMS TCS/SW EC TCS Signal LC
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater T&FLID EL Trunk Lid and Fuel Filler Lid Opener
RO2H-L EC
LH FTTS EC Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor EC
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater THEFT EL Theft Warning System — IVMS
RO2H-R EC
RH
TPS EC Throttle Position Sensor
RRO2LH EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor LH FE
TP/SW EC Throttle Position Switch
RRO2H EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RH
TRNSMT EL Integrated Homelink Transmitter
SEAT EL Power Seat AT
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
SHADE EL Rear Sunshade TURN EL
Lamps
SHIFT AT A/T Shift Lock System VENT/V EC EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve PD
SROOF EL Sunroof VSS EC Vehicle Speed Sensor
SRS RS Supplemental Restraint System WARN EL Warning Lamps FA
S/SIG EC Start Signal WINDOW EL Power Window — IVMS
START EL Starting System WIPER EL Front Wiper and Washer RA
STEP/L EL Step Lamp — IVMS
STOP/L EL Stop lamp
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
IDX
EL-533
EXIT
NOTES

Electrical System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical System

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EXIT

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS

Wiring Diagram — POWER —

Circuit Breaker Inspection

Engine Room Harness

Engine Control Harness

Body No. 2 Harness

I Check the charge condition of the battery. ST

CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK

CHARGING THE BATTERY EM

Wiring Diagram — START —

Removal and Installation

Wiring Diagram — CHARGE —

Warning lamp Damaged IC

Warning lamp OK Engine speed: More than Damaged IC

Warning lamp: “CHARGE” warning lamp in combination meter

Removal and Installation

Service Data and Specifications (SDS) ST

Component Parts and Harness Connector

HEADLAMP SWITCH OPERATION

High beam operation/flash-to-pass operation EM

THEFT WARNING SYSTEM

Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —

CONSULT-II (For auto light operation)

6. Touch “AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM”. ST

Trouble Diagnoses/Auto Light Operation

E Repair/Replace according to the self- Select diagnostic procedure on the F

(Illumination time control switch check)

(Lighting switch “AUTO” check)

(Auto light output check)

(IGN input signal check)

Perform On board diagnosis — Mode II

See “HEADLAMP RELAY” and “TAIL

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON position

Output condition Voltage V

Sensor not struck by light

Sensor struck by light Approx. 12

1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC position.

Sensor struck by light More than 3

SEL559UA Sensor not struck by light Approx. 0.5

Check voltage between BCM terminal q

Termi- Ignition switch position

Refer to wiring diagram in EL-52.

CHECK ILLUMINATION TIME CONTROL

1. Disconnect BCM connector. FE

Fully short Approx. 0

Refer to wiring diagram in EL-52.

Trouble Diagnoses/Headlamp (Xenon Type)

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

2. Bulb 2. Check bulb. MA

2. HID relay 2. Check HID relay. FE

Bulb Replacement/Xenon Type

XENON BULB (LOW BEAM)

2. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise with keep pushing, then

Aiming Adjustment/Xenon Type

Component Parts and Harness Connector

AUTO LIGHT OPERATION